Home

System 3 Manual

1. RZ6 Analog Output Flow Diagram RZ6 Features Onboard Analog I O and Optional Amplifier Input The RZ6 is equipped with onboard analog I O and may also include a fiber optic port for Medusa preamplifier input The following table provides a quick overview of the analog I O and amplifier input features and how they must be accessed during circuit design The RZ6 relies exclusively on macros for configuring analog and digital I O and its fiber optic input port See the RPvdsEx Manual for more information on circuit design Analog I O Description ADC Inputs Analog Input DAC Outputs Analog Output Optical Amp Medusa PreAmp Input Onboard Analog Inputs Channels A and B A and B 1 4 Required Macro RZ6_AudioIn RZ6_AudioOut RZ6_AmpIn A DAC PA MA MON ii A LVL ores A Z T A amp B ney OUT A i 4 SPEAKER opam ey O i eS ae Our B I B A be Mem UIE The RZ6 is equipped with two channels of 24 bit sigma delta A D converters See RZ6 Technical Specifications page 1 32 for more information Analog signals can be input through several connectors on the RZ6 front panel Channel A has three possible sources gt MIC A XLR microphone input gt DIFF A 1 4 TRS microphone input gt BNC labeled In A Channel B uses only the BNC labeled In B Mic A System 3 Manual Analog Inputs MFB Important Use onl
2. RX5 PENTUSA BASE STATION status AMPA AMPI AMP D JAMP o0000 ADO AASA oSA oD srs de uM ut u2 u3 u4 Al Re 2 She SS o0 04 BAB pe Mave Cyc 00 0 0 0 1008 Zeus FoR gt 8 SYSTEM 3 a 4 Muit DSP c XLINK PEA Murti vO SESA AL A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 Ct C2 C3 C4 RNE 1 BD 7 9 10613 15 17 19 21 23 A5 A6 A7 A8 B5 B6 B7 B8 c5 C6 C7 C8 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Bit Addressable Digital Digital I O Byte A Digital I O Byte B VO Channels 0 7 Channels 8 15 Channels 0 7 The diagram below maps the RX5 or RX7 Multi I O connections to the PP24 All digital bits are programmable as input or output RX5 PENTUSA BASE STATION Status AMP A AMP B AMP C AMP D abrea oee o ee e rT ers Idle uM ul u2 u3 u4 All MIATA 00 O4 DAG 1 Leal Mope Cyc 0 00 0 0 0 1005 gt Zeus FOR 2006 SYSTEM 3 ee Muir DSP oc XLINK PROCESSOR PEEN 3007 Ai A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 Ct C2 C3 C4 ey AA a o E E a ENA TN LEN LION NEL 1 S S7 9 tt 13 15 17 19 21 23 A5 A6 A7 A8 B5 B6 B7 B8 C5 C6 C7 C8 lt 2 4 E8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Analog Outputs Digital I O Byte C Digital I O Byte D A2 A4 A6 A8 Channels 16 23 Channels 24 31 Channels 1 4 A1 A3 A5 A7 Not Used System 3 Manual 16 20 Signal Handling Mapping RX6 I O Note The PP24 can be mounted
3. Analog PinName Description Pin Name Description 1 14 Al 2 15 A2 Analog Output 3 AGND Analog Ground 16 1A3 Channels 4 17 A4 5 GND Digital I O Ground 18 CO Byte C 6 C1 Byte C 19 C2 ord addressable 7 1c3 Word addressable bho C4 digital I O digital I O ET Bits 0 2 4 and 6 A Bits 1 3 5 and 7 9 C7 22 DO Byte D 10 D1 h3 D2 ord addressable T yte D bz py igital VO Word addressable Bits 0 2 4 and 6 12 D5 digital I O 25 D6 13 D7 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 Digital I O GND Byte B Byte A G3 42 4 GOCE ENG 4 3 G G5 G4 G3 CICI GIGI CAG Ge C5 G4 Bit Addr Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 BAO Bit Addressable 14 BAI _ Bit Addressable 2 IBA2 digital I O 15 BA2 digital I O 3 BA4 Bits 0 2 4 and 6 16 BA3 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 4 BA6 17 BA4 5 GND Digital I O Ground 18 AO IByte A 6 Al Byte A 19 A2 ord addressable 7 A3 Word addressable bo A4 digital T O digital I O TEDT Bits 0 2 4 and 6 ral Bits 1 3 5 and 7 9 A7 22 BO Byte B 10 B1 h3 B2 ord addressable ByE B digital I O 11 B3 Word addressable 24 B4 i ie Bits 0 2 4 and 6 12 B5 digital I O 25 B6 13 B7 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 13 RX6 Piranha Multifunction Processor Overview The RX6 Piranha Multifunction Processor is a high performance multiple DSP device for researchers who need to acquire or produce high sample rate signals The RX6 suppor
4. Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 Al Analog Input Channels 14 A2 Analog Input Channels 2 A3 15 A4 3 JA5 16 A6 4 JA7 17 A8 5 NA Not Used 18 A9 6 JA10 Analog Input Channels 19 All 7 Al2 20 Al3 8 Al4 21 JA15 9 JA16 22 NA INot Used 10 NA Not Used 23 11 24 12 25 13 Note Female pin in shown System 3 Manual 16 26 Signal Handling J2 DB25 Pinout Analog input channels 1 8 Typically used to input signals from the RA16BA or the RV8 GND AA D2 EEES 9 A7 46045144 Note Female pin in shown F CEO BABAT Analog Input Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 Al Analog Input Channels 14 A2 Analog Input Channels 2 A3 15 A4 3 IAS 16 A6 4 A7 17 A8 5 GND_ Ground 18 NA Not Used 6 NA Not Used 19 i 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 J3 DB25 Pinout Analog input channels 9 16 Typically used to input signals from the RAI6BA GND 8200 OOG acy i 8 BQ a a 44 j Note Female pin in shown Analog Input Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 A9 Analog Input Channels 14 JA10 Analog Input Channels 2 All 15 JA12 3 JA13 16 JA14 4 jAl5 17 JA16 5 IGND Ground 18 NA Not Used 6 NA Not Used 19 7 20 8 21 9
5. Bit Addressable Digital Digital I O Byte A Digital I O Byte B VO Channels 0 7 Channels 0 7 Channels 0 7 The diagram below maps the RZ5 Analog I O connection to the PP24 oof poe n SPEAKER a VOLUME hs aan S idle ul u2 Al ay 9 Paa u aa NY Ta PA Cy 0 0 0 4 a MIN Max eee r 7 Processors Mane z gea RZ5 o g i Bio AMP PRoceesar Disitat 1 0 ADG Dac O Of o DiciTaL vO J SNN ANALOG I 0 j1 Os Pir ow 3 eae ae Gu a 3 O7 t 2 AMP A AMP B A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4 PORON z4 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 A5 A6 A7 AB B5 B6 B7 B8 C5 C6 C7 C8 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 A1 A8 B5 B8 C5 C8 B1 B4 C1 C4 Not Used Analog Input Analog Output Channels 1 4 Channels 9 12 System 3 Manual Signal Handling 16 23 ETM1 Experiment Test Module Connection to Acute Headstage Connection to Chronic Headstage J1 Connection to J2 and J3 Connections to Medusa or Patch Panel Barracuda Analog Outputs Overview The Experiment Test Module ETM1 allows you to design and test experimental protocols before running critical experiments and can be used to input signals into either the chronic RA16CH or acute RAI16AC headstages from the analog outputs of the Medusa RA16BA or Barracuda Processor RV8 The ETM also accepts signals via the Patch Panel PP16 A processor can be used to
6. Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 El Electrode Channels 14 V _ Positive Voltage 2 E2 15 JGND Ground 3 E3 16 GND Ground 4 E4 17 IV Negative Voltage 5 Ref Reference 18 N A Not Used 6 N A Not Used 19 N A Not Used 7 ES Electrode Channels 20 E6 Electrode Channels 8 E7 21 E8 9 E9 22 E10 10 Ell 23 E12 11 E13 24 El4 12 E15 25 E16 13 GND_ Ground AC64 Headstage Connectors Pinout Important Connectors 2 3 and 4 share common GND V and V Electrode Ref Electrode GND VOODOO 08 OOOD O O OO O edee V ND V HSD Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 El Electrode Channels 14 V Positive Voltage 2 E2 15 GND Ground 3 JE3 16 GND Ground 4 E4 17 V Negative Voltage 5 Ref Reference 18 HSD _ Headstage Detect 6 HSD Headstage Detect 19 HSD Headstage Detect 7 JES Electrode Channels 20 E6 Electrode Channels 8 amp 8 E7 21 E8 9 E9 22 E10 10 Ell 23 E12 11 E13 24 E14 12 E15 25 E16 13 GND Ground 26 N A Not Used System 3 Manual 13 10 Commutator System 3 Manual Part 14 Transducers and Amplifiers System 3 Manual 14 2 Transducers and Amplifiers System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 3 CF1 FF1 Magnetic Speakers Overview TDT Magnetic Speakers offer high output and fidelity over a bandw
7. Technical Specifications Warning When using multiple headstages ensure that all ground pins are connected to a single common node See page 5 29 for more information Input inferred noise rms 3 u V bandwidth 300 3000 Hz rms 6 u V bandwidth 30 8000 Hz Headstage Gain Unity 1x Input Impedance 10 Ohms Pinout Guide Pin Guide Pin OO OOO OD DO QDOQDOOO Looking into headstage The numbers on the pinout diagram above show the channel connections to the amplifier By default the RA16CH LP16CH inputs are single ended with Ref and GND tied together A jumper is provided to give the user the option of making the inputs differential To make the inputs differential cut the jumper pictured below Jumper RA16CH Jumper LP16CH System 3 Manual 8 20 High Impedance Headstages RA4AC Four Channel Headstage Overview The 4 Channel Acute headstages are recommended for extracellular neurophysiology using silicon electrodes metal microelectrodes or microwire arrays with input impedances from 20 kOhm to 5 MOhm The RA4ACI1 and RA4AC4 headstages have a low profile 6 pin connector The RA4AC1 provides unity gain 1x The RA4AC4 provides 4x gain and is used with electrodes with a recommended impedance range of 20 kOhm to 300 kOhm The 25 pin connector connects to the RA4PA 4 channel Medusa preamplifier Part Numbers RA4AC1 4 Channel Acute Headstage for Medusa PreAmps with unity 1x g
8. Overview The PAS Programmable Attenuator is a precision device for controlling signal levels over a wide dynamic range providing 0 to 120 dB of attenuation for signals up to 100 kHz in frequency The device is fully programmable however simple manual operation is also available using front panel controls When used programmatically the module may be controlled via TDT s ActiveX Controls as well as any programming environment that supports ActiveX or programs that allow scripts for implementing ActiveX controls such as Microsoft Access and Excel For information about how to control the module programmatically see the ActiveX Reference Manual When used in manual operation the attenuation level is adjusted in two modes of operation e The Atten mode permits the user to adjust the attenuation level of the signal from 0 to 120 dB in increments of 0 1 dB e The UserAtt mode permits the user to adjust the attenuation level of the signal using user programmed parameters Before using the UserAtt mode attenuation parameters must be set up using the UserOps menu Power and Interface The PAS Programmable Attenuator is powered via the System 3 zBus ZB1PS and requires an interface to the PC Gigabit Optibit or USB Ensure that the ZB1PS chassis housing the PAS is connected in the interface loop according to the installation instructions for the interface in use Important The chassis housing the PA5 must be powered and connected
9. a Internal Bus Z Digital 1 0 lt gt Front Panel Aux DSP Ports Connectors cae Ga gt Front Panel gt The RX7 contains two DB25 connectors for interfacing with 40 bits of digital I O and 4 channels of analog output A BNC connector is provided for access to the first analog output channel One or two fiber optic Medusa preamp ports enable connections for up to 32 channels of analog input Distributing Data Across DSPs In RPvdsEx data can be transferred between each of the auxiliary DSPs as well as the master DSP using zZHop components gt MCzHopin a 6m CzHopOut nChan 1 6 nChan 16 ChanSel 1 h 4 231 0 gt MCzHopPick 3 E i _ _ hanNo 1 zHopin J a zHopOut Components such as MCzHopIn and MCzHopOut can be used for multi channel signals while components such as zHopIn zHopOut and MCzHopPick are used with single channel signals Up to 126 pairs can be used in a single RPvdsEx circuit System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 27 Bus Related Delays The zHop Bus introduces a single sample delay However this delay is taken care of for the user in OpenEx when Timing and Data Saving macros are used See MultiProcessor Circuit Design in the RPvdsEx Manual for these and other multiprocessor circuit design techniques RX7 Features DSP Status Displays All high performance RX multiprocessors include status lights and a VFD Vacuum Fluorescent Display screen to report the
10. Byte C bits 0 7 Yes Yes bit addressable Note For more information on addressing and Digital I O see the RPvdsEx Manual Note Byte C Bits 0 3 are available via front panel BNCs The data direction for the digital I O is configured using the RZ5 Control macro in RPvdsEx Double click the macro to access the settings on the Digital I O tab The RZ5_ Control macro also offers a Direction Control Mode parameter that enables the macro inputs and allows the user to control data direction dynamically For more information on using the RZ5_Control macro see the help provided in the macro s properties dialog box Note By default all digital I O are configured as inputs LED Indicators The RZ5 contains 16 LED indicators for the analog and digital I O These indicators are located directly below the VFD and DSP status LEDs and display information relative to the various analog and digital I O contained on the RZ5 The following tables illustrate the possible display options and their associated descriptions Digital I O Byte C 8 bit bit addressable byte C LED indicators are located to the bottom left of the RZ5 front panel Light Pattern Description Dim Green Bit is configured for output and is currently a logical low 0 Solid Green Bit is configured for output and is currently a logical high 1 Dim Red Bit is configured for input and is currently a logical low 0 Solid Red Bit is configured for input and is currently a logical h
11. Write Tag Buffer Size 1000000 e USB E GB gt Optibit 25 Cycle Usage System 3 Manual PC Interfaces 17 5 Optibit Interface Overview The Optibit system Optical Gigabit is designed for users that require high speed real time control of System 3 devices or precise system wide device synchronization The Optibit interface consists of a PCI card POS or PCIe card POSe that must be installed in the computer and one or more Optibit to zBUS interface modules FOS that mount in the rear slot of a zBUS device chassis It is up to 8x times faster than the original gigabit interface and also reduces the system s susceptibility to EMF Devices are connected in a simple loop using provided high speed noise immune fiber optic cabling Also when using the Optibit interface all devices across all chassis are automatically phase locked to a single clock Part Numbers PO5 Optical PCI Card for Hardware Software Control POS5e Optical PCI Express Card for Hardware Software Control FO5 POS to zBus Interface Status LEDs Four status LEDs on the face of the FOS indicate the connection status of the interface Connected The Connected LED is lit when the interface is powered on and the fiber optic cable labeled IN is connected properly Although the Connected LED will light if only the IN cable is connected both cables have to be connected properly for communication to take pl
12. GND Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 Al 14 V Positive Voltage Analog Input Channel 2 A2 15 GND Number Ch 1 4 reang 3 A3 16 GND Ground 4 A4 17 V Negative Voltage 5 _ REF Reference Pin 18 NA INot Used 6 NA Not Used 19 NA Wot Used 7 A5 20 A6 3 A7 21 IAs Analog Input Channel Analog Input Channel INumber Ch 6 8 10 12 9 9 Number Ch 5 7 9 11 13 22 A10 14 and 16 10 All land 15 23 Al2 11 A13 24 A14 12 JA15 25 A16 13 NA Not Used 26 NA _ Not Used Headstage Pinout The numbers in the diagram to the right refer to the channel connections to the preamp connector or stimulator connector G on the diagram to the right is connected to the reference pin Ref on the stimulator connector and can also connect to the ground pin GND of the preamp connector through a switchable relay in the SH16 R on the diagram to the right is connected to a switchable relay that can connect to the Ref pin of the preamp connector R 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 The electrode connector accepts 0 5 mm diameter male pins ver The headstage has sensitive electronics Always ground yourself before handling DB25 Control Connector The Control DB25 can be connected to any control device that produces a 3V logic signal For headstages with serial numbers gt 2000 this connector must be connected as it supplies power to the headstage 1 2 3 wO 6 6 7 8 9 10 AD 42 43 14 45 16
13. Signals are digitized on the Medusa preamplifier at a maximum sampling rate of 25 kHz however the fiber optic port on the RZ6 can oversample the digitized signals up to 8X or 200 kHz This will allow the RZ6 to run a DSP chain at 200 kHz and still sample data acquired through an optically connected preamplifier Oversampling is performed on the RZ6 The signals being acquired will still be sampled at 25 kHz on the preamplifier This means that even with oversampling signals acquired by an optically connected preamplifier are still governed by the bandwidth and frequency response of the preamplifier Onboard Analog Outputs The RZ6 is equipped with two channels of 24 bit sigma delta D A converters see RZ6 Technical Specifications page 1 32 Analog signals are output through a variety of connectors on the RZ6 front panel See the Functional Signal Flow Diagrams on page 1 25 for more information System 3 Manual 1 28 RZ Z Series Processors RZ6_AudioOut Analog output is configured in RPvdsEx through the RZ6_AudioOut macro Programmable Attenuation The RZ6_AudioOut macro provides access to two channels of programmable attenuation for precision control of analog output signal levels over a wide dynamic range Programmable attenuation in the RZ6 is achieved using both analog and digital attenuation methods The device supports analog attenuation values of 0 20 40 and 60 dB Attenuation values which lie in between or e
14. This can be downloaded from http www ivis org advances Reuter brown1 IVIS pdf NIH offers instructional videos entitled Training in Basic Biometholodology for Laboratory Mice and Training in Survival Rodent Surgery at their website http grants nih gov grants olaw Training Videos htm II Stereotaxic Surgery We use procedures similar to those described in Stereotaxic Surgery In The Rat A Photographic Series by Richard K Cooley and C H Vanderwolf This reference is available from Amazon com for 27 97 and is highly recommended HI Microwire Procedures General information pictures and available configurations for TDT microwire arrays can be found at http www tdt com products MW 16 htm and http www tdt com products OrderForm_Omn1010 pdf A recent paper by Kralik et al 2001 contains a very helpful description of microwire array insertion methods Methods 2001 Oct 25 2 121 50 In rat and mouse we recommend following the general and neurosurgical procedures as described in the references above We first prepare the subject and perform a craniotomy above the implantation site following the methods of Cooley and Vanderwolf 2004 Implant several skull screws as described in this reference to help bond the dental acrylic and array to the skull A base coat of OptiBond FL Kerr applied to the skull works well to help bond the dental acrylic Keep this out of the craniotomy For rat and mouse we r
15. To connect several zBUS caddies one module the highest logical module is designated as the master and the other clocks are slaved to the master clock Connect the Sync Out of the master clock to the Sync In of the slave with a short patch cable To connect several device caddies daisy chain the connections between the slave caddies as shown below When the Sync lines are connected correctly the LED to the left of the Sync connectors should be lit on each slave devices The LED on the master will remain unlit The LED should only flash when the Sync lines are not connected System 3 Manual 17 10 PC Interfaces Flashing on slave Connected incorrectly Master device not lit and slave devices lit Connected correctly No devices lit Not synced to any device Logical Order of Devices The logical order of devices is determined each time the zBus caddies are powered on You can verify the current logical order using the zBUSmon software Boot Up Sequence The boot up sequence for the USB 2 0 interface is driven from the PC and follows the communication protocol described below 1 The first time the hardware is turned on a device driver is loaded to the interface Depending on your operating system the PC might beep to indicate that the device driver has been loaded 2 A second set of drivers will be loaded and the devices will reboot 3 The TDT hardware is queried to determine the logical order of the devices and zBus
16. 7 SPEAKER IA VOLUME RZ5 BioAmP PROCESSOR de ut u2 Al Cy 0 0 0 Processors Move DicitaL DAC ADC 1 2 Distal VO ADG DAC O o4 Dic TaL VO ANALOG I O 1 1 6s 52 O2 08 3 on o3 o7 bj RECORDED WAVEFORMS ON NON STIMULUS CHANNELS y LuUsS ISOLATOR RA16PA f j j l p To DB25 A 4 Say ELectropes PREAMP x y y NO PREAMP 4 To DB25 bar i STIMULATOR SH16 ELECTRODES SH16 to MicroStimulator Connection Diagram System 3 Manual 8 24 High Impedance Headstages Switchable Headstage Operation When using the SH16 switching headstage with an RZ5 or RX7 processor and an MS4 MS16 Stimulus Isolator TDT recommends using the SH16 Control macro to set stimulation channels and mode of operation Based on the macro settings all necessary control signals are sent from the base station to the headstage via the MS4 MS16 Control output port Setup parameters determine which channels are used for stimulation and whether the headstage will be operated in single ended or differential mode SH16_Control Updating Single Ended Stim Mode RZ5 See the Help text in the macro s properties dialog box for more information about this macro Note The SH16 Headstage requires at least 10ms in order to initialize its control bits for use If you are trying to trigger the enable input you must either use a trigger signal that is del
17. A WARNINGS Read the following warnings prior to operation gt Ifthe device is damaged or fails to operate according to the specifications described in this manual disconnect the power cord and contact TDT support immediately gt Before applying power to the device you must correctly connect the power cord to a standard socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact gt In the event of impaired ground protection avoid using the device to prevent possible damage gt When removing the power cord from either the power supply or socket outlet grasp the plug not the cord in order to avoid damaging the cable gt Do not attempt to disassemble the power supply or caddie If you experience any issues contact TDT support immediately gt Only fuses with the required rated voltage current and specified type should be used with this device Do not attempt to alter or disassemble the power supply fuses gt Do not attempt to alter this device in any way that deviates from its intended operation as described in this user manual System 3 Manual 18 6 The zBus and Power Supply gt Capacitors contained inside the device may retain their charge even after power has been disconnected from its supply source gt Operation of this device in the presence of flammable gases or fumes is strictly prohibited to avoid definite safety hazards gt Do not subject this device to excessive amounts of vibration or shocks du
18. System 3 Manual 3 20 RP Processors Option I O DB9 Connector Pin Out GND Analog Outputs C54 S21 OW 8 Im 7 an 6 Pin Name Descriptions 6 a5 EA i 9 as System 3 Manual Part 4 RM Mobile Processors System 3 Manual 4 2 RM Mobile Processors System 3 Manual RM Mobile Processors 4 3 RM Mobile Processors The RM Family The System 3 platform includes two self contained real time processors the Mini Processor and the Mobile Processor Designed as an affordable test bed system for designing and debugging RPvdsEx circuits each device includes stereo A D and D A an adjustable onboard speaker and can drive headphones at up to 100 dB SPL The devices draw power from the USB interface of the computer and work well with laptop computers for maximum portability These economical mobile systems can also be used for basic psychoacoustics For detailed information on each member of the RM family check the technical specifications of the module Power Requirements Power is provided across the USB connection to a host PC The RM draws approximately 300 mAmps from a 6 Volt input The draw on a portable PC battery will depend on the power requirements of the portable PC and the properties of the battery In many cases the user may see less than 10 decrease of the battery life Users can attach an external power supply such as an AC adapter supplied with the system or an external pack such as a moto
19. 2 Inthe Set Hardware Parameters dialog box click the Device Type box and select RX8 Multi Chan I O from the list 3 The dialog expands to display the Device Configuration Register r Device Configuration Registers Modify 140 Control Und Clear 4 Click Modify to display the Edit I O Setup Control dialog box Edit 1 0 Setup Control x Decimal Value Und Cancel f Prec pe fee p en fein Ae ee ins one ee Pie as Ps e Fev ToB fy Gye ce a T 15 14 13 12 11 10 5 In this dialog box a series of check boxes are used to create a bitmask that is used to program all bits System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 41 To enable the check boxes delete Und from the Decimal Value box To determine the desired value select or clear the check boxes according to the table below By default all check boxes are cleared value 0 Selecting a check box sets the corresponding bit in the bitmask to one 8 When the configuration is complete click OK to return to the Set Hardware Parameters dialog box 0 7 Each of these bits controls the configuration of one of the eight addressable bits as inputs or outputs Setting the bit to one will configure that bit as an output Each of these bits controls the configuration of one of the four addressable bytes as inputs or outputs Setting the bit to one will configure that byte as an output bit 8 controls byte A and bit 9 controls byte B bits 10 11 are n
20. Slow flash 1 per second Connected and charging Very rapid flash Clip Warning Note If the amplifier appears to be connected and the amplifier status light is flashing slowly check to ensure that the device is connected properly Bits Lights The RX5 s eight Bits lights are user configurable By default the Bits lights indicate the logic level light when high for the eight bit addressable digital I O lines The Bits lights can also be configured to provide information about amplifier status or act as logic level lights for any of the other four bytes of digital I O Using the Bits Lights to Display Amplifier Status Note Because clip warning and amplifier status are always displayed using the Amp lights located directly to the right of each fiber optic port TDT recommends using the Bits lights for other applications See Amp Status and Clip Warning Lights for more information Power Status Clip Warning Amp A Amp B Amp C Amp D When the Bits lights are configured to display the amplifier status the left column of lights indicates the power status and the right column indicates a clip warning for the corresponding amplifier System 3 Manual 2 8 RX Processors The table on page 2 7 shows the light pattern and corresponding amplifier status for the power status lights 0 3 Clip lights flash very rapidly when any channel on the connected amplifier produces a voltage approaching the max
21. 2 INA Not Used 16 B2 Button Bit 2 3 B1 Button Bit 1 17 NA Not Used 4 B3 Button Bit 3 18 5 NA Not Used 19 JLO LED Bit 0 6 20 L2 LED Bit 2 T Ll LED Bit 1 21 NA Not Used 8 L3 LED Bit 3 22 9 NA Not Used 23 10 24 11 25 12 13 14 RBOX4 Technical Specifications Response Box for RM1 RM2 or PI2 Buttons 4 LEDs 4 Connection 9 pin Cable Length 6 RBOX4 DB9 Connector Pin Out Pin Name Description s 80 Button Bit Pe o on Ps Bs Button Bs Ps Bt Button Bit System 3 Manual 15 16 Subject Interfaces HTI3 Head Tracker Interface HTIS HEAD TRACKER INTERFACE To Base Data aS E Overview Cul Srar Cuz Sra neser AOTME RORESIGHT TO Teackee Pouremus ojo 4 O ey Foe sortulenr The HTI3 is an interface between your System 3 processor and either the Polhemus FASTRAK or Ascension Flock of Birds or miniBIRD motion trackers and can acquire X Y and Z coordinates as well as azimuth elevation and roll AER data from two receivers sensors A boresight signal can be used to zero the AER values to a relative position This can be accomplished by a manual button press on the front panel of the HTI3 or from an external 3V digital source via the boresight input BNC Data can be transferred directly to any System 3 processor with a fiber optic input bypassing the host computer and enabling movement and positional information to be integrated int
22. 8 Push the fuse housing back into the power supply again by pressing the screwdriver inward 9 Rotate the screwdriver clockwise until the fuse tab is correctly locked back into its original position 10 Repeat for the other fuse if necessary Cleaning the ZB1PS Chassis To clean the device 1 Remove power from the ZB1PS chassis 2 Clean the external surfaces of the device with a soft dry cloth 3 Do not attempt to disassemble and clean the inside of the device System 3 Manual The zBus and Power Supply 18 7 ZB1PS Technical Specifications Chassis Height Width Power Supply Integrated Maximum Working Voltage Main Voltage Rating Installation Category Environmental Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Maximum Altitude Pollution Degree Power Supply Fuses Time Lag Fuse 239P Series Operating Temperature Ampere Rating Voltage Rating Interrupting Rating 1U Standard 19 rack mount HI to earth ground 230V max LO to earth ground 230V max 115 230 V 50 60 Hz 40 VA AC CAT I 0 to 45 C 5 to 40 C 80 for temperatures up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50 RH at 40 C 2 000 m 2 Indoor use only 2 fuses 55 C to 125 C 0 500 A 250 V 10 000 amperes at 125 VAC 0 7 0 8 power factor 35 amperes at 250 VAC 0 7 0 8 power factor System 3 Manual 18 8 The zBus and Power Supply ZB1 Device Caddie and PS25F Power Supply The Z
23. CF1 to one of the output BNC connectors on the SA1 as shown in the following figure System 3 Manual 14 4 Transducers and Amplifiers SA1 STEREO POWER AMP GAIN DB IN 1 0 IN 2 So Our 1 Our 2 IN FROM SPEAKER DRIVER FF1 oR CF1 FF1 OR CF1 s BNC CONNECT BNC CONNECT If you are using the SA8 See the SA8 Eight Channel Power Amplifier page 14 27 for more information Routine Care and Maintenance Inspect speakers for visual damage prior to use Exposure to high temperatures will damage the speaker The polymer used to construct the speaker s housing is very durable however prolonged pressure such as supporting the weight of the CF1 with the speaker s parabolic cone may alter the original structure of the cone causing possible distortion and undesirable effects Unlike the closed field model the free field model s speaker is exposed and should be carefully handled Sharp objects could puncture the speaker membrane causing damage to the unit If there is damage to the BNC connector or the speaker housing contact TDT for an RMA for repair Closed Field Speaker Design Considerations All speaker configurations should be calibrated to your specific configuration If you are planning to deliver tone stimuli SigCalRP can be used to normalize the desired stimulus signals For questions about normalizing other types of stimuli contact TDT When using the CF1 speaker for experiments the provided PVC tubing will tran
24. Frequency Response DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate Voltage Out 10 0 Volts S N typical 82 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz at 9 9 V A D 8 channels 16 bit PCM Sample Rate Up to 48828 125 Hz Frequency Response DC 7 5 kHz 3 dB corner 2nd order 12 dB per octave Voltage In 10 0 Volts S N typical 82 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz at 9 9 V Fiber Optic Ports Z Series One 256 channel input Legacy Medusa Two 16 channel inputs Digital I O 24 bits programmable The maximum sample rate is 48828 125 Hz when recording up to 128 channels or 24414 0625 Hz when recording 129 256 channels System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 11 BNC Channel Mapping Please note channel numbering begins at the top right block of BNCs for each port and is printed on the face of the device to minimize miswiring The figure below represents the standard configuration and may vary depending on customer request Byte Addressable 4 o 5 1 6 2 7 3 PORT A Maps to Byte A on Digital I O DB25 on Digital I O DB25 Bit Addressable 4 o 5 1 6 2 7 3 Port C Maps to Bit Addr DB25 Analog I O Pinout AGND DAC Output ADC Input 13 9 5 1 14 10 6 2 15 11 we 3 16 12 8 4 PORT E PORT D Maps to Ch 9 16 Maps to Ch 1 8 on Analog I O DB25 on Analog I O DB25 PinName Description 1 NA Not Used 2 3 4 5 IAGND _ Analog Ground 6 A2 ADC 7 a4 Analog
25. HB7 Technical Specifications Input Signal Range 10 V peak Power Output 0 12 W into 4 Ohms 0 25 W into 8 Ohms 1 0 W into 32 Ohms Spectral Variation lt 0 1 dB from 10 Hz to 200 kHz Signal Noise 117 dB 20 Hz to 80 kHz Noise Floor 9 2 uV rms THD lt 0 0002 1 kHz tone 7V peak Input Impedance 10 kOhm Output Impedance 5 Ohm HB7 Frequencey Response 100 1000 10000 4100000 1000000 Frequency Hz System 3 Manual 14 20 Transducers and Amplifiers HB7 Total Harmonic Distortion Leftto Right HB7 Cross Talk RigHt to Lett 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency Hz System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 21 MA3 Microphone Amplifier MAJ Sreeto MICROPHONE Ame Tor Oain tom Ad Our Overview The MA3 is a two channel microphone amplifier for auditory scientists This high quality low cost system is designed for use with both 1 4 audio jack microphones and balanced XLR inputs for optimum impedance and noise characteristics The MA3 is able provide a bias voltage for microphones that require it Two BNC connectors provide analog output A variable gain knob provides amplification from 10 dB to 55 dB in 5 dB steps A toggle switch provides 20 dB of additional gain for over five thousand fold amplification Power The MA3 Microphone Amplifier is powered via the System 3 zBus ZB1PS No PC interface is required Features Inputs The MA3 comes with t
26. Name Description 1 NA Not Used 2 Receive Serial Receive Line 3 Transmit Serial Transmit Line 4 NA Not Used 5 GND Ground 6 7 3 NA Not Used 9 To Tracker DB9 Pinout for Polhemus FASTRAK Receive Pin Name Description 1 NA Not Used 2 Transmit Serial Transmit Line 3 Receive Serial Receive Line 4 NA Not Used 5 GND Ground 6 7 8 NA Not Used 9 System 3 Manual Part 16 Signal Handling 16 2 Signal Handling System 3 Manual Signal Handling 16 3 PM2Relay PM2RELAY PoOwER MULTIPLEXER Tr Biawar iN RP CONTROL INPUT J SIONAL OUT e s ee a m on a waeneeees Overview The PM2Relay PM2R is a 16 channel multiplexer for delivering powered and unpowered signals to a device When coupled to a power amplifier such as the SA1 the PM2R can transfer several watts of power to standard four ohm and eight ohm speakers The PM2R is designed to be used as a de multiplexer that is one input switched to 16 possible outputs However it can also be used as a straight multiplexer 16 inputs to one output This is accomplished by sending signals in to the 16 signal out channels The selected channel will be output on the signal in channel Users that are doing this should be very careful as it is easy to exceed the maximum input values when sending in 16 input signals The aggregate input of all signals should never excee
27. PZ2 preamplifier across the fiber optic connection A standard configuration for neurophysiology recordings includes electrodes chronic or acute one or more Z Series high impedance headstages a PZ2 preamplifier and an RZ2 base station Hardware Set up The diagram below illustrates the connections necessary for PZ2 preamplifier operation PZ2 Back PANEL 49 64 f Z Series 33 48 i i RZ2 BACK PANEL 16 CHANNELS PER BANK 17 32 N N a 1716 Oo IN PREAMP Zeus r Our OUT IN OUT IN CHARGER CONNECT ZBUS INTERFACE System 3 Manual 5 4 Preamplifiers One or more Z Series headstages can be connected to the input connectors on the PZ2 back panel A 5 meter paired fiber optic cable is included to connect the preamplifier to the base station The connectors are color coded and keyed to ensure proper connections The PZ2 battery charger connects to the round female connector located on the back panel of the PZ2 preamplifier Important To avoid introducing EMF noise DO NOT connect the charger to the PZ2 while collecting data Powering ON gt To turn the preamplifier on move the three position battery switch located on the front panel of the PZ2 to either the Bat A or Bat B position Powering OFF gt To turn the preamplifier off move the three position battery switch located on the front panel of the PZ2 to the OFF position Important Note Channels are grouped by 16 chann
28. Sampling rate Up to 24 414 kHz Stimulus Output Voltage 24 V with NC48 135 V with HV250 Stimulus Output Current 100 uA up to 1 MOhm load with HV250 100 uA up to 200 kOhms load with NC48 DC Offset Current Less than 0 2 of full range setting Digital Output Max Current 40 mA Digital Output Max Voltage 3 3 V Selectable Reference Local or Global Power Control Onboard Rechargeable Li Ion battery Stimulation NC48 Rechargeable Battery with NiCad batteries or HV250 Battery Pack with Carbon Zinc batteries Note the Stimulus Isolator may be modified at the factory for 1 MilliAmp Mode DB25 Connector Pinouts STIM ELE Connector on the ACC16 The ACC16 AC Coupler is used to block DC bias and connects directly to this Stim Output Connector passing signals through to its STIM ELE connector with the same pinout System 3 Manual Stimulus Isolator Stim Output Connector The Stim Output connector provides access to the analog output channels These channels are used primarily for stimulus output GA m a OW 2 Z 23 22 eh A a e Di 8 B Analog Output Rer Pin Name Description 14 NA Not Used 15 16 17 18 19 20 A6 Analog Channels gt I A8 Ch 6 8 10 12 nd 14 16 22 JA10 23 JA12 24 Al4 hbs A16 Pin jName Description 1 Al Analog Channels 2 la2 Ch 1 4 3 A3 4 A4 5 Ref Refe
29. THD of the speaker SigCalRP also generates normalization curves that can be used to flatten the frequency response of the ES1 Power The ED1 Electrostatic Speaker Driver is powered via the System 3 zBus ZB1PS No PC interface is required ED1 Technical Specifications Input Signal Range 10 V peak into ED1 Gain 0 dB to 27 dB on both channels in 3 dB steps Input Impedance 10 kOhm Output Impedance 1 kOhm Note For further information see ES series speaker specifications page 14 10 System 3 Manual 14 14 Transducers and Amplifiers ED1 Pinouts Connections on ED1 front view B Black signal voltage W White opposite signal voltage R Red Bias voltage Connections on cable O0 DOD O OD Sitver dot WshedB R System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 15 FLYSYS FlashLamp System TT s1130 mvs 7000 Fras Deve OuTeuTSs Overview The Flashlamp System includes a high intensity photic stimulator lamp driver and liquid light guide optic Ideal for standard ERG Visual Evoked Potential and Visual Neurophysiology applications the system features rapid flash rates variable intensity control high output and a spectral range from UV to near infrared The modular design and supplied 9 cable allows for precise positioning of the Flashlamp LS1130 and the 1 meter liquid light guide optic FO1 offers additional positioning and focusing abilities Power The Flash Lamp Drive
30. To Battery Pack and ON OFF Female Harwin Connector Switch Connects to Plexon Preamp External Power Source Connector and a Single PLX ZCA Adapter Board External Power Source In order to power TDT headstages when using this adapter an external power source is required Each external power source includes four connectors and can power up to four PLX ZCA adapter boards The external power source uses two 1 5 V D batteries and is enabled through a simple ON OFF switch To power the PLX ZCA adapter 1 Align the red colored stripe to the Harwin connector side of the adapter as shown in the diagram above 2 Connect an external power connector to the 10 pin header located on the adapter 3 Ensure that the batteries are correctly inserted in the battery pack then move the switch to the ON position Note To power multiple PLX ZCA adapters simply connect each 10 pin header to one of the available external power connectors System 3 Manual 10 14 Adapters and Connectors Plexon header pinout Harwin Connector 10 Pin Header For external power connector V_AGND V 5Vp 5Vp Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels NA Not Used G AGND R Reference System 3 Manual Probe Adapters and Connectors 10 15 Connectors LI CONN Low Impedance Connectors A set of multi channel low impedance connectors LI CONN for the RA16LI is available for users who do not requir
31. gt s x mK x x mM x gt x x x l x System 3 Manual 2 22 RX Processors Piranha Technical Specifications The RX6 can be equipped with a fiber optic input port which may be used with a Medusa or Adjustable Gain preamplifier Specifications for the AD converters of those devices are found under the preamplifier s technical specifications DSP 100 MHz Sharc ADSP 21161 600 MFLOPS Peak Two or Five Memory 128 MB SDRAM D A 2 channels 24 bit sigma delta Sample Rate Up to 260 4166 kHz Frequency Response DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate Voltage Out 10 0 Volts S N typical 105 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz at 10 V THD typical 92 dB 1 kHz output at 5 Vrms Sample Delay 43 samples A D 2 channels 24 bit sigma delta Sample Rate Up to 260 4166 kHz Frequency Response DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate Voltage In 10 0 Volts S N typical 105 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz at 10 V THD typical 95 dB 1 kHz input at 5 Vrms Sample Delay 70 samples Fiber Optic Ports Optional Input Medusa Digital I O 24 bits programmable 8 bits addressable and a 16 bit word addressable as 2 bytes Input Impedance 10 kOhms Output Impedance 10 Ohms System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 23 Signal to Noise Ratio Diagram The following graph is of the signal to noise ratio with varying signal frequencies Signal to Noise Ratio Tone Frequency 100 150 200 Sampling Frequency kHz dB Rolloff Diagram This graph shows
32. stimulation Rechargeable Yes Compliance 135 Volts 24 Volts N A voltage Maximum 1 MOhms 200 kOhms N A impedance for delivering a 100 microAmp current Usable in Yes MilliAmp Mode Ambient Normal room Normal room Normal room temperature temperatures temperatures temperatures HV250 Battery Pack The HV250 Battery Pack uses four Carbon Zinc batteries each delivering 67 Volts Because the HV250 Battery Back is non rechargeable it must be replaced periodically The High Voltage LED on the front panel of the MS4 MS16 will flash to alert the user of a low voltage condition To extend the life of the battery we recommend enabling only the desired channels for stimulation t A warne The HV250 is a high voltage power source capable of delivering up to 250 Volts DC at high amperages Shorting the device can cause damage to the device and injury to the user Always use caution when handling or connecting the devices Never attempt to charge the HV250 NC48 Battery Pack The NC48 Battery Pack uses 32 Nickel Cadmium NiCad batteries to supply a peak to peak voltage of 48 Volts with a range of 24 Volts J A wane Just as with all batteries shorting the NC48 Battery Pack can cause damage to the device and injury to the user Always use caution when handling or connecting the devices EENE Overcharging the NC48 battery pack can cause the cells to rupture System 3 Manual Stimulus Isolator 6 21 The NC
33. 0 PCount 0 The PulseTrain2 component sends out a pulse every 60 samples The output from the PulseTrain2 is sent to the Trigger line on a latch Therefore the output from the latch is updated once every 60 samples This generates an updated output that more closely matches the data transfer rate of the motion tracker The output can then be sent to a head related transfer function HRTF coefficient generator see Using the HTI3 with HRTF Filters 49 07 1 10 0 E DSF 180 9T rg 0 I OShft 0 1 12 0 1 13 0 N N Sealeadd Latch PEC Evi Dea OSF 180 _ gt 9T rg 0 J OShft 0 1 6 0 1 7 0 OSF 180 HT rg 0 oShft 0 Another way to use the decimated signal would be to send it to a Serial Buffer input In this case the values are stored once every 60 samples If you were using this with OpenEx this would be the primary way to save the data set 1 10 0 D Size 1000 ORst 0 N Index 0 s Index Azimuth b gt Data T 1 14 0 x Size 1000 Rst 0 Index 0 Elevation gt Data 1 6 0 N Roll1_Deg SerStore Size 1000 ORst 0 Index 0 Roll b gt Data ko System 3 Manual 15 22 Subject Interfaces Using the HTI3 with HRTF Filters One great advantage of the HTI3 setup is that users can connect the device to an RX6 Multifunction Processor With the RX6 system a virtual 3D audio environment can be generated The following circuit uses the Azimuth a
34. 14159 Channels 4 6 are scaled to inches To scale the XYZ coordinate space to centimeters the scale factor would be 91 44 This circuit can be easily modified to use with the FT motion tracker by inserting the appropriate scale factors from the table above 12 0 18 0 SF 180 gt SF 36 f OShft 0 OShft 0 A 1 4 0 1 10 0 Ee aaa ScaleAdd ScaleAdd DSF 80 OSF 36 OShft 0 bShit 0 S 1 6 0 1 12 0 OSF 180 OSF 36 DShft 0 OShft 0 y q Data Storage and Visualization of Signal Input Motion tracker signals are updated transferred to the HTI3 at rates up to 120Hz The HTI3 sends signals to the RX RP device at sample rates up to 25 kHz This means that each value from the motion tracker may be repeated on the DSP up to 200 times To minimize the redundancy of the signal the channel outputs can be decimated by a fixed value This will decrease the amount of data stored on either the DSP or transferred to a computer The construct below shows two ways to decimate the signal One way shows real time visualization of the signal and the other illustrates storage of the signal to disk Since the following circuit segments are based on the data transfer rate of the motion tracker itself users should review the documentation provided with their device before using the parameter values shown System 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 21 1 1 0 PulseTrain2e decimate gt nPer 60 nPulse 1 DEnab Yes oRst Run PLate
35. 16 JNA 4 NA 17 NA 5 NA 18 NA 6 NA 19 IDO Digital Input Channels 7 IDI Digital Input Channels 20 D2 8 D3 21 D4 9 D5 22 D6 10 D7 23 NA Not Used 11 NA Not Used 24 INA 12 NA 25 NA 13 GND_ Ground System 3 Manual 16 6 Signal Handling Signal Output DB25 Pinout SGnd SGnd _ l a3 TEOD O 9 O O 00W Noa 7 DODD a OD Analog Output Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 SGND Signal Ground 14 NA Not Used 2 NA Not Used 15 AO Analog Output Channels 3 JAI Analog Output Channels 16 A2 4 A3 17 A4 5 A5 18 A6 6 A7 19 A8 7 A9 20 JA10 8 All 21 JA12 9 JA13 22 Al4 10 Al5 23 NA Not Used 11 NA Not Used 24 NA 12 INA 25 NA 13 SGND Signal Ground PM2R Controlling Signal Presentation The circuits described here use typical techniques for controlling the signal presentation when using a PM2R These circuits have been designed as tutorials and will need to be modified to meet the needs of the individual researcher Controlling the PM2R with BitOuts In this example several BitOuts are used to control the PM2R via an RP2 1 from within RPvdsEx The bit pattern is generated by two DataTable components DataTables are commonly used to send values from the PC to the RP devices While working in RPvdsEx the selection can be changed by clicking the green up and down arrows near the bottom edge of
36. 17 18 19 20 24 22 23 24 25 Chock Load Latch Note Pins that are not labeled are not connected System 3 Manual 8 30 High Impedance Headstages DB25 Stimulator Connector Stimulator Channet Ref _ i E m mn m n x GQBDOOo 00o onn a G amp amp 20 z 2 23 24 28 Note The global reference Ref is connected to the SH16 ground pin G of headstage pinout Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 S1 14 NA a S2 Stimulator Channels 15 Ch 1 4 3 S3 16 INot Used 4 S4 17 5 Ref Reference 18 6 NA Not Used 19 7 5 20 S6 8 amp 8 S7 21 S8 9 9 Stimulator Channels 22 S10 Stimulator Channels 0 Sl h 5 7 9 11 13 and 15 233 S12 ar 8 10 12 14 and 11 S13 24 S14 12 S15 25 S16 13 NA INot Used System 3 Manual Part 9 Low Impedance Headstages 9 2 Low Impedance Headstages System 3 Manual Low Impedance Headstages 9 3 RA4LI Four Channel Headstage The RA4LI headstage is designed for low impedance electrodes with input impedances between lt 1 kOhm and 20 kOhm Electrode connectors are standard 1 5 mm safety connectors making it easy to connect to standard needle and surface electrodes for recording evoked potentials and EEG s The headstage connects directly to the RA4PA Medusa preamplifier s 25 pin connector A built in impedance checker can be used to test each channel and the reference Additi
37. 8 a a a ax m The front panel VFD screen reports detailed information about the status of the system The display includes two lines The top line reports the system mode Run or Idle and displays heading labels for the second line The second line reports the user s choice of status indicators for each DSP followed by an aggregate value The user can cycle through the various status indicators using the Mode button to the left of the display Push and release the button to change the display or push and hold the button for one second then release to automatically cycle through each of the display options The VFD screen may also report system status such as booting status Booting DSP or alert the user when the device s microcode needs to be reprogrammed Firmware Blank System 3 Manual 2 38 RX Processors Status Indicators Cye cycle usage Ovr processor cycle overages Bus percentage of internal device s bus capacity used VO percentage of data transfer capacity used Important Note The status lights will flash 3 times a second to alert the user when a device goes over the cycle usage limit even if only for a particular cycle This helps to identify periodic overages caused by components in time slices Bits Lights The RX8 s eight Bits lights are user configurable By default the Bits lights indicate the logic level light when high for the eight bit addressable digital I O lines The Bits lights can
38. 8 plug one end of a serial DB25 male female cable into the J2 connector and plug the other end into the Analog Digital I O Port of an RAI6BA or RV8 For headstage channels 9 16 plug one end of a serial DB25 male female cable into the J3 connector and the other end into the Analog Digital I O port of a second RAI6BA or RV8 Connect to the PP16 The connector labeled J1 is used to connect the ETM1 to a PP16 Plug one end of a serial DB25 male female cable into the J1 connector and plug the other end into the RA16 port of the PP16 Channels 1 8 and 9 16 of the headstages can be accessed through the patch panel BNCs labeled A1 A8 and B1 B8 respectively Also a custom cable can be fabricated to connect the ETM1 connector J1 to virtually any signal source System 3 Manual Signal Handling 16 25 ETM1 Technical Specifications Maximum Frequency Response Highpass Filter Fc S N typical THD Typical Cross Talk Attenuation Input Should not exceed the maximum input for your amplifier such as 4V for the RA16PA J1 DB25 Pinout Analog input channels 1 16 The J1 connector is typically used to input signals from the PP16 Patch Panel a 42 4 40 9 8 7 6AA 3 2 yy 24 3 2 21 20 49 18947 16 45 44 i 20 Hz 70 dB lt 70 dB 60 dB Analog Input Flat from 500 20 000 Hz 0 01 for 1 kHz input at 1 V peak to peak gt
39. Byte A 7 A3 Word addressable digital I O 8 A5 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 9 A7 10 B1 yte B 11 B3 Word addressable 12 B5 digital I O 13 B7 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 Pin Name Description 14 Cl Byte C 15 C3 it Addressable digital I O a a Bits 1 3 5 and 7 17 C7 18 AO Byte A 19 A2 ord addressable digital I O elle it Bits 0 2 4 and 6 21 A6 22 BO Byte B 23 B2 ord addressable digital I O a a Bits 0 2 4 and 6 25 B6 System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 23 RZ6 Multi I O Processor Overview The RZ6 Multi I O Processor is a high sample rate processor with flexible input output capabilities Up to four 400 MHz Sharc digital signal processors are networked in an optimized multiprocessor architecture that features efficient onboard communication and memory access Two channels each of sigma delta D A and A D converters provide a dynamic range of up to 115 dB and sampling rates up to 200 kHz The single device form factor incorporates two channels of onboard programmable and manual attenuation and can drive headphones and standard magnetic or electrostatic speakers It includes an onboard monitor speaker two channels of amplification for analog inputs and eight channels of digital I O XLR audio jack and BNC connections are supported Optionally the RZ6 can be equipped with a fiber optic input allowing it to support a four channel Medusa preamplifier The RZ6 A Bas
40. Connect a wire or paper clip from pin 12 to pin 13 on the Digital I O port With pins 12 and 13 shorted open the RPProg System 3 Device Programmer and select the device type RP2 and interface in the 7 Connection group If necessary select the desired device ID in the 2 Erase group When the device is selected the device name in the 3 Program group will be similar to G2 K_ 1 Next click the Browse button next to the uCode File field and select RP21 dxe Remove the short from pins 12 and 13 and click the Program Device button Do not use your computer until the device reprogramming is complete approximately five minutes RP Processors 3 11 RV8 Barracuda Barracuda Overview The Barracuda features include nanosecond accurate event timing fast DAC s for high frequency stimulus presentation and user control of sample frequencies In addition the Barracuda gives users precise control over stimulus presentation The system has 16 digital inputs 8 digital outputs and 8 analog outputs Power and Communication The RA16 mounts in a System 3 zBus Powered Device Chassis ZB1PS and communicates with the PC using any of the zBus PC interfaces The ZB1PS is UL compliant see the ZBI PS Operations Manual for power and safety information Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the processor through TDT run time appl
41. File box then select the appropriate microcode file for the selected device File RP2 dxe RP21 dxe RA16 dxe RV8 dxe RMX dxe RXn dxe RZn dxe Device RP2 Real Time Processor RP2 1 Enhanced Real Time Processor RAI6BA Medusa Base Station RV8 Barracuda Processor RM1 RM2 Mobile Processors RX5 Pentusa Base Station RX6 MultiFunction Processor RX7 Micro Stimulator Base Station RX8 Multi I O Processor Z Series Processors b Click Program Device A warning message will be displayed c Click Yes to continue Important Wait until the device is programmed before doing anything else with your PC Most processors can be programmed in four minutes however the RZ processors may take up to 40 minutes five minutes per DSP d Click OK The selected Real Time Processor has now been reprogrammed 5 Programming Additional Devices If you have additional devices to program click Refresh then repeat beginning with Step 2 Select the Device and System Interface Type System 3 Manual
42. Input 8 IAG Channels Port D 9 A8 10 A10 AC 11 JA12 Analog Output 12 A14 Channels Port E 13 A16 Pin Name Description 14 NA Not Used 15 16 17 18 Al ADC 19 A3 Analog Input hannels Port D 20 AS 21 A7 22 A9 DAC 23 All Analog Output ba A13 Channels Port E 25 JA15 System 3 Manual 1 12 RZ Z Series Processors DB25 Digital I O Pinout Port B PortA 43 a 4 GOT GND 65 4 3 2 G G G4 3 CICI Go G8 17 Ge G5 44 Port C PinjName Description 1 CO Port C 2 C2 Bit Addressable digital I O 2 ee Bits 0 2 4 and 6 4 C6 5 GND Digital I O Ground 6 Al Port A 7 A3 Word addressable digital I O n Bits 1 3 5 and 7 9 A7 10 Bl ort B 11 B3 Word addressable 12 B5 digital I O 13 B7 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 Pin Name _ Description 14 Cl Port C 15 C3 it Addressable digital I O se Bits 1 3 5 and 7 17 C7 18 AO Port A 19 lA2 ord addressable digital I O eves Bits 0 2 4 and 6 21 A6 22 BO Port B 23 B2 ord addressable digital I O e Bits 0 2 4 and 6 25 B6 System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 13 RZ5 BioAmp Processor Overview The RZ5 BioAmp Processor is available with either one or two 400 MHz Sharc digital signal processors networked on a multiprocessor architecture th
43. Optic Output Stimulator Port The output port labeled Stimulator can be used to transfer microstimulation waveforms to the Stimulus Isolator and or to control its digital output Important Note This fiber optic port is disabled if the sampling rate of the system is set to a value greater than 25 kHz Monitor Speaker The RZ5 is equipped with an onboard speaker Maximum output is greater than 90 dB SPL at 10 cm To use the speaker feed the desired signal to output channel 9 using a DacOut component The speaker is provided primarily for audio monitoring of a single channel of electrophysiological potentials during recording System 3 Manual 1 18 RZ Z Series Processors Digital I O The digital I O includes 24 bits of programmable I O The digital I O is divided into three bytes A B and C as described in the chart below All digital I O lines are accessed via the 25 pin connector on the front of the RZ5 and bits 0 3 of byte C are available through BNC connectors on the front panel labeled Digital See RZ5 Technical Specifications page 1 10 for the DB25 pinout and BNC channel mapping See the Digital I O Circuit Design section of the RPvdsEx Manual for more information on programming the digital I O Digital I O Description DB25 BNCs_ Notes Configuration Byte A bits 0 7 Yes No byte RZ5_Control addressable the Byte B bits 0 7 Yes No byte Byte C Dir 11001100 addressable Byte A Dir Input Byte B Dir Output
44. PCM 4 samples Digital I O 24 bits programmable 8 bits addressable and a 16 bit word addressable as 2 bytes Input Impedance 10 kOhms Output Impedance 10 Ohms Note Because of device timing constraints at higher sampling rates only the first 23 channels of analog I O are processed when operating the RX8 at 100 kHz Note See page 2 42 for a list of supported sampling rates System 3 Manual 2 44 RX Processors DB25 Connector Pinouts TDT Reccomends accessing the RX8 I O via a PP24 patch panel Analog I O Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 Al Analog I O Channels 14 A2 Analog I O Channels 2 A3 Input oe Output 15 A4 Input or Output 3 IAS Depending on 16 A6 epending on Custom Custom Configuration 4 147 Configuration 17 A8 5 AGND Analog Ground 18 A9 6 JA10 Analog I O Channels 19 All 7 JA12 Input or Output bo A13 Depending on 8 JA14 Custom 21 Ais 9 JA16 Configuration 22 A17 Analog Outputs 10 A18 23 JA19 11 A20 24 A21 Analog Outputs 12 A22 25 A23 13 A24 Digital I O GND Byte B Byte A OHNO 0 0 0191010100 G5 G4 GI CICI GACICA Ge 5 D Bit Addr PinName Description Pin Name Description 1 BAO Bit Addressable 14 BAI _ Bit Addressable 2 IBA2 digital I O 15 BA3 digital I O 3 BA
45. RPvdsEx data can be transferred between each of the auxiliary DSPs as well as the master DSP using zZHop components gt MCzHopin a 6m CzHopOut nChan 16 nChan 16 ChanSel 1 lt 4 231 0 MCzHopPick p pppoe S onarnio zHopin 4 zHopOut d Components such as MCzHopIn and MCzHopOut can be used for multi channel signals while components such as zHopIn zHopOut and MCzHopPick are used with single channel signals Up to 126 pairs can be used in a single RPvdsEx circuit System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 15 Bus Related Delays The zHop Bus introduces a single sample delay However this delay is taken care of for the user in OpenEx when Timing and Data Saving macros are used See MultiProcessor Circuit Design in the RPvdsEx Manual for these and other multiprocessor circuit design techniques RX6 Features DSP Status Displays All high performance RX multiprocessors include status lights and a VFD Vacuum Fluorescent Display screen to report the status of the individual processors Status Lights STATUS OOOO0O0O M1234 Up to five LEDs report the status of the multiprocessor s individual DSPs When the device is turned on they will glow steadily If the demands on a DSP exceed 99 of its capacity on any given cycle the corresponding LED will very flash rapidly 3 times per second Front Panel VFD Screen Idle ul ul u2 u3 u4 All MODE Cyc 8 a a a ax m The front panel VFD screen reports det
46. Ref site ZCA UP16 16 Channel Plextrode U Probe to ZIF Clip headstage This adapter connects an 8 or 16 channel acute Plextrode U Probe connector to a 16 channel ZIF Clip headstage The adapter includes mounting holes for attachment to a micromanipulator Configuration for single ended or differential operation is provided on the electrode Refer to the Plextrode documentation for jumper configurations Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels ZCA UP1E y 6543210 8Ch 15 1413 12 11 10 9 46 Ch bbbbddaddd THPETTtTtt Guide Pins Guide Pins 10 pin Female Omnetics 050 Nano Single Row header x 2 System 3 Manual Probe Adapters and Connectors 10 11 ZCA UP24 24 Channel Plextrode U Probe to ZIF Clip headstage This adapter connects a 24 channel acute Plextrode U Probe connector to a 32 channel ZIF Clip headstage The adapter includes mounting holes for attachment to a micromanipulator Configuration for single ended or differential operation is provided on the electrode Refer to the Plextrode documentation for jumper configurations Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels G2_23_21 19 17 7 5 24 22 20 18 8 6 1 RI 31 29 27 25 15 13 9 a OO E m 32 30 28 26 16 14 12 10 G1 bbbddddddd TEETETTTtt N O gt Cc v N 36 pin Female Omnetics 025 Nano Dual Row Header System 3 Manual 10 12 Adap
47. Time ms 939 28 469 53 System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 23 The diagram below illustrates how the relays are used to switch channels for recording to RA16PA or stimulation from MS16 SH16 Relay MS16 x 16 1 per channel Stimulator Outputs Le oeoa _ E A Logic d loooooo0 KY J lt Control Output Channel 16 RAI6PA P C tor Electrode Channels ia i ia Channel Switchable Headstage Diagram The 16 channel switchable acute headstage has an 18 pin DIP connector that can be used with standard high impedance metal electrodes The pinout of the SH16 matches the wiring of NeuroNexus electrodes allowing direct connection to the headstage TDT recommends connecting electrodes to an 18 pin DIP socket and then connecting the socket to the headstage to protect the headstage from unnecessary wear and tear Important When using the headstage with the NeuroNexus probes keep in mind that there may be several versions of the probe Check the NeuroNexus Website for pin diagrams Also see MCMap for a description and examples on how to re map channel numbers Connection Diagram When using the SH16 with a microstimulator system connect the system as shown The diagram below shows a system configuration featuring the RZ5 BioAmp Processor an MS16 Stimulus Isolator and RA16PA Medusa PreAmp Connections are much the same when using the RX7 in place of the RZS
48. amp Schmitt p od 1 14 0 A s 4 OTdel 1 bThi 100 d Tlo 10 Controlling the PM2R from a run time application The examples described here could easily be modified to allow control from run time applications Parameter tags can be included and used in other applications such as BioSigRP or OpenEx System 3 Manual OOTOTTOT Signal Handling 16 9 SM5 Signal Mixer Overview The SM5 is a three channel signal mixer The relative contribution of the three inputs to the final output can be adjusted using a variable gain for two of the inputs In addition the signal on the two adjustable channels can be inverted before addition The input signal range is 10V for each channel with the additional caveat that the amplified signal for each channel may not exceed 10V without clipping The range for the summed output is 10V Power The SM5 Signal Mixer is powered via the System 3 zBus ZB1PS No PC interface is required Features The SM5 Signal Mixer is a three channel weighted summer with variable input weighting and channel inverting The SMS is a zBus rack mounted device through which it receives power Inputs Three signals input channels A B and C with a range up to 10 V peak are accessed through front panel BNC connectors Input channels A and B are multiplied by a weighted signed constant K before being added to the final output The weighting range for these two channels is adjustable from 20 dB t
49. and wirelessly transmits them up to 3 meters from the subject to the TBSI receiver The analog signals are then passed to the TB32 for digitization through a 37 pin connector Signals are digitized at up to 25 kHz on the digitizer and sent over two fiber optic links to a DSP device such as the Pentusa base station where they are filtered and processed in real time Hardware Setup The diagram below shows the connections made to the front and back panels of the TB32 digitizer TB32 Front Panel f TB32 32 CHANNEL DIGITIZER CHARGER CH 1 16 CH 17 32 POWER E 6 9VDG To BASE To BASE ON Tip NEG CONNECT to BASE STATION TB32 Back Panel ANALOG INPUTS i DB37 CONNECTOR y N N me T WIRELESS RECEIVER System 3 Manual 5 30 Preamplifiers Features Analog Acquisition Channels The TB32 acquires signals using 16 bit sigma delta ADCs which provide superior conversion quality and extended useful bandwidths at the cost of an inherent fixed group delay Each converter has a two pole anti aliasing filter 12 dB per Octave at 4 5 kHz Note The TB32 16 bit sigma delta A D converters contain a 20 sample group delay Scale Factor To determine the actual biopotential from the TB32 two scale factors should be applied in the DSP The first scale factor is 400 This is used to convert the input from the TB32 into the standard voltage range expected by the DSP The second scale factor is used to scale the signal accord
50. cable features a 9 pin connector for the HC10 and four mini DB26 connectors which connect to four banks on the back of the PZ2 Common Ground Pin A single ground pin is attached to the MZ60 and serves as the common ground for both stimulating and recording channels on the MZ60 The PZ2 amplifier ground and reference pins for each bank are tied to this pin internally when the PZ2 amplifier and MZ60 are connected Some MEA plates have an internal reference i r pin integrated into dish Please review the MEA dish manufacturer specifications for proper grounding Troubleshooting This section is provided to address common issues that may be encountered when using the MZ60 MicroElectrode Array Interface If you need assistance beyond the scope of this guide contact tech support at 386 462 9622 General Tips If you are not using the HC10 Heat Controller make sure that you ground the 9 pin HC10 connector to the back of the PZ amplifier You can quickly ground the 9 pin HC10 connector by placing it on top of one of the mini DB connectors located on the back of the PZ amplifier This will reduce the noise picked up by the HC10 connector cable When recording signals make sure that the PZ amplifier is not connected to the charger as this will induce mains interference in your recordings Make sure there are no power strips plugged in anywhere near the MZ60 setup Power strips will induce mains interference into your recordings Also minimize el
51. caddies Important If the zBUS is accessed during step three the devices will fail to ID To ensure that step three is completed wait ten seconds after the devices have rebooted step two before loading any TDT application or viewing the devices in zBUSmon If the hardware fails to ID shut down the TDT hardware and restart the device System 3 Manual Part 18 The zBus and Power Supply 18 2 The zBus and Power Supply System 3 Manual The zBus and Power Supply 18 3 ZB1PS Chassis Powered zBUS Device Chassis Overview ZBUS is TDT s high speed low noise bus for System 3 modules The bus is integrated into a device chassis which serves as a rack mountable housing for most modular devices in the System 3 line As seen in the functional diagram below the bus distributes communication and power throughout the system THE GIGABIT AND OPTIBIT INTERFACES REQUIRE INTALLATION OF A PCI INTERFACE CARD IN THE PC INTERFACE CABLE INTERFACE MODULE POWER SUPPLY DEVICE CHASSIS MODULE POSITION 1 MODULE POSITION Z Front Functional Diagram One or two modular devices can be mounted in the chassis front bays providing easy access to front panel connections An interface module can be mounted in the second rear bay for chassis housing a programmable device Multiple chassis can be interfaced for custom system configurations and individual modules can be added or removed as needed Power Supply The Z
52. channels of analog I O Distributing Data Across DSPs In RPvdsEx data can be transferred between each of the auxiliary DSPs as well as the master DSP using zHop components gt MCzHopin 4 R nChan 16 onChan 16 ChanSel 1 catia ee 4 231 0 MCzHopPick a ChanNo 1 zHopIn o 9 zHopOut gt Components such as MCzHopIn and MCzHopOut can be used for multi channel signals while components such as zHopIn zHopOut and MCzHopPick are used with single channel signals Up to 126 pairs can be used in a single RPvdsEx circuit System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 37 Bus Related Delays The zHop Bus introduces a single sample delay However this delay is taken care of for the user in OpenEx when Timing and Data Saving macros are used See MultiProcessor Circuit Design in the RPvdsEx Manual for these and other multiprocessor circuit design techniques RX8 Features DSP Status Displays All high performance RX multiprocessors include status lights and a VFD Vacuum Fluorescent Display screen to report the status of the individual processors Status Lights STATUS OOOO0O0O M1234 Up to five LEDs report the status of the multiprocessor s individual DSPs When the device is turned on they will glow steadily If the demands on a DSP exceed 99 of its capacity on any given cycle the corresponding LED will flash very rapidly 3 times per second Front Panel VFD Screen Idle ul ul u2 u3 u4 All MODE Cyc
53. channels from the PZ3 input stream and builds two separate sequential multichannel outputs containing either the amplified waveforms or alternate data impedances or RMS values PZ3_ChanMap From PZ3 Signal Out B Impedance Out 16 channels Macro Options The user can set several different options under the Options tab e The designated number of channels to map and output e The ability to enable disable the impedance measurement output PZ3 Circuit Example The following illustration shows how macros can be used to create a simple OpenEx acquisition and control circuit for the PZ3 PZ3_Control CoreSweepControl SweepNum a SweepDone Clip on off 3 impchk impcnk Primary Store Name Tick RZ2_Input_MC PZ3_ChanMap SourceData From PZ3 Signal Out E E Impedance Out gt Z Amplifier from Pipe Bus 64 Chans 1 64 32 channels HP LP_Filter_MC Stream_Store_MC Input nChan 32 P Store nChan 32 Store Wave Float 24414 1Hz Data Rate 3051 8 kBytes Sec Fil 2Hz 30Hz 12dB oct The RZ2_Input_MC macro feeds the circuit with each digitally amplified signal acquired using the PZ3 amplifier The data is fed first through the PZ3_ ChanMap macro which separates the signals from their impedances or RMS values and builds the appropriate multi channel data stream for further processing In this case the signals are filtered and stored for post processing A CoreSweepControl macro is i
54. circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circuit components see MultiProcessor Circuit Design in the RPvdsEx Manual RZ6 Multi Bus Architecture The RZ6 processor utilizes a multi bus architecture and offers three dedicated data buses for fast efficient data handling While the operation of the system architecture is largely transparent to the user a general understanding is important when developing circuits in RPvdsEx DSP Block zBus Interface Block IOn rrecescer E ton Cortroiier Host PC Os 2 Sperry Processor 3 vO Interface Block ose Preamp fermi Processor ea o Eri q k Cane BO lt q Analog VO Programmable Front Panel Ports Astonuator Connectors i As shown in the diagram above the RZ6 architecture consists of three functional blocks The DSPs The zBus Interface The I O Interface System 3 Manual Each DSP in the DSP Block is connected to three data buses two buses that connect each DSP to the other functional blocks and one that handles data transfer between the DSPs the zHop Bus This architecture facilitates fast DSP to off chip data handling Each DSP has its own 64MB of SDRAM memory Large and complex circuits should be designed to balance memory needs such as data buffers and filter coefficients across processors When designing circuits also note that the maximum number of components for each RZ6 DSP is 768 Th
55. circuits should be designed to balance memory needs such as data buffers and filter coefficients across processors When designing circuits also note that the maximum number of components for each RZ5 DSP is 768 The zBus Interface The zBus Interface provides a connection to the PC Data and host PC control commands are transferred to and from the DSP Block through the zBus Interface Bus allowing for large high speed data reads and writes without interfering with other system processing The I O Interface The I O Interface serves as a connection to outside signal sources or output devices It is used to input data from the preamplifier inputs and digital and analog channels The I O Interface Bus provides a direct connection to each DSP System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 15 Distributing Data Across DSPs To reap the benefits of added power made possible by multi DSP modules processing tasks must be efficiently distributed across the available DSPs That means transferring data across DSPs The RZ5 architecture provides the zHop Bus for this type of data handling The zHop Bus The zHop Bus allows the transfer of single or multi channel signals between each DSP in the RZS 1 3 0 _ MCzHopPick i ChanNo 1 h d zHopOut gt zHopin MCzHopout MCzHopin onChan 16 _ e D ChanSel 1 y In RPvdsEx data is transferred across the zHop Bus using paired zHop Components including zHopIn zHopOut MCzHopIn MCzHopOu
56. configure the bits in the RPvdsEx configuration register as follows 1 Click the Device Setup command on the Implement menu 2 Inthe Set Hardware Parameters dialog box click the Type drop down box and select either the RM1 or RM2 from the list 3 The dialog expands to display the Edit Bit Dir Control dialog box 4 Click Modify to display the Edit Bit Dir Control dialog box In this dialog box a series of check boxes are used to create a bitmask that is used to program all bits im Edit Bit Dir Control x Decimal Value Und Cancel i Binara pe opm i 0 Es a a a a a a E a a E a n a S E 0 15 ace 13 wes 11103 8 7 6 5 5 To enable the check boxes delete Und from the Decimal Value box and enter 240 This configures Bits 4 through 7 as outputs xi Decimal Value 240 Cancel OK Bane a2 1 Sooo m m m m a m a a Ti ae UE a il ql e lt a n Xl i xl xl 6 When the configuration is complete click OK to return to the Set Hardware Parameters dialog box Configuring an RX Processor for the RBOX_RX6 The RBOX_RX6 uses the ground connection pin 5 and the 8 bits of bit addressable digital I O on an RX series processor Digital I O port Bits 0 through 3 are used as button inputs and Bits 4 through 7 are used as LED outputs To use the response box with an RX processor configure the bits in the RPvdsEx configuration register as follows 1 Click the Device Setup command on the Implement menu 2 Inth
57. connector pins 14 17 Important When using the RX7 with the stimulus isolator the sampling rate set for this device cannot exceed 25 kHz a limitation of the fiber optic connection between the RX7 and the stimulus isolator Digital 1 0 The RX7 base station has 40 digital I O lines Eight bits are bit addressable The remaining 32 bits are four word addressable bytes Digital I O lines are accessed via the two 25 pin connectors on the front of the RX7 See the Digital I O Circuit Design section of the RPvdsEx Manual for more information on programming the digital I O A carom The first eight bits of bit addressable digital I O on RX devices are unbuffered When used as inputs overvoltages on these lines can cause severe damage to the system TDT recommends when sending digital signals into the device 1 never send a signal with amplitude greater than seven volts into any digital input and 2 always use the byte addressable digital I O lines Configuring the Programmable I O Lines Each of the eight bit addressable lines can be independently configured as inputs or outputs The digital I O lines can be configured as inputs or outputs in groups of eight bits that is as byte A byte B byte C and byte D Note however that the bytes must be addressed as if part of a word not as individual bytes See Addressing Digital Bits In A Word in the RPvdsEx Manual for more information By default all bits are configured as inputs Th
58. dB When working with three signals 30 34 and 36 dB SPL the BaseAtt parameters are set and the actual versus displayed value of attenuation are shown in the table below This example requires three PA5 Programmable Attenuators System 3 Manual Attenuator 12 9 Input Signal BaseAtt Displayed Value Actual Attenuation 36 dB SPL 6 0 db 34 dB SPL 4 0 dB 30 dB SPL 0 0 dB COIN AI Ol OND A Solo an BIO oo Setting a Reference Value The Reference parameter is used to display the intensity of the output signal This parameter can be used only when the strength of the input signal is known This serves to flip the scale displaying larger numbers for smaller attenuation values When in use a letter R is displayed on the left side of the display Note that the Base Attenuation and Reference parameters can be used simultaneously When both of these features are in use the letter R and a symbol are displayed on the left side of the display See Display Icons page 12 11 for more information To set the Reference parameter 1 Access the UserOps menu and turn the Select knob until Refrnce appears on the display 2 Press and release the Select knob 0 0 dB appears on the display 3 Turn the Select knob until the display shows the desired level 4 Press and release the Select knob The reference is saved 5 To exit the UserOps menu press and release the ESC bu
59. design LED designation and on off information are combined in a single word Designating the LED and button number or column position in two separate steps In the example above there are two sets of inputs used to specify the LED The first controls which LED LED position within a grouping is lit while the second controls the column button location in which the LED is located DataTables are used to test and run the circuit within RPvdsEx and parameter tags LED_POS and LED COL are included to allow users to control the position and column values from another application System 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 9 Data Table has values ToBits converts the output from Sends the output to the 0 1 2 3 integer to a bit value that sets following Digital Out lines the dOuts for color 1 1 0 1 2 0 NIO Ca Const ToBits 508 M 1 L ji gt b1 m r Rst 0 b2 1 5 0 b3 p b48 p M 2 UE b58 D LED PO i ToBits converts the output Sends the output to from integer to a bit value the following Digital PSE hed values that sets the digital outs for Out lines 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 the column 1 8 0 1 9 0 1 10 07 gt d ji j N p Colum Consti 4 ToBits vo Maa L z fa beo me Pe 34 112 0 b4 ait n bse a ji 1 14 0 LED_COL p p M 16 IL Turns on LED Turns off LED Turns off all LEDs 1 15 0 ee 1 17 0 el
60. device can sample at rates up to 260 kHz for a realizable bandwidth of 120 kHz For specific information on the actual sampling rates see Realizable Sampling Rates for the RX6 page 2 21 Important Note Because some RX6 models can acquire analog signals using a Medusa preamplifier via an optional fiber optic port the sigma delta A D inputs on all RX6 models are offset and accessed as ADC channels 128 and 129 Digital 1 0 The RX6 processor includes 24 bits of programmable I O in two eight bit word addressable bytes and eight bits of bit addressable I O Digital I O lines are accessed via the 25 pin connector on the front panel and can be configured as inputs or outputs The first four bits of digital I O bits 0 3 can also be used for submicrosecond event timing See Nanosecond Event Timing page 3 12 for more information See the Digital I O Circuit Design section of the RPvdsEx Manual for more information on programming the digital I O OETA The first eight bits of bit addressable digital I O on RX devices are unbuffered When used as inputs overvoltages on these lines can cause severe damage to the system TDT recommends when sending digital signals into the device 1 never send a signal with amplitude greater than seven volts into any digital input and 2 always use the byte addressable digital I O lines Configuring the Programmable I O Lines Each of the eight bit addressable bits can be independently configured as inputs or
61. example open the LED2 RPvdsEx file in the ButtonBox example folder TDT RPvdsEX Examples ButtonBox Using a WordOut with a DataTable ParTag for on off actions The following example uses the WordOut component similarly to the way the WordIn is used in the button press example As before a DataTable is used to determine which LED to light In the LED POS DataTable values 0 31 are used to determine the position of the LED In addition another DataTable is used to set whether the LED is turned ON or OFF all LED s are turned OFF or if nothing is done when the LED is selected This value gets added to the LED position value and is sent out via the WordOut component The values for the second DataTable are 0 0 nothing done 1 32 LED ON 2 64 LED OFF and 3 128 all LEDs OFF The cycle usage for this example is half the cycle usage for the one above it Notice that there are no BitOut components used The WordOut and BitOut components cannot be used in the same circuit System 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 11 Values 0 31 contained in the table iScaleAdd adds the ON OFF DataTable value to determine the position of the LED the LED position value to turn the LED on or off 1 6 0 1 4 0 1 5 0 y z eels Consti iScaleAdd m 1 E 0 oSF 1 SE Xx Shft 0 WordOut cannot be used with BitOut LED_POS Values in the ON OFF DataTable are 5 6 and 7 the output of iBitShift will be 32 64 and 1
62. headstage MUST be connected using the 1 ch1 16 connector The switching headstage CANNOT be connected to any other connector When using non TDT switching headstages contact TDT customer support for assistance System 3 Manual Commutator 13 7 Interface Receptacles Interface receptacles AC64 4 AC32 2 AC16 1 on the back of the commutator provide connections to headstages via standard interface headers See technical specifications for pin mapping and see Headstage Connections below for direct connection solutions from TDT Features LEDs The four indicator LEDs on the front panel indicate power the status of the Inhibit BNC input clockwise rotation and counterclockwise rotation e Power 2 Hz flash when on 4 Hz flash when rotating op Counterclockwise rotation Clockwise rotation Note When the sensors on the commutator cause the motor to continuously rotate more than five revolutions in one direction the unit will enter a hold state to prevent the wires from tangling The commutator will not respond to commands and both the clockwise and counterclockwise LEDs will flash Cycle power to reset the unit Manual Rotational Buttons G The commutators feature both clockwise and counterclockwise manual rotational buttons When pressed these buttons will rotate the commutator at approximately 12 RPM Pressing either of these buttons also overrides the current rotational state of the commutator In
63. is used with a PZ2 64 For higher channel count amplifiers channels numbers may be offset depending on the MZ60 PZ2 connections Note Channels 16 32 48 and 64 are grounded on the preamplifier MZ60 MEA INTERFACE Switch is currently STIM ON in record mode 2 a lf SSesees Sees8805 RECORD 1 2 4 5 7 123 4567 a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 40 41 42 43 44 15 B o 63 17 p B Q ED 62 18 EG 61 a 19 o B Ee 60 vA D 20 gt B a 59 21 a E E 58 22 o B E a 57 23 B zZz of 56 24 B2 55 25 n i He 54 2 om Bie 53 f 27 gt B E 2 2 aB E 51 i g 29 o B 50 30 i 6H 49 31 o E 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 938 87 36 35 34 83 cccoceos oe NO NO System 3 Manual 7 10 MicroElectrode Array Interface HC10 Temperature Controller Overview The HC10 temperature controller provides digitally controlled heating for the MZ60 MEA Interface This device allows user settings in either Celsius or Fahrenheit with up to a degree precision A heating element located underneath the MEA plate is used to monitor and regulate temperature The device also makes use of buffered memory and user controlled offsets to deliver reliable and accurate temperature control HC10 Temperature Controller Features Power Switch The Power switch turns the HC10 power off or on The LED display will be illuminated when the HC10 is on If the 9 pin connecto
64. kHz to 110 kHz Weight 22 Grams Dimensions 3 8 cm outside diameter x 2 6 cm deep Typical Output 90 dB SPL 5kHz signal Every experimental setup is unique It is important to calibrate the response of the speaker in each experimental setup THD Every experimental setup is unique It is important to calibrate the response of the speaker in each experimental setup Frequency Response in Plexiglas Coupler Measurements were made in a 1 cm x 0 5 cm coupler with a 20 cm length of 3 32 i e tubing attached to the fitting of the EC1 4 V peak input tones were tested and frequency response was measured with a calibrated pressure microphone The results of the calibration will vary depending on the type of ear to which the speaker is coupled and the length of the tube that is coupled to the ear This curve is provided as representative of the type of response that may be obtained in a closed field System 3 Manual 14 12 Transducers and Amplifiers EC1 Frequency Response in Coupler S a E T eey NIOO PL TPA m fl a Oo o EEIE 4 100000 In this case the low end of the response lt 5 kHz is enhanced over the free field response while the high end of the response gt 80 kHz is attenuated Every experimental setup is unique It is important to calibrate the response of the speaker in each experimental setup Important Note Modifying the EC1 or ES1 can result in unexpected changes in the transfer function All m
65. onboard DSPs to design and generate complex arbitrary waveforms or complex patterns of biphasic pulses in real time The RX7 has been developed specifically for microstimulation applications As part of TDT s RX7G MicroStimulator system the RX7 s primary role is to control the MS16 stimulus isolator transferring hardware control and stimulation information across fiber optics This proven digital communication system optically isolates the RX7 from the electrical stimulator eliminating AC power surges and noise For more information see MS4 MS16 Stimulus Isolator page 6 3 The RX7 includes 40 bits of digital I O analog output and can include one or two fiber optic input ports for acquisition of digitized data from Medusa preamplifiers Acquired signals can be filtered rectified or smoothed for stimulus output or dynamic real time stimulus control based on analog control signals from virtually any signal source Power and Communication The RX7 mounts in a System 3 zBus Powered Device Chassis ZB1PS and communicates with the PC using the Gigabit PI5 FI5 or Optibit PO5 FOS5 PC interfaces The ZB1PS is UL compliant see the ZBJ PS Operations Manual for power and safety information Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the processor through TDT run time applications or custom applications This manual includes device specific
66. outputs The digital I O lines can be configured as inputs or outputs in groups of eight bits that is as byte A and byte B Note however that the bytes must be addressed as if part of a word not as individual bytes See Addressing Digital Bits In A Word in the RPvdsEx Manual for more information By default all bits are configured as inputs This default setting is intended to prevent damage to equipment that might be connected to the digital I O lines The user can configure the bits in the RPvdsEx configuration register The configuration register is also used to determine what the eight front panel Bits lights represent To access the bit configuration register in RPvdsEx 1 Click the Device Setup command on the Implement menu 2 Inthe Set Hardware Parameters dialog box click the Device Type box and select the RX6 Multi Function from the list 3 The dialog expands to display the Device Configuration Register m Device Configuration Registers Register 10 Value Modiy 140 Setup Control 4 Und Clear System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 19 4 Click Modify to display the Edit I O Setup Control dialog box x Decimal Value Und Cancel Biman I PP yes a PO a fe ES fe St i a ibs deh e ee Wil a SS tee da EP e a IL 5 In this dialog box a series of check boxes are used to create a bitmask that is used to program all bits To enable the check boxes delete Und from the Decimal Value box
67. speakers The unit features high channel separation with low cross talk combined with low noise and distortion The gain for all eight channels can be set to 0 6 10 or 13 dB Power The SA8 Power Amp is powered via the System 3 zBus ZB1PS No PC interface is required Features Inputs There are eight available inputs located on the DB9 connector on the front panel of the SA8 Outputs The eight output channels are accessible via the DB25 connector and are arranged for optional direct connection to a PP16 Patch Panel For easy wiring and connection to a wide variety of transducers the eight outputs are duplicated on the DB25 and sufficient ground pins are provided to allow for connections requiring a single ground for all channels or paired grounds for each channel See Mapping SA8 Output to PP16 Connectors page 14 28 for more information on easy access to SA8 output channels via the patch panel Gain The gain is controlled by two toggle switches on the front panel of the SA8 The following table describes the selectable gain values System 3 Manual 14 28 Transducers and Amplifiers Mapping SA8 Output to PP16 Connectors The picture below maps the SA8 signal out connection to the PP16 SAB EIGHT CHANNEL POWER AMPLIFIER Oo O vB Power OuTPUTS INPUTS GAIN G 6 DB AG 10 DB 13 DB Connector labeled RA16 PP16 Al A2 A3 A4 AS A6 A7 A8 Bi B2 B3 B4 BS B6 B7 BB Ci C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 Out 1 throu
68. support simultaneous acquisition from up to four preamplifiers Each port can input up to 16 channels at a maximum sampling rate of 25 kHz The first two ports provide oversampling See Fiber Oversampling below for more information The fiber optic ports can be used with any of the Medusa preamplifiers including the RA16PA RA4PA or RA8GA The channel numbers for each port begin at a fixed offset regardless of the number of channels available on the connected device Channels are numbered as follows Amp A 1 16 Amp B 17 32 Amp C 33 48 Amp D 49 64 Fiber Oversampling The fiber optic cable that carries the signals to the fiber optic input ports has a transfer rate limitation of 6 25 Mbits s With 16 channels of data and 16 bits per sample this limitation translates to a maximum sample rate of 24 414 kHz However the need may arise to run a circuit at a higher sample rate while still acquiring data via a fiber optic port The first two fiber optic ports can oversample the digitized signals that have already been sampled up to 4X or 100 kHz This will allow an RX5 to run a DSP chain at 50 kHz or 100 kHz and still sample data acquired through an optically connected preamplifier that digitized the incoming data stream at a maximum rate of 25 kHz Oversampling is performed on the base station The signals being acquired will still be sampled at 25 kHz on the preamplifier This means that even with oversampling signals acquired
69. the AC64 harness should be in four loops 90 degrees apart as shown below Typically preamps are connected to the DB25 connectors on the front of the commutator and headstages with special splice connectors are connected to the interface receptacles on the back of the commutator e 3 gt System 3 Manual Commutator 13 5 Amplifier Connections The commutators interface with one or more preamplifers via connections on the user interface panel All connections are designed for direct connections to TDT preamplifers By default the 16 and 32 channel versions feature DB25 connectors that match the pin configuration of the Medusa PreAmps 64 channel versions feature flying leads with connectors that mate with the Z Series PreAmp Custom pinout configurations are available Default Device Configurations Commutator Use with AC16 Medusa RA16PA AC32 Medusa RA16PA AC64 Z Series PZ2 or PZ3 Channel Mapping Diagram Peers a O emon nt Feces 8 Penn ot System 3 Manual 13 6 Commutator Headstage Connections TDT offers a headstage with splice suitable for use with the commutator A DB25 splice cable can also be provided to allow you to easily switch to a configuration that does not use the commutator See the following illustration RAITGPA AC32 DB25 SPLICE CABLE RA16CH W SPLICE Important When using TDT s SH16 Switching Headstage with the AC64 the control connector of the
70. the TimeStamp is no better than the sample clock period TimeStamp uses the system clock to determine when within a sample period the event occurred After each sample period the TimeStamp component is reset System 3 Manual 3 18 RP Processors The diagram below shows how TimeStamp works The first event occurs 2 2 microseconds after the start of the first sample period so a value of 2 2 is generated The second event occurs 7 04 microseconds after the start of the second sample period so a value of 7 04 is generated Sample Period 1 Sample Period 2 __ 2 2usec lf7 04 usec Event 1 Do Event 2 Do Time Stamp Values 2 2 usec 7 04 usec The circuit below saves the event time in microseconds to a SerStore buffer The circuit has two parameter tags InputBit and data The InputBit tag sends the digital input channel number to which the Event trigger will be sent to the TimeStamp This determines which of the Barracuda s digital input lines will be monitored for triggers The data tag reads the stored event time data to a PC buffer A software trigger resets the SimpCount starting the clock and will also reset the TimeStamp component and the SerStore buffer The SimpCount increments the count value at every sample tick The ScaleAdd divides the SimpCount output by the sample period 40 96 microseconds to keep track of the time in milliseconds When an event is detected the TimeStamp output is added to the SimpCount output to
71. the ZC16 and ZC32 is the same System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 7 ZIF Clip Headstage Pinouts If you are interested in using a third party electrode see page 10 6 for ZIF Clip adapters If there is no adapter offered for the desired electrode the following diagrams show the headstage pinout channel connections to the amplifier for all ZIF Clip headstages 16 32 and 64 channel ZIF Clip headstage pinouts Note The 16 channel ZIF Clip headstage does not have any pins connected on the right side of the headstage A black square guide is used to align the headstage to ZIF Clip compatible connectors 16 and 32 channel headstages 64 channel headstage Square Guide Square Guide B E E S 6 6 re Ma ke 8 aa _ S 1s be 14 13 10 9 16 145 412 n 9 R am G 18 1s 20 19 amp 22 24 a A 24 23 26 25 28 27 30 29 r ai 32 31 2 a RU om 60 59 24 23 58 57 22 24 56 55 19 54 53 3 2 Square Guide 44 43 42 4 4 39 38 37 3 35 34 3 Square Guide Note Images are not to scale System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 8 96 and 128 channel ZIF Clip headstage pinouts 128 channel headstage Square Guide 96 channel headstage Square Guide SPpls 437 2 Spls 4871 Pook SESeEERS MSRRaBERES SE N epis 4fiy epis 34y Square Guide Note Images are not
72. the components The first DataTable Channel Select stores the values for the channel number Channel numbers start at zero and go to fifteen Each RP2 1 is capable of controlling up to four PM2R devices The second DataTable DeviceSelect stores the values for the device ID The values in the table are 0 device 0 16 device 1 32 device 2 and 48 device 3 The iScaleAdd is used to add the integer values from both tables and the ToBits component changes the resulting integer to the bitcode pattern The first four bits are used to select the channel number and the last two bits are used to select the device ID A software trigger is used to change devices and initiate a tone burst of 100 milliseconds duration The software trigger causes the Schmitt trigger to open a gate for 100 milliseconds The Schmitt trigger is delayed by one millisecond relative to the channel select This removes the transient associated with the relays System 3 Manual Signal Handling 16 7 These bits are used to select the channel number 1 40 Ma 1 6 0 1 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 ma so A as z rors a Constl iScaleAdd 4 ToBits b06 1 8 0 _ K 0 F 2 i F hft 0 UL N _ hannel Sele Device Selec Use the Device Select DataTable D to select the device These bits are 0 selects device 1 used to select the Use the Channel Select DataTable 16 selects device 2 device ID 1 12 0 to select a channel 32 selec
73. the knob Access the UserOps menu and turn the Select knob until BaseAtt appears on the display Press and release the Select knob 0 0 dB appears on the display Turn the Select knob until the display shows the desired level of attenuation Press and release the Select knob The level is saved and BaseAtt appears on the display OO ee To exit the UserOps menu press and release the ESC button again Example 1 Adding Speaker Calibration Attenuation A user wishes to equilibrate the level of stimuli applied to two different loudspeakers Speaker 2 is 7 3 dB louder at the frequency of interest than speaker 1 This example requires the use of two PAS Programmable Attenuators To more directly compare thresholds measured with both loudspeakers set the BaseAtt parameter for speaker 1 to 0 0 dB and set the BaseAtt parameter for speaker 2 to 7 3 dB so that the signal level delivered for a given UserAtt is the same for both loudspeakers Actual attenuation versus displayed levels is shown in the following table Speaker 1 BaseAtt 0 Speaker 2 BaseAtt 7 3 UserAtt Display Value Actual Attenuation UserAtt Display Value Actual Attenuation 0 0 7 3 0 120 120 0 7 3 112 7 120 Example 2 Multiple Signals of Varying Levels The base attenuation feature is also useful when working with multiple signals of varying levels BaseAtt can be configured so the intensity of each signal input is identical at 0 0
74. the same Ground wire But not all headstages need to use the same Reference wire P i o pP amp veg SKULL to oe o ae e o 4 ae Sao ap Ag b 6 SKULL Y lt EK Multiple headstages with a Shared Ground or Reference When using multiple headstages with a shared ground or reference the ground and reference pins of each headstage should be tied together A ground is used and attached to a skull screw This ground is used by all headstages and ensures the headstages are referencing the same potential This is a multiple single ended configuration Multiple headstages with a Single Ground and Multiple References This configuration uses multiple differential headstages each with their own separate references Notice that all the headstages ground pin are tied together This is a multiple differential configuration Multiple headstages with a Shared Ground and different Ground Reference configurations When using multiple electrodes with a shared ground and separate reference all headstages grounds are connected to the skull screw A reference wire is present and connected to the desired headstage This ensures all headstages have the same ground potential and provides a reference for the desired headstage This is a hybrid configuration and uses a mixture of single ended and differential headstages Alternatively to use a single reference for all headstages you may tie all headstage r
75. to a PC via the PC interface for BOTH manual and programmed operation Features Display Displays the current level of attenuation being applied to the signal or displays the manual operations menu During manual operation it is used to set up user defined attenuation parameters and to obtain descriptions for menu items See Display Icons page 12 11 for more information ESC Button Exits the manual operations menu items without accepting changes System 3 Manual 12 4 Attenuator SELECT ENTER Knob During manual operation allows the user to adjust the attenuation applied to the signal In addition it allows the user to scroll through the manual operation menus set up user defined attenuation parameters and access descriptions of menu item Turn the Select knob to adjust attenuation or view menus Press and release the knob to make a selection The module must be in Attn or UserAtt mode to manually adjust attenuation See Manual Operation page 12 4 for more information INPUT BNC Source signal input The maximum input voltage is 10V peak OUTPUT BNC Attenuated signal output PA5 Manual Operation Important The PAS is powered via the zBus and must be connected to the PC via an interface module during manual operation In manual operation the PAS is operated using front panel controls The menu options are viewed by turning the Select knob and entered by pressing and releasing the knob The module must
76. to scale System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 9 ZIF Clip Headstage Holder Part Number ZROD The ZIF Clip headstage holder securely holds your ZIF Clip headstage during electrode insertion and can be used with most micromanipulators The headstage holder is approximately 4 5 in length the stabilizing rod is 3 in length and has a 3 32 diameter Each holder is designed for use with the selected ZIF Clip headstage Using the ZIF Clip Headstage Holder Connect the probe or adapter to your ZIF Clip headstage BEFORE putting the headstage in the holder the square guide provided to ensure the probe or adapter is connected with the correct polarity is hidden from view when the headstage is in the holder See the Adapter and Probe connection section on page 8 3 for more information Gently slide the ZIF Clip headstage onto the holder until it is completely secure as shown in the images below Gently slide the headstage onto the holder with probe or adapter already connected Position the headstage holder between the preamplifier cables of the ZIF Clip headstage Headstage completely secured in holder System 3 Manual 8 10 High Impedance Headstages If you need to remove the headstage from the holder grip the top and bottom of the ZIF Clip headstage and gently slide the holder back until it is no longer in contact with the headstage i To remove grip the top and bo
77. two or five digital signal processors DSPs The multi DSP architecture allows processing tasks to be distributed across multiple processors and enables data to be transferred to the PC quickly and efficiently The DSPs include one master and one or four auxiliary DSP s 128 MB SDRAM of system memory is shared by all DSPs When designing circuits the maximum number of components for each RX DSP is 256 Each DSP communicates with an internal bus to send and receive information from the I O controller and the shared memory The master DSP supervises overall system boot up and operation The master DSP also acts as the main data interface between the zBus host PC and the multi DSP environment System 3 Manual 2 36 RX Processors Because the zBus communicates only with the master processor these devices operate most efficiently when the circuit related processing tasks assigned to the master DSP are minimized allowing more processor power cycles for communication and overhead tasks zBus IF Master Interface lt GpicalFibet gt E DSP 2Bus y hl Host Pc Nesters interface Host PC Controller Qa Sarea Memory 7 eic DSP o E a T Goa Aux DSP l 0 Aux DSP Interface C Digital I O lt gt Front Panel Aux DSP Ports Connectors J Analog Output enna Front Panel gt The RX8 contains two DB25 connectors for interfacing with 24 bits of digital I O and 24
78. used This rate is based on the PCM converters If your RX8 contains any sigma delta converters you must use the following values for arbitrary sampling rates Supported Arbitrary Sample Rates for Sigma Delta Converters Rate Hz O os Y Z i oas P 9765 63 1395089 76 04 1953125 7901 79 P 3255208 O P 3906250 OO ws O O i fewr L 7812500 O 100 kHz 97656 25 System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 43 Multi I O Technical Specifications DSP 100 MHz Sharc ADSP 21161 600 MFLOPS Peak Two or Five Memory 128 MB SDRAM D A up to 24 channels 16 bit PCM or 24 bit sigma delta Sample Rate Up to 97 65625 kHz t Frequency Response Sigma delta or PCM DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate Voltage Out 10 0 Volts S N typical Sigma delta 97 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz at 10 V PCM 80 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz at 10 V THD typical Sigma delta 84 dB 1 kHz output at 5 Vrms PCM 70 dB 1 kHz output at 5 Vrms Sample Delay Sigma delta 23 samples or PCM 4 samples A D up to 16 channels 16 bit PCM or 24 bit sigma delta Sample Rate Up to 97 65625 kHz t Frequency Response Sigma delta DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate PCM DC 7 5 kHz 3 dB corner 2nd order 12 dB per octave Voltage In 10 0 Volts S N typical Sigma delta 97 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz at 10 V PCM 80 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz at 10 V THD typical Sigma delta 84 dB 1 kHz output at 5 Vrms PCM 65 dB 1 kHz output at 5 Vrms Sample Delay Sigma delta 47 samples or
79. with almost no insertion force applied to the subject ZIF Clip headstage contacts seat inside the probe array and snap in place firmly locking the headstage and probe with very little applied pressure These self aligning headstages provide long lasting low insertion performance for a variety of channel number and electrode configurations An aluminum finish provides increased durability By default ground and reference are separate on all ZIF Clip headstages yielding a differential configuration Reference and ground may be tied together on the headstage adapter or ZIF Clip microwire array for single ended configurations Note ZIF Clip headstages are designed to connect directly to any Z Series preamplifier but may be connected to a Medusa preamplifier with the use of an adapter Part Numbers Patent No 7540752 ZC16 16 Channel Aluminum ZIF Clip headstage ZC32 32 Channel Aluminum ZIF Clip headstage ZC64 64 Channel Aluminum ZIF Clip headstage ZC96 96 Channel Aluminum ZIF Clip headstage ZC128 128 Channel Aluminum ZIF Clip headstage Note part numbers for LED ZIF Clip headstages have LED in the part name ie ZC16 LED i The headstage has sensitive electronics Always ground yourself before handling Adapter and Probe Connection ZIF Clip headstages are designed to automatically position the high density connectors on the headstage and probe or adapter and are recommended for use with input impeda
80. zHop and Data Pipe Bus The zHop Bus introduces a single sample delay and the Data Pipe Bus adds a two sample delay However these delays are taken care of for the user in OpenEx when Timing and Data Saving macros are used 50 kHz Sampling Rate Acquisition with the PZ Amplifier The RZ2 and PZ amplifier support sample rates from 6 kHz to 50 kHz When sampling at a rate of 50 kHz there are several important considerations gt Only the first 128 PZ amplifier channels will be available gt All DataPipes will have a max of 128 channels instead of 256 gt Both halves A and B of the PipeSource component must be selecting the desired source For example when acquiring data from a PZ amplifier Pipe A and Pipe B both need to be set to Amp Chan 1 128 Data Transfer Rate As with other devices your expected sustained RZ to Host PC data rate should not exceed 1 2 to 2 3 of the rated data transfer speed For the RZ2 device this is 160 Mbits second Mbps so your designs should have a sustained data rate of no more than 100 Mbps When the RZ2 is processing the current data transfer rate Mbps is displayed in the top right corner of the LCD Screen This maximum rate may be further limited by your PC s ability to store the data to disk This equates to streaming a maximum of 160 channels at a sampling rate of 25 kHz or 90 channels at a sampling rate of 50 kHz See Calculating Data Transfer Rates in the OpenEx Manual for more inform
81. 0 Ohms Pinout Pins for jumper connections Bank 4 64 63 62 61 60 58 56 54 52 50 43 47 46 45 44 42 41 40 39 38 59 57 55 53 5149 G 43 37 33 36 35 34 6 810 12 14 16 R Rof 2228 32 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 7 91113115 47 18 19 20 2123 2425 26 27 Bank Bank 1 2 looking into connections The numbers in the diagram above show the channel connections to the amplifier The headstage also features jumper locations to short G R and Ref Ref refers to the built in reference site on the NeuroNexus probe The ground channel should either be tied to an external ground or to the reference for a single ended input See the table below NN32AC for jumper configurations and associated requirements Important When using the NN64AC with the NeuroNexus Acute 64 channel probe keep in mind that there are several versions of the probe Check the NeuroNexus Website for pin diagrams Also see MCMap for a description and examples on how to re map channel numbers System 3 Manual 8 16 High Impedance Headstages NN32AC 32 Channel Acute Headstage Overview The 32 Channel Acute headstage is recommended for extracellular neurophysiology using silicon electrodes metal microelectrodes or microwire arrays with input impedances from 20 kOhm to 5 Mohm The headstage features a 40 pin connector designed for use with the NeuroNexus Acute 32 channel probe The headstage connects to a PZ series preamplifier via two mini 26 pin connectors or to two RA
82. 0 pAddr 32 The circuit segment above sends out a stimulus signal to channel one of the stimulator RX7 When using the RX7 output to channels 1 16 must be written to memory addresses 20 35 respectively To do so offset the channel number by 19 and enter this value in the address parameter of the Poke component Summary Simultaneous Stimulation on Multiple Channels The example below shows a more complete picture with the MS16 Control macro used to set or turn on multiple channels using the ChanMask hop see page 6 11 and the Poke used to write the signal value to the MS4 MS16 memory location for channels one and two with the RZS MS16_Conirol StimChan_Mask h b Single Ended Stim Mode RZ5 1 2 0 1 3 0 Float2Int Poke OSF 1 73940 0 bAddr 32 1 50 pp Poke pAddr 33 Circuit Design Using the Poke Component Using the MS16_ Control macro simplifies circuit design for the MicroStimulator System If the macro cannot be used you can use the RPvdsEx Poke component to control the stimulus isolator by writing information to memory addresses on the RZ5 or RX7 Memory Address Reference for Using the Poke Component The table below summarizes each stimulus isolator control function and its memory address Control Value Description Memory Address ps e Stimulus Mask for channels between none and 48 7 Channels 16 integer value between 0 and 65535 Signal Output Integer representing current leve
83. 0 kHz per channel Each bank of four or eight channels of I O is user configurable with either PCM or sigma delta converters The 24 bit sigma delta converters are ideal for audio applications The 16 bit PCM analog converters have an excellent dynamic range and almost no group delay These converters are excellent for acquiring signal information and controlling external devices such as motors The RX8 is equipped with either two or five 100 MHz 1600 MFLOPS Sharc DSPs and can control audio feedback systems or motor controls in real time Built in digital filters waveform generators and logic control components give end users the ability to design and control virtually any presentation system Power and Communication The RX8 mounts in a System 3 zBus Powered Device Chassis ZB1PS and communicates with the PC using the Gigabit PI5 FI5 or Optibit PO5 FOS5 PC interfaces The ZB1PS is UL compliant see the ZBJ PS Operations Manual for power and safety information Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the processor through TDT run time applications or custom applications This manual includes device specific information needed during circuit design For circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circuit components see the RPvdsEx Manual RX Architecture Each RX multiprocessor device is equipped with either
84. 1 ACTIVE DATA CH1 STAT CHZ STAT HTI3 Circuit Design The HTI3 parses incoming signals from a motion tracker into 16 channels of data and sends it to a base station such as RX5 RX6 or RA16BA at rates up to 25 kHz Most motion trackers send data at a slow rate 120 Hz This means that there is a large amount of redundancy in the data acquired by the base station The circuit designs described below will reduce the resulting redundancy and convert the raw HTI3 output signals into useful information such as error codes distance measures and relative positional information such as Azimuth Elevation and Roll Acquiring and Scaling Motion Tracker Signals Motion tracker signals are acquired via a fiber optic cable connecting the HTI3 to a base station The most common signals input via the fiber optic port are biological signals amplified using one of the TDT preamplifiers so all signals input through one of these ports are automatically scaled accordingly When the fiber optic inputs are used to acquire signals from other devices such as the HTI3 the signals must be scaled according to the signal characteristics of the specific device In the case of the HTI interface the signal from each channel must be scaled by 114 35 This adjusts the signal to a range of 1 0V Additional scaling is required to convert signals on some input channels to the appropriate units or values The table below describes the scale factor s for each sign
85. 16 channel microwire array to an acute TDT headstage RAI16AC RA16AC4 Standard operation for chronic preparations is single ended with ground and reference shorted together in the chronic headstage However the acute headstage is designed for differential operation When using the acute headstage with our microwire arrays short G and R together on the adapter for single ended operation Front Back 0 5mm Male 18 pin Female Female connectors compatible DIP Socket Header Omnetics Nano with 0 5mm diameter male pins Dual Row Header Guide Pin Guide Pin Female Omnetics connector pinout gt OO DO OOOOO Looking into connector Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels TDT probe adapters are designed for specific TDT headstage to probe connections If you are using a third party headstage please contact TDT support for assistance System 3 Manual 10 4 Adapters and Connectors CH AC Chronic Headstage to Acute Probe 16 Channels This adapter connects a 16 channel acute probe to a TDT chronic headstage RA16CH Reference and ground are tied together by default on the chronic headstage so in general only one pin connection is necessary A jumper is provided on the RA16CH for differential operation See RAI6OCH page 8 18 for information Front Back G 10 12 14 16 18 pin Male Omnetics Nano Dual Row Header Female connectors compatible Female Socket compatible wi
86. 16 channels coming from each connected headstage The PZ2 channels are marked next to the respective connector on the preamplifier So for the connector for channel 1 16 Al is channel 1 while on the connector for channels 17 32 A1 is channel 17 Important Each input connector uses its own unique ground and reference When using multiple headstages ground pins on all headstages should be connected together to form a single common ground See the Headstage Connection Guide page 5 33 for more information Pinout Diagram GND Analog Input Ref Analog Input ERED IC LOLOTG ba 8 ONE GND Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 Al 14 V Positive Voltage Aaa eee 15 GND Ground 3 A3 16 GND 4 A4 17 V Negative Voltage 5 Ref Reference 18 HSD Headstage Detect 6 HSD Headstage Detect 19 HSD 7 AS 20 A6 8 A7 21 A8 9 A9 Analog Input 22 A10 Analog Input 10 All Channels 23 A12 Channels 11 A13 24 A14 12 A15 25 A16 13 GND Ground 26 NA Not Used Note Do not attempt to make any custom connections to pins 6 18 or 19 These pins are intended for TDT use only System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 9 PZ3 Low Impedance Amplifier Overview The PZ3 is a high channel count low impedance amplifier well suited for ECOG Evoked Potentials EEGs LFP s EMGs and other similar recording app
87. 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 System 3 Manual Part 17 PC Interfaces 17 2 PC Interfaces System 3 Manual PC Interfaces 17 3 Interface Transfer Rates Transfer rates depend on a number of factors including the device accessed the type of transfer and cycle usage The table below includes typical transfer rates for the Optibit Gigabit and USB interfaces at a 50 cycle usage with RP RX and RZ devices All values are MB s Interface Transfer Type RP RX Rez wo o h e ee A Because of the overhead required to poll the hardware or run single commands with the USB interface users should be aware of the following relationships when performing small data transfers with the UZ2 Interface Transfer Type UZ2 Snippet Transfers 0 3 MB s 100 fh Sal Single Commands 1000 Commands s System 3 Manual 17 4 PC Interfaces Cycle Usage and Large Transfers The following graphs show how the cycle usage affects the transfer rate for large transfers with the Optibit Gigabit and USB 2 0 interfaces with an RX device The data was collected using a buffer size of 1 000 000 for the Read Tag and Write Tag commands The transfer rates were tested using both the RP2 1 a single processor device and only the main processor of an RX6 and using circuits generating cycle usages of 5 25 and 50 percent Read Tag Buffer Size 1000000 e USB E GB gt Optibit 25 Cycle Usage
88. 232 cable to the tracker This connector also performs the required RS232 gender change Polhemus FOB The toggle switch is provided to select between the FT or FOB motion tracker This switch must be in the correct position on power up of the HTI3 for correct operation To use the miniBIRD set to FOB The miniBIRD tracker must be set to Normal Addressing Mode and the DIP settings should be configured as below System 3 Manual 15 18 Subject Interfaces eee pe ee ee Fa Boresight A boresight command can be issued from an external 3V digital source via the Boresight BNC input This signal needs to be a logical high 1 pulse of at least 200 ns in length The signal then needs to be set logic low 0 for at least 200 ns before another boresight command can be issued Activity Lights Active The Active LED indicates if the HTI3 is connected to a base station via a fiber optic cable This LED will flash slowly 1 Hz if this connection is not properly made Data The Data LED indicates if the HTI3 is receiving data from the motion tracker unit This LED will also flash slowly 1 Hz if the tracker is not properly connected to the HTI3 CH1 Stat Ch2 Stat The Chl Stat and Ch2 Stat LEDs indicate if the interface is receiving data from receiver 1 receiver 2 or both The figure below shows the LED pattern for the HTI3 properly connected to a base station and a motion tracker while acquiring data from receiver
89. 28 respectively for these values 1 1 0 Adding 64 1000000 is equivalent to Adding 32 100000 is equivalent to inserting a 1 in the D5 position which turns on the LED selected in the first five bits d ei inserting a 1 in the D6 position which turns off the LED selected in the first te j five bits 1 2 0 g g A ON OFF iBitShift Adding 128 qi 0000000 is equivalent to N inserting a 1 in the D7 position which N turns off all LEDs ON OFF Note See the Bit Pattern Table for a review of how each bit position is used This example is found in the LED3 RPvdsEx file in the ButtonBox example folder TDT RPvdsEX Examples ButtonBox System 3 Manual 15 12 Subject Interfaces RBOX Response Box The RBOX has four buttons for user response and four LEDs that can be used to provide subjects with feedback This small and lightweight response box is an affordable solution to collecting simple subject response data The RBOX has three models RBOX is used with the RP2 1 processor RBOX4 with the RM series processors and RBOX_RX6 with the RX series processors Part numbers RBOX Response Box for RP2 1 RBOX4 Response Box for PI2 RM1 or RM2 RBOX_RX6 Custom Response Boxes Connecting the RBOX to the RP2 1 The standard RBOX connects via the DB25 connector directly to the digital input output port on the RP2 1 with the supplied cable Connecting the RBOX4 to the RM1 or RM2 The RBOX4 connec
90. 2Bus Monitor via Optical G gabit Reboot System PO5 vi0 Hardware Reset When Show Statistics is F Shoan checked the window F Show Statistics expands to display amount ZBUS rack number of data transferred errors 1 In 38mb Out 38mb Reboot System The Reboot System button resets hardware and reloads device drivers Hardware Reset The Hardware Reset button resets connected hardware Flush zBus The Flush zBus button flushes interface line of commands or data Transfer Test The Transfer Test button tests communication between the TDT modules and the PC This will test data transfer both to and from the PC A status bar is displayed indicating how much time is remaining in the test Click anywhere in the zBUSmon window to end the test early Show Version Check Box When the Show Version box is checked the version number of each programmable device s firmware TDT Microcode are displayed in the hardware diagram The microcode version number is shown within parentheses next to each device For processor devices the version number shown should be the same as the version number of the TDT Drivers installed on the PC System 3 Manual 19 4 System 3 Utlities Note this does not occur in the PAS The RP2 1 and the RL2 have a 1 in front of the microcode version number Microcode and driver version numbers should always be the same Microcode versions displayed with red text are signif
91. 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 7 Identifying the correct button press 2 1 10 1 10 0 SMA gt gt Latch OE Correct gt _ gt eTr9 0 1 6 0 1 7 0 1 20 RSHipHop g EdgeDetect o iCompare d BEdge Risng K 0 OT est NE 1 4 0 1 11 0 1 12 0 Src Soft1 m Int2Foat Log Log2 ba Button Press ae Soret d 1 14 0 1 15 0 1 16 0 AO iCompare EdgeDetect Schmitt Ma UL K 4 bEdge Rising J Thi 100 CorrectBin OTest EQ e Tlo 10 iCompare is only triggered when ther correct button is pressed EdgeDetect then sets the Schmitt trigger which turns on an LED for 100 milliseconds In this example the top part of the circuit detects if a button is pressed The button press value is also translated into a value representing which bit was read For example if the bit in bitmask value is 16 then Log2 converts the value to 4 This lets the user determine via the Button_Press parameter tag that bit 4 was high The lower part of the circuit tests to determine if the correct button was pressed If so an LED is flashed A parameter tag is used to identify the correct button press The iCompare is only triggered when the correct button is pressed The EdgeDetect component then sets the Schmitt that turns on the first LED for 100 milliseconds Button box circuits can be incorporated in to all TDT System 3 software For information on using the button box with other appli
92. 4 Bits 0 2 4 and 6 16 BAS Bits 1 3 5 and 7 4 BA6 17 BA7 5 GND Digital I O Ground 18 AO IByte A 6 Al Byte A 19 A2 ord addressable 7 A3 Word addressable bo A4 digital T O digital I O bi IAG Bits 0 2 4 and 6 Bade Bits 1 3 5 and 7 9 A7 22 IBO Byte B 10 B1 B b3 B2 ord addressable Io yie bz Ig igital 1 0 Word addressable Bits 0 2 4 and 6 12 IBS digital I O 25 B6 13 B7 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 System 3 Manual Part 3 RP Processors System 3 Manual 3 2 RP Processors System 3 Manual RP Processors 3 3 RA16 Medusa Base Station RAIG Mtousa Base STATION gt Line Overview Recommended for single or dual channel extracellular recordings and low channel count EEG s EMG s and evoked potential recordings such as ABRs the Medusa Base Station is a versatile signal processor designed to acquire filter and process data digitized on one of our preamplifiers The RA16 acquires digitized signals from a Medusa preamplifier over a fiber optic cable providing loss less signal acquisition between the amplifier and the base station PCM analog outputs can be used for a wide variety of signal production tasks including control of motors electrical stimulation and monitoring analog signals during acquisition Power and Communication The RA16 mounts in a System 3 zBus Powered Device Chassis ZB1PS and communicates with the PC using any of the zBus PC interfaces The ZB1PS is UL compliant se
93. 48 Battery Pack should be connected to its charger for a maximum of 16 hours Overcharging shortens battery life and may burn out the battery in extreme cases Although the batteries used in the NC48 are designed to provide the user with dozens of charge discharge cycles the performance of all rechargeable batteries deteriorates over time The major sign that a battery is deteriorating is a shortened use cycle between charges Note Used NiCad batteries must be recycled The NC48 Battery pack should be stored at normal room temperatures Temperature extremes can affect the operation of the batteries Battery packs stored for longer than two months should be tested prior to use MS4 MS16 Anomalies If the stimulus isolator control bits and relay switching control bits do not work after power up execute a hardware reset on the base station using zBusMon Serial numbers 4000 and above Previous versions of the stimulator automatically switched banks of channels off when not in use A recent change to the microcode eliminates this feature giving users control over when channels are turned off By default all channels are on and must be turned off manually Serial numbers below 4008 MS4 and 4015 MS16 When the NC48 is connected to the stimulus isolator the High Voltage LED on the front panel of the MS4 MS16 will constantly flash even when the NC48 24 V is at full charge because the voltage monitoring circuitry was designed to detect a
94. 6 11 but stimulus delivery must be handled external to the macro Converting the Signal to an Integer Value When designing the stimulus signal it is convenient to work with floating point values that represents the desired current in microAmps See Designing the Stimulus Signal page 6 9 However when the macro is not used the stimulus signal must be converted to an integer value representing a voltage level in the proper range for the stimulus isolator The scale factor required to scale the current in the desired range of 100 uA is dependent on the type of base station processor being used RZ5 When using the RZS5 use a scale factor of 1 7394e 007 RX7 When using the RX7 use a scale factor of 265 41 1 2 0 OSF 1 7394e 0 A In this circuit segment the desired floating point value in microAmps is fed to a Float2Int which converts the data type and applies the scale factor Signal Output to Stimulus Channels Once output waveforms are converted to an integer value they are poked written to memory locations on the MS4 MS16 using the Poke component Memory addresses vary be processor as described here Reference tables are also provided below page 6 14 RZ5 When using the RZ5 output to channels 1 16 must be written to memory addresses 32 47 respectively To do so offset the channel number by 31 and enter this value in the address parameter of the Poke component System 3 Manual 6 14 Stimulus Isolator 1 5
95. 8 15 Digital Out 0 7 Digital In 0 7 The optional connection for the Barracuda is shown below and uses both the DB25 and DB9 cables provided with the PP 16 In this format eight digital inputs eight digital outputs and the eight optional analog channels are configured as follows RVB BARRACUDA PROCESSOR Installed Option carmen oON Doyr DIP Switches TRIG GRUNNINGO Digital O Option I O Press switches toward arrow cis anaes WA ON Connectors labeled RV8 PP16 At A2 A3 A4 AS A6 A7 A8 Bi B2 B3 B4 BS B6 B7 B8 Ct C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 Analog Channels 1 8 Digital Out 0 7 Digital In 0 7 Mapping RA8GA A PP16 patch panel can be used to simplify connection to the preamplifier s analog inputs A ribbon cable can be connected from the RA8GA Analog I O connector to the RA16 connector on the back of the PP16 allowing acquisition of signals via the first eight BNC connectors on the front of the PP16 RASGA ADJUSTABLE GAIN PREAMP Max Input Range ToBase Active Select gt 10V Analog I O 01V Sy _ Connector Labeled PP16 Back Ports RA16 PP16 Patch Panel A1 A2 A3 A4 AS A6 A7 AB Analog Inputs on Connectors 1 8 System 3 Manual 16 16 Signal Handling Mapping PM2R I O The picture below maps the PM2R signal out connection to the PP16 PM2RELAY POWER MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL RP CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL SIGNAL OUT P wO QQ IN Connector labe
96. A4PA and RA16PA 60dB Input Inferred Noise rms 3 microvolts bandwidth 300 3000 Hz 6 microvolts bandwidth 30 5000 Hz Group Sample Delay RA4PA and RAI6PA NA RA16SD 20 Samples A D Sample Rate 6 12 or 25 kHz Input Impedance AC 1 kHz 10 Ohms Power Requirements 500 mAmps while charging 50 mAmps once charged Battery Li ion Battery 1500 mAh 20 30 hours between charges 1000 cycles of charging not removable by user Charger 6 9 Volts DC greater than 500 mAmps center negative Fiber Optic Cable 5 meters standard maximum cable length 12 meters System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 23 Pin Diagrams 16 4 channel pin outs all 16 channel models and 4 channel models built after 2002 GND REF Bi Ti SCM V GND V Pin Nene Dawiptea Analog Input Channel Number a a S REF Reen TDT Use Only Pins 6 and 19 are for TDT use only and should not be used 19 AD Analog Input Channel Number 14 V Positive Voltage Headstage Power Source 1 4 V as measured in reference to ground 17 V Negative Voltage Headstage Power Source 1 4 V as measured in reference to ground 18 SCM Sixteen Channel Mode Indicator Pin The status of pin 18 determines whether the preamplifier is in four or 16 channel mode To use the preamplifier in 16 channel mode with a custom headstage connect pin 18 to pin 17 19 NA TDT Use Only Pins 6 and 19 are for TDT use only and should not be used aoei Channel Number i G
97. Add register a TTL pulse needs to be sent to SF 1 latch the information to the headstage nis 1 10 0 Clock 1 11 0 TTLDelay2 Schmitt2 ON1 13 OnHi 26 N2 0 OnEnab 1 N N y The 24 bit mask is sent serially MSB first to load the headstage These bits are clocked with the serial clock When all 24 bits have been sent the load pulse is activated to latch the data to the relays With the sampling rate set to 25 kHz in RPvdsEx and nPer equal to 52 in the PulseTrain2 component the serial clock Bit 2 will run at 469 Hz Setting nPer equal to 26 will allow the clock to run at 939 Hz The figure below not to scale shows the 25kHz pulse rate of 52 samples 1 sample high 51 samples low as well as the serial clock rate of 13 samples low 26 samples high and 13 samples low Pulse 1 2 3 4 23 24 Pulse Train J LL i 1 51 samples HS Enable f initiate Sequence ji Bit 0 Latch Load MSB LSB pat seriaro L2 X22 Xa Xa KK X S Bit 2 Serial Clock ILOJ OJT Lez S LOTI S7 p i H i 13 26 13 samples System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 27 For headstages with serial numbers gt 2000 the headstage needs digital high voltages on the input lines of the control connector to power its circuits Power the headstage circuits by writing a logic 1 high to the MS16 control bits bits 3 7 In the circuit segment below the latch data and clock l
98. B1 and PS25F are TDT s legacy zBUS caddie and power supply The ZB1 device caddie is similar to the newer ZB1PS however it does not have onboard power and must be used in conjunction with the PS25F t A WARNINGS The PS25F power supply must be placed in the right hand bay of a ZB1 Device Caddie as you look at the back of the caddie It can damage the system if it is placed in any other bay No other power supply can be used to power the zBUS The two voltage switches should be switched to the mains voltage for your country For example in the United States these should both be switched to 115 V System 3 Manual Part 19 System 3 Utilities 19 2 System 3 Utlities System 3 Manual System 3 Utlities 19 3 zBUSmon Bus Interface Test Utility The zBUS Monitor program is a tool used to test the USB Gigabit or Optibit connection to System 3 This program is installed in the C TDT zDrv3 directory by default and a shortcut is added to the TDT Sys3 Directory in the Start menu The zBUSmon Window When the utility is run a small monitor window is opened All correctly connected zBUS or built in device chassis housing a programmable device such as the RP2 and PAS are represented in the system diagram Chassis housing non programmable devices such as the SM5 or HB7 are not displayed Optical gigabit microcode version number Show Version must be checked to view version information er 5 9
99. B1PS chassis features an onboard switchable 115V 220V power source The power supply is integrated into the chassis and cannot be removed A small fan is located inside of the power supply and provides cooling while the power supply is active System 3 Manual 18 4 The zBus and Power Supply Using the ZB1PS POWER SWITCH INDICATOR LIGHT Front View TIME LaG FUSE 239P SERIES x2 VENTILATION 500 MA 250 V RATING ZBIPS Cresain POWER CORDINLET VOLTAGE REGION SETTING Back View Applying Power to the Chassis AN CAUTION Allow at least 2 cm clearance from each side of the chassis for proper cooling A ventilation fan is provided on the right side of the chassis Ventilation holes are also provided on the power supply panel and another internal fan is provided inside the power supply housing Installation of the chassis with the ventilation obstructed may cause a malfunction or fire Use only the supplied power cord To turn the ZBIPS on 1 Position the chassis so that both the power switch and power cord may be accessed easily 2 Ensure that the power switch is off and connect the power cord 3 Ensure that the voltage region switch is set correctly For standard outlets in the United States it should be switched to 115 V 4 Turn the power switch on and check that the power switch s green LED is illuminated The Indicator Light A front panel switch turns on the chassis power supply and includes an indicator lig
100. C Coupler Optional and NC48 or HV250 Battery Pack The block diagram below illustrates the functionality of the system y Fiber Optic Connection Software control and Transfer control info and digital signals for data transfer P stimulation to stimulus isolator RZ5 or RX7 Base Station MS16 or MS4 Roh oer generies Stimulus Isolator Optional Stimulating digital stimulation and generates analog Headstage Electrodes control waveforms CUON CEVIS High Speed Interface Input from Current output to sensors RA8GA NC48 or HV250 headstage or recording Optional Battery Pack ACC16 optional electrodes PreAmp RA16PA RA4PA Multichannel MicroStimulator System Diagram As seen in the illustration above stimulation control waveforms for each electrode channel are first defined on the base station and digitally transmitted over a fiber optic cable to the battery powered stimulus isolator On the isolator specialized circuitry for each electrode channel generates an analog current waveform as specified by the digital stimulation control waveform The final analog current output from the isolator is adjusted to match the stimulation control waveform by adjusting the isolator s driving voltage according to Ohm s law where V IR That is the driving voltage is adjusted for the stimulation control waveform level and the electrode System 3 Manual 6 4 Stimulus Isolator impedance In this way the stimulation current specif
101. C7 C8 Analog Channels 1 8 Digital Out 0 7 Digital Out 8 15 Mapping RP2 RP2 1 I O The diagram below maps the RP2 Digital I O connection to the PP16 The last seven BNC connectors are not used BNC Cl maps to Vcc 3 3 RP2 1 REAL TIME PROCESSOR TRIG IN 4 IN 2 OUT 1 OUT 2 Digital I O Connector labeled RP2 PP16 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 Bi B2 B3 B4 BS B6 B7 BB C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 CB Digital i E Baoi ie Wo a Mapping RV8 I O There are two connectors for the Barracuda on the rear edge of the PP16 The optional analog channels are on the DB9 connector and the digital I O are on the DB25 connector The PP16 is configured to accommodate 24 of the 32 inputs outputs and channels on the Barracuda at any given time TDT ships a special cable that connects between the DB9 connector and the RV8 Connect the analog ground on the back of the PP16 to produce adequate signal quality The default connection for the Barracuda is shown below In this format sixteen digital inputs and eight digital outputs are configured as follows System 3 Manual Signal Handling 16 15 RVB BARRACUDA PROCESSOR INSTALLED OPTION DIN DouT JARMED O O DIP Switches prea O RUNNING O DIGITAL V O OPTION VO Press switches toward arrow TPR AE ee ona ei Connector labeled RV8 PP16 At A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 Bi B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 BB Ci C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 Digital In
102. Clip Warning Power Status display Enable logical level lights for byte A Enable logical level lights for byte B XLink The XLink is not supported at this time System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 21 Realizable Sampling Rates for the RX6 The following table shows the actual sampling rate values for the RX6 The X s on the table correspond to realizable frequencies for the ADC DAC Optical input and Digital I O For example the Digital I O accepts a sampling rate up to 390625 0 Hz and the Audio ADC and DAC each accept a sampling rate up to 260416 67 Hz The maximum realizable sampling rates are accepted as the maximum sampling rate without distortion Each of the inputs and outputs will function above these sampling rates but distortion will be present in the signal Rate Rate Hz Input 6kaz 610352 tk ea o a 697s45s T E E_Z lll E E os E E e e 19sos9 o fa e U l P 6276 04 e y o oo usis o a i e o o mz ma x x o ooo o S O o laos hk h T O osso E a 39062 50 o fa e U SSe 50k z 4882813 x qe e o a P ssso3ss7 San e U a ol desioi lee Piso Cd oom 9765625 x i x i six osons DE iS Boos33 Ja n e S el 15625000 x e U el EO x x A E eS iS ees xd E S S E 31250000 400kHz 39062500 PE d a O x Fully functional x Sampling limited to 25KHz x x a a a a a a a a a a D lt lt lt as s as as a a s a a s s l j j x x x x x x x LL a a
103. Count 1 the trigger mode 16 32 or 64 depending on what trigger option and possibly enabling MTRIG 128 3 Determine the number of samples that the circuit runs The Barracuda can play out over 4 Gsamples 4 10 samples on one trigger Sample Counter Low 16 sets the sample number between 0 and 65535 Sample Counter High 16 sets it between 65536 and a large number For example to play out 80000 samples the Sample Counter High 16 would be set to 1 65 536 and Sample Counter Low 16 to 14 464 4 Load and trigger the circuit System 3 Manual 3 16 RP Processors Sample Count Options Sample count parameters set the number of samples the circuit will run The Sample Counter Low 16 values are between 0 and 65536 lower 16 bits of data Sample Counter High 16 values are multiples of 65536 For example a value of 2 in Sample Counter High 16 will cause the circuit to run for 131 072 samples If the system needed to run for 200 000 samples you would set Sample Counter High 16 3 196 608 samples and Sample Counter Low 16 3 392 Sample count is only used when in trigger mode At all other times the circuit is free running Sample Counter Low 16 the lower 1 6bits of the sample counter 0 65535 Sample Counter High 16 the upper 16bits of the counter A value of 1 in Sample Counter High 16 65536 Logic User selects whether a high voltage on a digital line is a logical 1 or logical 0 on the Barracuda T
104. DC TeNeG BATTERY Pack BACK PANEL A Warning The HV250 is a high voltage power source capable of delivering up to 250 Volts DC at high currents Shorting the battery connection pins can cause damage to the device and injury to the user Always use caution when handling or connecting the devices System 3 Manual 6 6 Stimulus Isolator 3 Connect the Stimulus Isolator to the base station using the provided fiber optic cable I pos a i Pa SPEAKER SK voLume Wde ui u2 All rr aa aga Q Cw 0 0 0 MIN MAX Processors Mone DicitaL DAG ADC RZ5 Bioame Processor 1 2 DieiraL vO ADC DAC O o4 o9 stim 2 DiciTaL O a Anaon 1 0 1 Oo os 2 o2 56 o3 n s o7 4 AMP A AMP B FIBER OPTIC CABLE CONNECTIONS Base ation Simulus Isolator STIMULATOR To BASE oo jo MS16 STIMULUS ISOLATOR CONTROL OuTPUTS STIM OUTPUTS NC48 BATTERY PACK Connect the fiber optic cable from the MS 16 fiber optic port labeled To Base to the fiber optic port labeled Stimulator on either the RZ5 or the RX7 not shown Be sure to note the difference in the two sides if the fiber optic cable connectors and ensure they are inserted with the correct side up as shown under Fiber Optic Cable Connections above 4 If desired connect the ACC16 AC Coupler to the Stimulus Isolator s STIM OUTPUT port Jumper als e a z 4 gt wa Connect to tt Sau
105. ED monitors for a quick indicator of bit state The bits of these ports can be programmed individually or as a digital word and used in a variety of ways within the RP2 processing circuit Ext Trigger Digital I O Interface DB 25 Indicator Lights Se Fu Command Link Analog Inputs Analog Outputs The RP2 is interfaced to the analog world via a two channel 24 bit analog to digital converter and a two channel 24 bit digital to analog converter The RP2 system s I O buffer handles 10 Volt signals with excellent signal to noise performance The RP2 contains a 100 kHz 50 kHz BW A D and a 200 kHz 100 kHz BW D A while the RP2 5 has a 50 kHz 25 kHz BW A D and D A Both devices allow for user programmable sampling rates from the specified maximum down to 6 25 kHz A special calibration program is used to calibrate the RP2 s analog I O offering very small gain and DC errors System 3 Manual RP Processors 3 9 Real Time Processor Technical Specifications DSP 50 MHz Share 21065 150 MFLOPS Memory RP2 16 MB SDRAM RP2 1 32 MB SDRAM RP2 5 has no SDRAM A D 2 channels 24 bit sigma delta Frequency Response DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate S N typical 105 dB 20 Hz to 20 KHz 95 dB 20 Hz to 50 KHz Distortion typical 95 dB for 1 KHz input at 5 Vrms A D Sample Rate RP2 1 195 312 kHz maximum RP2 97 656 kHz maximum RP2 5 48 828 kHz maximum Sample Delay RP2 1 65 samples RP2 41 sampl
106. ES series electrostatic speakers The driver produces flat frequency responses reaching far into the ultrasonic range can drive two ES series speakers and is powered using the onboard power supply A switch located directly to the left of the two 4 pin mini DIN connectors is used to enable or disable output of DAC channels A and B ELECTROSTATIC B Note The electrostatic speaker driver is designed to m work exclusively with TDT s electrostatic series speakers Do NOT attempt to use any other speaker ON A S f OFF Important If the electrostatic speaker driver is not being used make sure that the ON OFF switch is in the OFF position to reduce noise on the RZ6 System 3 Manual 1 30 RZ Z Series Processors Digital 1 0 The digital I O includes 8 bits of programmable I O By default all digital I O are configured as inputs Data direction for the digital I O is configured using the RZ6_Control macro in RPvdsEx Double click the macro to access the settings on the Digital I O tab RZ6_Control ByteC Dir 11001100 Data direction can also be programmed dynamically through the macro input port For more information on using the RZ6 Control macro see the help provided in the macro s properties dialog box All digital I O lines are accessed via the 9 pin connector on the front of the RZ6 See RZ6 Technical Specifications page 1 32 for the DB9 pinout See the Digital I O Circuit Design section of the RPv
107. HE ZBUS AND POWER SUPP LY cccccccssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 1 ZB1PS Chassis Powered ZBUS Device Chassis sssscssscsssessssssesssesssssssseessescsssssssscsssnsesesessssesens 18 3 ZB1 Device Caddie and PS25F Power Supply sscssssccscscssssccscesssccsscsessssessscescessscssessesssessesesesees 18 8 PARE 19 SYSTEMS UTILITIES ire ainnean daeina ae raiak 19 1 zBUSmon Bus Interface Test Utility eseseeseeseeeesseseseoeseseeeseecesoeeeeeoeseeeorseeoesoeeoeseeoeroeecesoesereorsereersoesee 19 3 RPProg Microcode Update Utility e sesessoeseeoeeseseeeoeseseoeseeoerseeoesoesereorsereorseeoesoeeoeseeoeroeeorsoesereorsereeeeeee 19 5 System 3 Manual Part 1 RZ Z Series Processors System 3 Manual 1 2 RZ Z Series Processors System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 3 RZ2 BioAmp Processor Overview The RZ2 BioAmp Processor has been designed for high channel count neurophysiological recording and signal processing The RZ2 features two RZ2 2 four RZ2 4 or eight RZ2 8 Sharc digital signal processors networked on a multiprocessor architecture that features efficient onboard communication and memory access The highly optimized multi bus architecture realizes a device with up to nearly 20 gigaflops of processing power and four dedicated data buses to eliminate data flow bottlenecks all transparent to the user This architecture yields an extremely powerful system capable of sophisticated r
108. I O DB9 Female Connector Pin Out GND Digital 1 0 CELTA 9 8 7 6 Pin Name Description 2 Do Digital Input Output Channels OO System 3 Manual 4 10 RM Mobile Processors System 3 Manual Part 5 Preamplifiers System 3 Manual 5 2 Preamplifiers System 3 Manual Preamplifiers PZ2 Preamplifier Overview The PZ2 is a high channel count preamplifier suitable for extracellular recordings The PZ2 preamplifier features a custom 18 bit hybrid A D architecture that offers the advantages of Sigma Delta converters at significantly lower power and a fast fiber optic connection capable of simultaneously transferring up to 256 channels The extended bandwidth offered by this connection supports sampling rates up to 50 kHz and improves signal fidelity spike discrimination sorting and analysis Used exclusively with Z Series base stations PZ2 preamplifiers are available in 32 64 128 or 256 channel models Note When sampling at a rate of 50 kHz only the first 128 amplifier channels will be available System Hardware All PZ2 channels are organized into groups of 16 channel banks with each bank corresponding to a rear panel headstage connector and front panel LED display Recorded signals are digitized amplified and transmitted to the RZ2 base station via a single fiber optic connection for further processing In addition configuration information is sent from the RZ2 to the
109. I6PA preamplifiers via two 25 pin connectors For either headstage Connector A carries the signals for channels 1 16 power and ground This connector must be connected whether you are acquiring data from one of these channels or not Part Numbers NN32AC 32 Channel Acute Headstage for Medusa PreAmps NN32AC Z 32 Channel Acute Headstage for Z Series PZ PreAmps vw The headstage has sensitive electronics Always ground yourself before handling Headstage Voltage Range When using a TDT preamplifier the voltage input range of the preamplifer is typically lower than the headstage and must be considered the effective range of the system Check the specifications of your amplifier for voltage range Also keep in mind that the range of the headstage varies depending on the power supply provided by the preamplifier TDT preamplifiers supply 1 5 VDC but third party preamplifiers may vary TDT recommends using preamplifiers which deliver 2 5 VDC or less Check the preamplifier voltage input and power supply specifications and headstage gain to determine the voltage range of the system The table below lists the input voltage ranges for the NN32AC and NN32AC Z for either a 1 5 VDC or 2 5 VDC power source Headstage input range when using Headstage input range when 1 5 VDC power source using 2 5 VDC power source 4 0 9V Technical Specifications Warning When using multiple headstages ensure that all ground pi
110. Maintenance Inspect speakers for visual damage or obstruction of the speaker holes prior to use If there is damage to the copper shield around the components next to the connector or debris clogging the speaker holes contact TDT for an RMA for repair Caution NEVER attempt to clean the holes in the baseplate of the speaker Doing so can puncture the speaker membrane When using the EC1 check the end of the Tygon tubing for cerumen and other debris and clean as necessary System 3 Manual 14 10 Transducers and Amplifiers Technical Specifications ES1 Technical Specifications Frequency Response 11 dB from 4 kHz to 110 kHz Weight 22 Grams Dimensions 3 8 cm outside diameter x 2 6 cm deep Typical Output 10V peak 95 dB SPL at 10 cm 5kHz signal input THD lt 3 2 kHz 110 kHz 4 Vp input Free field Frequency Response of Four Speakers at 10 cm ESI Frequency Response aera S H mt t TN ATH COS ee S T S ee 100000 1000000 System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 11 Harmonic Distortion at 4 V Peak ESI Harmonic Distortion Q u m IT pam 100000 Noise as well as harmonic distortion is measured Lower signal levels e g above 75 kHz shown above have higher THD noise because of lower signal to noise ratios When measured at higher signal levels the THD above 75 kHz is actually lt 3 up to 110 kHz EC1 Technical Specifications Frequency Response 9 dB from 4
111. Mobile Processor Back Panel Features USB In The USB input on the RM acts as a USB hub Multiple RM devices can be ganged together to increase signal processor power A standard USB A to B cable is required for setup USB Out The USB output connects either to another RM device a UB4 or to the host computer s USB interface The RM can be connected to PCs with either USB 1 1 or USB 2 0 hubs Digital I O The female DB 9 connector allows direct access to the digital inputs and outputs Pinout information is provided on the label above the connector Bits 0 3 which map to pins 5 9 4 and 8 on the male DB 9 connector are inputs and bits 4 7 which map to pins 3 7 2 and 6 on the male DB 9 connector are outputs Ground is labeled G which maps to pin 1 on the male DB 9 connector Note The digital lines drive about 25 milliamps Amplifier RM2 only A fiber optic connector is found on the RM2 for use with the Medusa RA4 RA16 preamplifier the Loggerhead RA8GA and the associated headstage assemblies Ext Pow External Power An external power supply can be used as an alternative to drawing power from the USB connection An adapter is supplied with the device allowing the device to be powered form an AC System 3 Manual 4 6 RM Mobile Processors power source A battery with an output range of 6 9 volts such as a motorcycle battery could also be used to power the device TDT recommends separate external power so
112. NameDescription 1 GND Ground 20 jAl 2 A2 21 A3 3 A4 22 A5 4 A6 23 A7 5 A8 24 A9 e Ao paatoa PAM 135791113151719 7 JA12 20 22 24 26 28 30 26 A13 21 23 25 27 29 31 8 JA14 27 A15 9 JA16 28 A17 10 A18 29 A19 11 A20 30 JA21 12 A22 31 A23 13 A24 32 A25 14 A26 33 A27 15 A28 34 A29 16 A30 35 JA31 17 NA 36 IGND Ground 18 INA Not Used 37 INA Not Used 19 INA Note No connections should be made to pins 17 18 19 and 37 System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 33 Headstage Connection Guide Overview Ground and Reference placement is important in all headstage configurations They determine the operation of the headstage and can if incorrectly wired produce undesired results Important High channel count recordings implemented either with PZ or multiple Medusa preamplifiers may be implemented using multiple headstages When using multiple headstages ground pins on all headstages should be connected together to form a single common ground This ensures that all headstage ground pins are at the same potential and eliminates additive noise from varying potentials across the subject s brain This section serves as a guide to headstage connection and will illustrate single and multiple headstage configurations A common error example is provided for the final illustration Headstage Operation Headstage operations can be categorized into three forms listed below It is important that mult
113. O can also be accessed through a BNC connector on the front panel The RM s digital I O can be used to implement triggers time trigger responses and light LEDs Analog Output The RM is equipped with an external speaker for use when previewing stimulus during the circuit design process The RM s stereo analog output can drive a headphone at up to 100 dB SPL USB Input Port An USB Input port allows multiple devices to be connected for increased processing power Mobile Processor Front Panel Features BitO The BNC connector for BitO allows for a direct input or output to the first bit of the RM device This allows for a more convenient connection for a typical trigger input Access to the other digital inputs and outputs are from a 9 pin connector on the back panel Status Lights The status lights indicate the state of the RM Power The power light indicates that the device is connected to a power supply The power may be supplied by an external power supply included or by a computer powered on via the USB interface Comm Communication The communication light blinks when the device is sending or receiving information to or from the PC This requires the system to be connected to a PC Err Error or Amp RM2 The error light indicates one of the following An error communicating with the host PC An error communicating with the RA4 RA16PA RM2 Only Status The status light blinks when a circuit is running The rat
114. OCESSOR Bit pm Digital I O eas fy Say SYSTEM 3 In 1 In 2 Out 1 Out 2 Control 9 VDC On Off RP2 1 to BBOX Power Requirements The button box is supplied with a 3 3 Volt lithium ion battery pack This high current battery should provide up to 24 hours of continuous use per charge The lithium ion battery charges in under three hours with the supplied 9 Volt battery charger The ON OFF switch the power connection for the battery charger and a power indicator light are found on the back of the button box The Power Low Bat LED lights when the button box is on and flashes if the battery is low Important To operate any features of the button box the power must be turned on and the device must be connected to an RP2 1 or RV8 that is powered on and connected to a PC Caution A low battery may give erroneous results If the battery is low the battery charger can be connected to the device This will charge the battery and power the box at the same time Organization of Buttons and LED s e LED 0 Cono SO ee te ete eeececee Buttor Numbering 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 i e Bit mask Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 When Pressed BBox Control LEDs can be controlled and button presses can be acquired by including the necessary circuit segments in the RPvdsEx circuit that will be run on the controlling device The button box can also be controlled using ActiveX and Matlab or any programming language that
115. Response DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate Voltage Out 10 0 Volts S N typical 115 dB 20 Hz 80 kHz at 5 Vrms THD typical 90 dB 1 kHz output at 5 Vrms Sample Delay 43 samples A D 2 channels 24 bit sigma delta Sample Rate Up to 195312 50 kHz Frequency Response DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate Voltage In 10 0 Volts S N typical 115 dB 20 Hz 80 kHz at 5 Vrms THD typical 90 dB 1 kHz output at 5 Vrms Sample Delay 70 samples Fiber Optic Ports Optional Input 4 channel Medusa Available on RZ6 A P1 only Digital I O 8 bits programmable ADC and Microphone Amplifier Single setting for both channels AC coupled when enabled High Pass Corner Frequency 3 6 Hz Active only if the Amplifier is enabled Gain Settings 20 to 65 dB Gain Resolution 5 dB Programmable Attenuation 2 channels Switching Time sample System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 33 Settling Time 3 usec Transient Voltage 370 mV Hardware Attenuation Settings 0 20 40 60 dB Manual Attenuation Single setting for both channels Attenuation Settings 0 to 27 dB Attenuation Resolution dB Stereo Amplification Spectral Variation lt 0 1 dB from 50 Hz to 200 kHz Signal Noise 115 dB 20 Hz to 80 kHz THD lt 0 02 at 1 Watt from 50 Hz to 100 kHz Noise Floor 10 5 uV rms Input Impedance 10 kOhm Output Impedance Ohm 0 5 Ohm ganged Stereo Headphone Output 2 channels Output Impedance Ohm Electrostatic Speaker Output 2 channels Note For further information on E
116. S series speaker specifications see page 14 8 for Magnetic Speakers see page 14 3 D A dB Rolloff Diagram This graph shows the dB rolloff for the RZ6 with varying sampling frequencies for the D A The sample delay remains constant for varying frequencies 0 2 0 3 Nyquist Ratio Hz Hz System 3 Manual 1 34 RZ Z Series Processors D A Power Output Diagram This graph shows the power output for the RZ6 with varying driving frequencies for the D As RZ6 Power Output before Significant Distortion IT rr ce AT OE SEL Lf RZ A or B output RI A B ganged output Oo nn aD Q z e A E a a a ee e 3 10 10 Frequency Hz Digital O Pinout Digital I O DB25 Connector Pinout GND Digital I O IPin Name Description 1 DO Digital I O bits 2 Ip2 0 2 4 6 3 D4 4 D6 5 GND Ground 6 D1 Digital I O bits 7 D3 1 3 5 7 8 D5 9 D7 System 3 Manual Part 2 RX Processors System 3 Manual 2 2 RX Processors System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 3 RX5 Pentusa Base Station Overview The RX5 Pentusa is a powerful multiple DSP device well suited for processing high channel count neurophysiology data in real time A streamlined hardware interface provides connections to up to 64 channels for neurophysiological data acquisition The RX5 is equipped with either two or five 100 MHz 1600 MFLOPS
117. SPs In RPvdsEx data can be transferred between each of the auxiliary DSPs as well as the master DSP using zZHop components gt MCzHopin 4 eM o g OnChan 16 j nChan 1 6 ChanSel 1 SEE XN 4 231 0 gt MCzHopPick a o ChanNo 1 zHopin B zHopOut gt Components such as MCzHopIn and MCzHopOut can be used for multi channel signals while components such as zHopIn zHopOut and MCzHopPick are used with single channel signals Up to 126 pairs can be used in a single RPvdsEx circuit System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 5 Bus Related Delays The zHop Bus introduces a single sample delay However this delay is taken care of for the user in OpenEx when Timing and Data Saving macros are used See MultiProcessor Circuit Design in the RPvdsEx Manual for these and other multiprocessor circuit design techniques RX5 Features DSP Status Displays All high performance RX multiprocessors include status lights and a VFD Vacuum Fluorescent Display screen to report the status of the individual processors Status Lights STATUS OOOO0O0O M1234 Up to five LEDs report the status of the multiprocessor s individual DSPs When the device is turned on they will glow steadily If the demands on a DSP exceed 99 of its capacity on any given cycle the corresponding LED will flash rapidly 3 times per second Front Panel VFD Screen Idle ul ul u2 u3 u4 All MODE Cyc 8 a a a ax m The front panel VFD sc
118. Sharc DSPs and serves as a base station for up to four Medusa preamplifiers to form a powerful multi channel amplifier system The multiprocessor architecture provides simultaneous 25 kHz sampling on every channel 16 bit precision fiber optic isolation and the power of user programmable real time DSPs The RX5 also features front panel status indicators 40 bits of configurable digital I O and four D A converters for versatile experiment control and stimulus generation Power and Communication The RX5 mounts in a System 3 zBus Powered Device Chassis ZB1PS and communicates with the PC using the Gigabit PI5 FI5 or Optibit POS FOS PC interfaces The ZB1PS is UL compliant see the ZB PS Operations Manual for power and safety information Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the processor through TDT run time applications or custom applications This manual includes device specific information needed during circuit design For circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circuit components see the RPvdsEx Manual RX Architecture Each RX multiprocessor device is equipped with either two or five digital signal processors DSPs The multi DSP architecture allows processing tasks to be distributed across multiple processors and enables data to be transferred to the PC quickly and efficiently The DSPs includ
119. System 3 Manual Copyright 2000 2008 Tucker Davis Technologies Inc TDT All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose without the express written permission of TDT Tucker Davis Technologies 11930 Research Circle Alachua FL 32615 USA Phone 386 462 9622 Fax 386 462 5365 Notices The information contained in this document is provided as is and is subject to being changed without notice TDT shall not be liable for errors or damages in connection with the furnishing use or performance of this document or of any information contained herein The latest versions of TDT documents are always online at www tdt com support htm A A CAUTION informs users when failure to take or avoid a specified action could result in damage to the product or loss of data A WARNING calls attention to an operating procedure or practice that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury or death Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Licenses and Trademarks ZIF Clip is a registered trademark of Tucker Davis Technologies Updated 3 11 2010 4 11 PM Warranty TDT System 3 hardware carries a five year warranty on parts and labor Contact TDT to obtain an RMA return merchandise authorization number be
120. To determine the desired value select or clear the check boxes according to the table below By default all check boxes are cleared value 0 Selecting a check box sets the corresponding bit in the bitmask to one 8 When the configuration is complete click OK to return to the Set Hardware Parameters dialog box Each of these bits controls the configuration of one of the eight addressable bits as inputs or outputs Setting the bit to one will configure that bit as an output Each of these bits controls the configuration of one of the four addressable bytes as inputs or outputs Setting the bit to one will configure that byte as an output bit 8 controls byte A and bit 9 controls byte B bits 10 11 are not used Create a bit code that determines how the front panel Bits lights are used see table below System 3 Manual 2 20 RX Processors Bit Codes for Controlling the Bit Lights Boxes 12 14 By default check boxes 12 14 in the Edit I O Setup Control dialog box previous diagram are cleared to create the bit code 000 This configures the eight front panel Bits lights to act as activity lights glow when high for the eight bit addressable digital I O lines The Bits lights can also be configured to provide information about amplifier status or act as activity lights for any of the other four bytes of digital I O Bit Flags Bit Lights Used For Logical level lights for bit addressable I O lines Amplifier
121. V rms typical 300 5000Hz 3mV input range 2 3uV rms typical 300 5000Hz 20mV input range Fiber Optic Cable 5 meters standard cable lengths up to 20 meters Note If longer cable lengths are required contact TDT System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 19 Input Connectors PZ3 amplifiers have up to 16 26 pin headstage connectors on the back of the unit The PZ3 channels are marked next to the respective connector on the amplifier Pinout Diagram Indifferent Analog Input Channels Analog Input Channels Indifferent Analog V V Input Channels Note There are 8 channels and 8 channels per DB26 connector Subsequent banks are indexed by an additional 8 channels Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 A1 Analog Input Channel 14 V Positive Voltage 2 Al Indifferent Analog 15 GND Ground Input Channel 3 A2 Analog Input Channel 16 GND 4 A2 Indifferent Analog 17 V Negative Voltage Input Channel 5 Ref Shared Reference 18 HSD Headstage Detect 6 HSD Headstage Detect 19 HSD 7 A3 20 A3 8 A4 21 A4 9 ASC Analog Input Channels 22 AS Indifferent Analog 10 A6 23 A60 Input Channels 11 A7 24 A7 12 A8 25 A8 13 GND Ground 26 NA Not Used Note No connections should be made to pin 5 while operating in True Differential mo
122. Value page 6 13 for more information 1 2 0 1 3 0 d N Float2int 4 Poke OSF 1 7394e 0 bAddr 32 NX In this circuit segment the desired floating point value in microAmps is fed to a Float2Int which converts the data type and applies the necessary scale factor for MilliAmp mode High Current Mode When the MS16_ Control is not used at all the high current mode can be set by sending a specific value to the appropriate memory address for your processor This memory address is the same address used to turn on or off the global reference The value used to set the high current mode can be added to the global reference values 0 off and 1 on RZ5 When using the RZ5 the high current mode can be set by sending a value of 54784 to memory address 50 Therefore poking 54784 to the address turns on high current mode and turns off the global reference while poking 54785 to the address turns on high current mode and turns on the global reference RX7 When using the RX7 the high current mode can be set by sending a value of 214 to memory address 9 Therefore poking 214 to address 9 turns on high current mode and turns off the global reference while poking 215 to address 9 turns on high current mode and turns on the global reference System 3 Manual 6 18 Stimulus Isolator Stimulus Isolator Technical Specifications Technical specifications for the MS4 MS16 Stimulus Isolator Stimulus Output Channels 4 MS4 or 16 MS16
123. _ Control macro can also be added to the circuit running on the RZ2 to further specify how PZ2 channel banks are powered When a headstage is connected banks may be powered on or off statically through the Power Control options within the macro or dynamically by using the PZ2_Control macro inputs See the internal macro help for more information System 3 Manual 5 6 Preamplifiers Battery Status LEDs BATTERY STATUS Battery Level Eight LEDs indicate the voltage level of the selected battery These LEDs can be found on the front of the PZ2 preamplifier by the heading Level When the battery is fully charged all eight LEDs will light green When the battery voltage is low only one green LED will be lit If the voltage is allowed to drop further the last LED will flash red TDT recommends charging the battery before this flashing low voltage indicator comes on While charging the Level LEDs will flash green Charging the Batteries Operate the preamplifier with the charging cable disconnected Connecting the PZ2 charger will simultaneously charge both batteries TDT recommends putting the three position switch in the OFF middle position while charging the PZ2 Charging Indicators When powered on the PZ2 battery status LEDs are also used for each battery to indicate which battery if any is charging These LEDs are found next to the Level LEDs by the headings A and B A green indicator denotes the battery bank is fully charge
124. a the UserOps menu Once the configuration is set up as desired save the configuration by performing the following 1 At any top level menu turn the Select knob until SavePS appears on the display 2 Press and release the Select knob Preset appears on the display 3 Turn the Select knob until the desired preset location is displayed and then press and release the Select knob Saving appears on the display and then Atten appears on the display The configuration is saved Loading Preset Configurations When a configuration has been set up via the UserOps menu and saved via the SavePS menu load the configuration by performing the following 1 Turn the Select knob until LoadPS appears on the display 2 Press and release the Select knob Preset appears on the display 3 Turn the Select knob until the desired preset location is displayed and then press and release the Select knob First Loading appears on the display and then Attn appears on the display The configuration is loaded System 3 Manual Attenuator 12 11 PAS Display Icons Menu Level Icons Display Description At C er Single Box indicates a top level menu B ase At C Double Box indicates a second level menu fk Attenuation Mode Icons Display Description i 1 a 0 a B A Normal Attenuation Mode 3 0 a B U User Attenuation Mode Mj 3 0 a B U User Attenuation Mode Base attenuation value set 3 r 0 a B R Use
125. above or below the RX6 The diagram below maps the RX6 Digital I O connection to the PP24 All digital bits are programmable as input or output BITS o 1 20 3 Os 16 204 DAC 1 DAG 2 DAG 3 DAC 4 gt O7 RX6 MULTIFUNCTION PROCESSOR STATUS AMP A de uM ut u2 u3 u4 All Mizaas D MODE Cyc 0 0 0 0 0 0 ZBUS FOR SYSTEM 3 ATi MuLiT DSP XLINK PROCESSOR U A1 A2 A3 A4 Bi B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4 SE whee 1 93 8 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 AS A6 A7 A8 B5 B6 B7 B8 C5 C6 C7 C8 24 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Bit Addressable Digital VO Channels 0 7 System 3 Manual Digital I O Byte A Channels 0 7 Digital I O Byte B Channels 8 15 Signal Handling 16 21 Mapping RX8 I O Note The PP24 can be mounted above or below the RX8 The diagram below maps the RX8 Digital I O connection to the PP24 All digital bits are programmable as input or output RX8 Mu ti I O PROCESSOR Status TOAD BITS aaa Idle uM ut u2 u3 u4 All Mi 23 S 00 O4 MODE Cyc 0 0 0 0 0 0 1005 Zeus FOR 2006 SYSTEM 3 be 7 Mu it DSP ae XLINK PROCESSOR R we ANALOG I O Ai A2 A3 A4 Bi B2 B3 B4 Ct C2 C3 C4 aa ee 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 A5 A6 A7 A8 B5 B6 B7 B8 C5 C6 C7 CB 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Bit Addressable Digital Digital I O Byte A Digital I O Byte B VO Channel
126. ace Identified The Identified LED lights when a software signal sent from the PC is recognized by the interface This takes place when launching TDT software such as zBusMon RPvdsEx or loading an OpenEx project Activity The Activity LED is lit when data is being sent to or from the TDT hardware Error The Error LED lights when there is a connection or communication error For example this LED will light if the fiber optic cables are not connected properly System 3 Manual 17 6 PC Interfaces PO5 PO5e Technical Specifications The PIS and POS zBus to PC interface cards must be installed in a standard size PCI v 2 2 or greater compliant 3 3 V slot The POSe zBus to PC interface card must be installed in a PCI Express x1 size slot Notes e Do not install in a PCI X slot the interface might fail e Do not attempt to install in low profile PCI slots While low profile and standard PCI cards maintain the same electricals protocols PC signals and software drivers as standard PCI expansion cards the low profile bracket is not compatible with standard cards e Maximum cable length 30 meters e Interface Transfer Rates vary by transfer type and device PCI vs PCIe Below is a diagram of the compatible PCI and PCle slots used with the POS and POSe Optibit Interface cards Back of Computer tower PCle x1 System 3 Manual PC Interfaces 17 7 Gigabit Interface Overview The Gigabit syst
127. adstage for Medusa PreAmps NN64AC Z 64 Channel Acute Headstage for Z Series PZ PreAmps La The headstage has sensitive electronics Always ground yourself before handling Headstage Voltage Range When using a TDT preamplifier the voltage input range of the preamplifer is typically lower than the headstage and must be considered the effective range of the system Check the specifications of your amplifier for voltage range Also keep in mind that the range of the headstage varies depending on the power supply provided by the preamplifier TDT preamplifiers supply 1 5 VDC but third party preamplifiers may vary TDT recommends using preamplifiers which deliver 2 5 VDC or less Check the preamplifier voltage input and power supply specifications and headstage gain to determine the voltage range of the system The table below lists the input voltage ranges for the NN64AC and NN64AC Z headstages for either a 1 5 VDC or 2 5 VDC power source Headstage input range when using Headstage input range when 1 5 VDC power source using 2 5 VDC power source 0 9 V System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 15 Technical Specifications Warning When using multiple headstages ensure that all ground pins are connected to a single common node See page 5 29 for more information Input inferred noise rms 3 u V bandwidth 300 3000 Hz rms 6 u V bandwidth 30 8000 Hz Headstage Gain Unity 1x Input Impedance 1
128. age is allowed to drop further the last LED will flash red TDT recommends charging the battery before this flashing low voltage indicator comes on While charging the Level LEDs will flash green Charging the Batteries Operate the amplifier with the charging cable disconnected Connecting the PZ3 charger will simultaneously charge both batteries Ensure that the three position switch is in the OFF middle position while charging the PZ3 Charging Indicators LEDs are also used for each bank to indicate which bank if any is charging These LEDs are found next to the Level LEDs by the headings A and B A green indicator denotes the battery bank is fully charged while a red indicator designates the bank is currently charging When the device is in operation charger is not connected the A and B LEDs are not lit System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 17 Operation Mode charger not connected PZ3 RZ2 Channel Data Charts The following charts show what data the user can expect to be available on the RZ2 for each channel depending on whether the amplifier is in a recording mode or in impedance checking mode Please note that this does not necessarily reflect how the hardware channels are used on the PZ3 The RZ2 interprets input from the PZ3 then makes the data available as described below To further simplify circuit design the PZ3_ ChanMap macro can be used to build separate multichannel data streams for waveform data and imped
129. ailed information about the status of the system The display includes two lines The top line reports the system mode Run or Idle and displays heading labels for the second line The second line reports the user s choice of status indicators for each DSP followed by an aggregate value The user can cycle through the various status indicators using the Mode button to the left of the display Push and release the button to change the display or push and hold the button for one second then release to automatically cycle through each of the display options The VFD screen may also report system status such as booting status Booting DSP or alert the user when the device s microcode needs to be reprogrammed Firmware Blank System 3 Manual 2 16 RX Processors Status Indicators Cye cycle usage Ovr processor cycle overages Bus percentage of internal device s bus capacity used VO percentage of data transfer capacity used Important Note The status lights will flash 3 times a second to alert the user when a device goes over the cycle usage limit even if only for a particular cycle This helps to identify periodic overages caused by components in time slices Fiber Optic Port Optional The RX6 can include a single fiber optic port most often used with the HTI3 but may also be used to acquire digitized signals from a Medusa preamplifier over a fiber optic cable This provides loss less signal acquisition between the amp
130. ain RA4AC4 4 Channel Acute Headstage for Medusa PreAmps with 4x gain ta The headstage has sensitive electronics Always ground yourself before handling Headstage Voltage Range When using a TDT preamplifier the voltage input range of the preamplifer is typically lower than the headstage and must be considered the effective range of the system Check the specifications of your amplifier for voltage range Also keep in mind that the range of the headstage varies depending on the power supply provided by the preamplifier TDT preamplifiers supply 1 5 VDC but third party preamplifiers may vary TDT recommends using preamplifiers which deliver 2 5 VDC or less Check the preamplifier voltage input and power supply specifications and headstage gain to determine the voltage range of the system The table below lists the input voltage ranges for the RA4AC and RA4AC4 headstages for either a 1 5 VDC or 2 5 VDC power source Headstage input range when using Headstage input range when 1 5 VDC power source using 2 5 VDC power source RA4AC4 RA4AC System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 21 Technical Specifications Warning When using multiple headstages ensure that all ground pins are connected to a single common node See page 5 29 for more information rms 6 u V bandwidth 30 8000 Hz RA4ACI Unity 1x RA4AC4 4x Input Impedance 10 Ohms Pinout Channel 1 marked with a dot on pro
131. al input from the HTI3 and for each device System 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 19 Device Receiver Channel Data SF SF cm or SF SF SF deg CERN SF ASCII for in rad err san faas NAL wa po pio ma faa oas io a a es 0 o en a a 118 11 NA NA Bo is 2 1 16384 2 al a a i ae 1 1435 a m ha o ma pa feas 180 91 44 3e na IN 36 NA N Note The scale factor for the FT error codes converts the values to ASCII codes These scale factors must be incorporated into any circuit design The circuit below performs the initial scale factor The circuit uses the iterate function to efficiently scale all 16 channels The circuit uses only single processor components and works on all devices The iterate function duplicates the construct 16 times with an input signal from channel x scaled by 114 35 and then sent to a hop out System 3 Manual 15 20 Subject Interfaces literate x 1 to 16 by 1 yy 1 2 01 Ch x gt ScaleAdd OSF 114 35 Pa DShft 0 1 01 The next circuit segment scales each channel based on the table above for the FOB motion tracker The first three channels in this example scale Azimuth Elevation and Roll If the input to the HTI3 includes two motion tracker channels then channels 7 8 and 9 will contain the Azimuth Elevation and Roll information for the second motion tracker To return this information in radians the scale factor should be changed to 3
132. allow for simultaneous use of the high quality A D and the amplifier input channels Analog I O Input Channel 1 Analog I O Input Channel 2 Amp Channel 1 Amp Channel 2 Amp Channel 3 Amp Channel 4 Amp Channel 5 Amp Channel 6 Amp Channel 7 RM2 Channel Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 17 Channel 18 Channel 19 Channel 20 Channel 21 Channel 22 Channel 23 Amp Channel 8 Amp Channel 9 Amp Channel 10 Amp Channel 11 Amp Channel 12 Amp Channel 13 Amp Channel 14 Amp Channel 15 Amp Channel 16 RM2 Channel Channel 24 Channel 25 Channel 26 Channel 27 Channel 28 Channel 29 Channel 30 Channel 31 Channel 32 For more information about the medusa see the RA 6 Medusa Amplifier page 5 20 System 3 Manual 4 8 RM Mobile Processors Software Control for the Mobile Processor In general the RM processors can use any circuit that has been designed for the RP2 1 There are a few caveats that relate to the number of digital inputs and outputs the positioning of the input channels from the fiber optics on the RM2 and the maximum signal voltage Digital I O The RM has only eight digital I O channels Circuits that use more than four TTL outs or four TTL ins will not work with the RM RM2 Acquisition Channel Input The channels from the preamplifier to the RM2 are mapped so that the system can acquire from both the high quality analog inputs and the preamplifier For acquisition chann
133. also act as logic level lights for any of the other two bytes of digital I O Analog Input Output The RX8 can have a maximum of 24 channels of analog I O accessed via the 25 pin connector on the front panel Each bank of up to eight channels of I O is user configurable with either PCM or sigma delta converters Sigma delta converters provide superior conversion quality and extended useful bandwidths at the cost of an inherent fixed group delay When equipped with sigma delta the RX8 DAC Delay is 23 samples and the RX8 ADC Delay is 47 samples This device can sample at rates up to 100 kHz For additional information on sampling rates for both PCM and sigma delta converters see Realizable Sampling Rates for the RX8 page 2 42 Note Because of device timing constraints at higher sampling rates only the first 23 channels of analog I O are processed when operating the RX8 at 100 kHz The analog I O of each device is custom configured at the factory Problems will arise if end users do not carefully note the configuration of their RX8 device This topic provides information about configurations and channel numbering The RX8 s analog I O channels are accessed via a 25 pin connector on the front panel If you know what channel numbers your device uses See the RX8 Technical Specifications page 2 43 for the Analog I O pinout diagram Organization of Analog I O Blocks The RX8 has three blocks of I O ports Each block can house up to eight ch
134. ance range of 20 kOhm to 300 kOhm The headstage connects to a System 3 Medusa preamplifer such as the RA16PA via a DB25 connector or to a PZ series preamplifier via a mini 26 pin connector Part Numbers RA16AC 16 Channel Acute Headstage for Medusa PreAmps with unity 1x gain RA16AC4 16 Channel Acute Headstage for Medusa PreAmps with 4x gain RA16AC Z 16 Channel Acute Headstage for Z Series PZ PreAmps with unity 1x gain ia The headstage has sensitive electronics Always ground yourself before handling Headstage Voltage Range When using a TDT preamplifier the voltage input range of the preamplifer is typically lower than the headstage and must be considered the effective range of the system Check the specifications of your amplifier for voltage range Also keep in mind that the range of the headstage varies depending on the power supply provided by the preamplifier TDT preamplifiers supply 1 5 VDC but third party preamplifiers may vary TDT recommends using preamplifiers which deliver 2 5 VDC or less Check the preamplifier voltage input and power supply specifications and headstage gain to determine the voltage range of the system The table below lists the input voltage ranges for RA16AC headstages for either a 1 5 VDC or 2 5 VDC power source Headstage input range when using Headstage input range when 1 5 VDC power source using 2 5 VDC power source RA16AC4 RA16AC System 3 M
135. ance values Recording Mode Unmapped Shared Differential Individual Differential Channel Index True Differential Channel 1 Analog Input Channel 1 Analog Input Channel 1 Channel 2 RMS of Channel 1 Reference Channel 1 Channel 15 Analog Input Channel 8 Analog Input Channel 8 Channel 16 RMS of Channel 8 Reference Channel 8 Impedance Checking Unmapped Channel Index Shared Diferential Individual Differential True Differential Channel 1 NA NA Channel 2 Impedance of Channel 1 Impedance of Channel 1 or Channel 15 NA NA Channel 16 Impedance of Channel 8 Impedance of Channel 8 or System 3 Manual 5 18 Preamplifiers PZ3 Technical Specifications Technical specifications for the PZ3 Low Impedance Amplifier A D Up to 128 channels 18 bit hybrid Maximum Voltage In 3mV_ Default input range mode 20 mV High input range mode Frequency Response3 dB 0 1 Hz 5 kHz S N typical 71 dB Default input range mode Distortion typical lt 1 A D Sample Rate Up to 48828 125 Hz Input Impedance 10 Ohms Power Requirements 2 Lithium Ion cells at 10 AmpHours each Battery Eight hours to charge both batteries Battery life between charges per battery 32 ch 11 hrs 64 ch 8 hrs 128 ch 5 hrs Charger External 6VDC 3A power supply Indicator LEDs Up to 128 status or clip warning battery life active battery bank Input inferred noise 0 9u
136. and is intended primarily for TDT use While both methods are described here keep in mind that the Poke component should be used with caution Important Circuit Design Considerations Sampling Rate When using the RZ5 or RX7 with the stimulus isolator the maximum sampling rate of the system is 24 414 kHz a limitation of the fiber optic connection between the base station and the stimulus isolator System 3 Manual Stimulus Isolator 6 9 Signal Resolution Signal resolution is dependant on the sampling rate used The stimulus isolator s PCM D A converters allow users to generate precise pulsed signals including square waves with durations of only 1 sample When using the maximum sampling rate of 24 414 kHz the sample period is 40 96 microseconds The stimulus isolator has an effective bandwidth of 10 kHz for continuous non pulsed waveforms Designing the Stimulus Signal The MicroStimulator system offers flexible stimulus delivery capable of generating complex patterns of pulses or arbitrary waveforms This allows you to make use of the full range of the waveform and pulse generators in the RPvdsEx component library including the PulseGenN macro Desired Signal Range When adding and configuring waveform components you must consider the output range of the system The default configuration of the stimulus isolator can deliver stimuli in the range of 100 uA be sure to set component amplitude parameters with this output ran
137. annels for a total of 24 channels of analog I O Blocks can only be filled by analog I O modules of the same type For example A block can be configured with all D A s or all A D s but not a mixture of D A s and A D s In addition the D A s and A D s must be of the same type either PCM or sigma delta System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 39 Blockc BlockB Block A L l Ch 1 2 Ch 3 4 Ch 5 6 Ch 7 8 Individual I O Cards Ch 9 10 Ch 11 12 Ch 13 14 Ch 15 16 o a C4 C3 C2 Cl B4 B3 B2 BI AS AS AZ AI OOOO BE ST Ss SS Note Block C can only be configured with outputs Ch 17 18 Ch 19 20 Ch 21 22 Ch 23 24 Channel Numbers Starting with block A and ending with block C channels are numbered sequentially from 1 to 24 The channel numbering is independent of whether the analog I O board is an input or output For example The analog I O of an RX8 that has four A D s in the first two slots of Block A and four D A s in the first two slots of Bank C would be accessed with the A D s as channels 1 4 and the D A s as channels 17 20 The photo below shows one possible configuration of the RX8 s I O boards This configuration uses channels 1 4 9 12 and 17 20 System 3 Manual 2 40 RX Processors Digital 1 0 The RX8 processor includes 24 bits of programmable I O in two eight bit word addressable bytes and eight bits of bit addressable I O Digita
138. anual High Impedance Headstages 8 13 Technical Specifications Warning When using multiple headstages ensure that all ground pins are connected to a single common node See page 5 29 for more information Input inferred rms 3 u V bandwidth 300 3000 Hz noise rms 6 u V bandwidth 30 8000 Hz RAI6AC Unity 1x RAI6AC4 4x RA16AC Z Unity 1x Pinout looking into connections The numbers in the diagram above show the channel connections to the amplifier The electrode connector accepts 0 5 mm diameter male pins For pinouts for the preamplifier connector see the corresponding preamplifier System 3 Manual 8 14 High Impedance Headstages NN64AC 64 Channel Acute Headstage Overview The 64 Channel Acute headstage is recommended for extracellular neurophysiology using silicon electrodes metal microelectrodes or microwire arrays with input impedances from 20 kOhm to 5 Mohm The headstage features two 40 pin connectors designed for use with NeuroNexus Acute 64 channel probes The headstage connects to a PZ series preamplifier via four mini 26 pin connectors or with System 3 Medusa preamplifers such as four RAI6PAs via four DB25 connectors In either case each connector carries the signals for 16 channels power and ground Therefore each connector can be connected independently The connector labeled Bank 1 carries channels 1 16 Bank 2 carries 17 32 etc Part Numbers NN64AC 64 Channel Acute He
139. ase Station Technical Specifications The RX7 is designed for use with the stimulus isolator The specifications for the stimulus isolator are found under that device s technical specifications The RX7 is also equipped with a fiber optic input port for use with Medusa of Adjustable Gain preamplifiers Specifications for the A D converters of the preamplifiers are found in the corresponding technical specifications DSP 100 MHz Share ADSP 21161 600 MFLOPS Peak Two or Five Memory 128 MB SDRAM Shared D A 4 channels 16 bit PCM Sample Rate Up to 97 65625 kHz 8X upsampled to 200 kHz default operation Frequency Response DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate Voltage Out 10 0 Volts Voltage Out Accuracy 10 S N typical 84 dB 20 Hz to 25 KHz 82 dB with upsampling disabled THD typical 77 dB for 1 kHz output at 5 Vrms 74 dB with upsampling disabled Output Impedance 10 Ohm Fiber Optic Ports One or Two Inputs Output for Stimulator Digital I O 40 bits programmable 8 bits bit addressable and a 32 bit word addressable as 4 bytes Note When used with the microstimulator the sampling rate is limited to 24 414 kHz by the Stimulator Fiber Optic Port System 3 Manual 2 34 RX Processors DB25 Connector Pinouts Multi I O Pin jName Description 1 AGND _ Analog Ground 2 3 4 5 GND Digital I O Ground 6 C
140. at features efficient onboard communication and memory access The optimized multi DSP architecture provides nearly five gigaflops of processing power making the RZ5 a versatile solution for real time processing and simultaneous acquisition The RZ5 acquires and processes up to 32 channels of neurophysiological signals in real time Data can be input from two Medusa preamplifiers at a sampling rate of 25 kHz The RZ5 also supports microstimulation applications The RZ5 can be used with one of TDT s stimulus isolators MS16 or MS4 and switching headstage SH16 to comprise a complete microstimulation sytem For more information see MS4 MS16 Stimulus Isolator page 6 3 The RZ5 also features eight channels of analog I O 24 bits of digital I O and an oboard monitor speaker with volume control Power and Communication The RZ5 s Optibit optical interface ensures fast and reliable data transfer from the RZS5 to the PC and is integrated into the device Connectors are provided on the back panel and are color coded for correct wiring The RZ5 s power supply is also integrated into the device and is shipped from the factory configured for the desired voltage setting 110 V or 220V If you need to change the voltage setting please contact TDT support at 386 462 9622 or email support tdt com Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the proc
141. ata Pipe Bus is optimized for handling high count multi channel data streams and efficiently transfers up to 256 channels of data between DSPs The Data Pipe Bus also interconnects to the I O Interface Bus allowing direct access to data from the PZ amplifiers In RPvdsEx data can be transferred across the Data Pipe Bus using DataPipe components PipeSource p MCPipeln N Pipe A DSP 1 Chan 1 128 nChan 16 Pipe B DSP 1 Chan 1 128 NES PipeSource and MCPipeIn components are used to select a data source another DSP or the PZ amplifier and feed data to a DSP circuit MCPipeOut OnChan 16 ChanSel 1 XN MCPipeOut feeds data off the DSP to the DataPipe Bus RZ2_Input_MC SourceData gt Z Amplifier from Pipe Bus 64 Chans 1 64 The RZ2_Input_MC macro also transfers inputs from the I O interface to the PipeBus and DSPs System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors The zHop Bus The zHop Bus is useful for transferring single or low channel count signals such as timing and control signals 1 3 0 MCzHopPick a ChanNo 1 zHopOut gt zHopin n In RPvdsEx data is transferred across the zHop Bus using paired zHop Components including zHopIn zHopOut MCzHopIn MCzHopOut and MCzHopPick Up to 126 pairs can be used in a single RPvdsEx circuit The zHopBus is less efficient than the Data Pipe Bus so it is not recommended for multi channel signals Bus Related Delays Standard delays are associated with the
142. atio of the coupler impedance to the impedance of the electrode in use For 50 kOhm electrodes the error is about 5 To calculate a correction factor for actual current delivered 1 Determine the impedance of your stimulating electrode 2 Calculate the following equation Correction 1 1 000 000 Electrode Imp 1 000 000 Electrode Imp 1 000 000 1 000 000 3 In your circuit scale the current output by this value 1 8 0 1 9 0 4 N P gt SF 1 05 OMax 100 pShft 0 oMin 100 In the example correction circuit above gt The value for correction represents the results of the calculation above gt The value for desired uAmps represents the desired amplitude of the stimulus signal gt The values for the Limit component should be set based on the actual limits of your systems The MS4 MS16 is available in 100 pA and 1 mA versions In either case when using the ACC16 you will NOT be able to deliver the MAXIMUM current The maximum current 1 correction factor x 100 Calling for higher currents will deliver currents at the defined limit gt fusing the recommended MS16_Control Macro the correct uAmps value is fed to the macro s Stim Signal input Selecting Global or Local Reference Mode The MS16_ Control macro should be included in all circuits for stimulus isolator control The Stimulation Mode setting on the Setup tab of the macro properties dialog box determines whether the stimulus isolator
143. ation System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 7 RZ2 Features LCD Screen The LCD screen shows information about each DSP the optical PC interface the PZ preamplifier and system I O A selection knob allows the user to highlight a section of the screen to display more detailed information Rotate the selection knob to select a system component Once the selection has been made push the knob and expand the information view Interface T O Amplifier Status DSP Information Selection Available Information DSPs Component usage memory usage and pipe source statistics for that processor A stacked histogram shows cycle usage for each DSP with the bottom section blue showing the cycle usage taken up by circuit operation and the top section pink showing the cycle usage required for data transfer If the cycle usage surpasses 100 a bar is drawn above the 100 line in the cycle use histogram and will persist until the RZ2 is rebooted Interface Firmware version MB data received sent and transfer errors Amp Amp model number of channels and firmware version of connected PZ series amplifier VO Virtual indicator lights A B and C Digital I O LED will light for an input bit or it will show the logic level for an output bit D and E Analog I O 16 lights will indicate the signal level green when a signal is present and red to warn that the signal is approaching the maximum voltage at which point c
144. ature controller monitors and regulates a user defined temperature for the MZ60 Stimulation can be delivered to any of the MZ60 s electrode sites while the RZ2 processor simultaneously records from non stimulus channels and may be provided by the RZ2 processor or an optional stimulus device The Microelectrode Array Interface The MZ60 is compatible with the standard 49x49mm arrays from NMI or Ayanda Biosystems and can accommodate a wide selection of readily available arrays The arrays are placed on an aluminum plate and spring loaded connections are secured over the contact pads when the top is lowered and locked using the twist lock mechanism A voltage follower headstage provides a high input impedance and low output impedance with unity gain The dynamic range of the MZ60 and PZ2 amplifier is 10 mV with a signal resolution of 1 pVolt or less It is therefore ideal for low voltage biological recordings Each of the sixty channels can be configured in one of two states Record Channels in record mode become part of the return path for in vitro signals and are connected to a PZ2 amplifier input channel Channels are designated for recording when the corresponding DIP switch is in the OFF position opposite the ON position labeled on each DIP switch Stimulate Channels in stimulate mode allow current to pass through the enabled electrodes Stimulating channels are NOT connected to the PZ2 and will NOT saturate the input to the PZ amp nor a
145. atus and Clip Warning Lights If the RX6 includes a fiber optic port for a Medusa Preamplifier an Amp light is located to the right of the fiber optic port This light is used to indicate the power status or provide a clip warning for the connected amplifier When an amplifier is not connected the Amp light will flash in a slow steady pattern The light is lit when the amplifier is connected and begins to flash quickly when the voltage on the battery for the corresponding amplifier is low When any channel on the connected amplifier produces a voltage approaching the maximum input of the amplifier the corresponding light will flash rapidly to warn that clipping may occur if the signal exceeds the maximum input voltage See the preamplifier user guide for more information on input range and clip warnings System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 17 Important Note The Li ion batteries voltage decreases rapidly once the battery low light is on Data acquisition will suffer if the battery is not charged soon after the light goes on Amplifier Status Patterns Light Pattern Amplifier Status Very slow flash 1 every two seconds Slow flash 1 per second Connected and charging Very rapid flash Clip Warning Note If the amplifier appears to be connected and the amplifier status light is flashing slowly check to ensure that the device is connected properly Bits Lights The RX6 s eight Bits lights are user configurable By default the Bi
146. ayed 10ms from the point the circuit is run or use a manual trigger method to begin acquisition Operating the Switching Headstage without Using the Macro The SH16_control macro above greatly simplifies control of the switching headstage If the macro cannot be used the SH16 can be controlled directly from RPvdsEx using the following information The SH16 is controlled using the digital I O digital control lines on the MS4 MS16 which are in turn set by writing an integer value directly to memory poke address values vary depending on the processor used Channels 1 3 of the digital I O bits 0 2 are used to send a serial pattern that controls the state of all channels to the SH16 Transmitting this data to the headstage from the MS4 MS16 is accomplished using the following 3 digital output lines Bit Number Name page 6 19 Pin Control DB25 DO2 Serial Clock Line 19 DOI Serial Data Line Do o Load Latch Signal 18 DOO Bit 0 is the load latch signal This bit is pulsed for a minimum pulse width of 100 nanoseconds to latch the data to the relays on the headstage after the data has been transmitted DO Bit 1 is the serial data line The 24 bit mask must be sent most significant bit MSB first In other words bit 23 is sent first then bit 22 bit 21 etc DO2 Bit 2 is the serial clock signal When the SH16 is being controlled through a System 3 device such as the MS4 MS16 then the maximum rate for serial data transfe
147. bdddd bapnononans m oO ZCA NN64 ZIF Clip Headstage to 64 Channel Acute Probe This adapter connects a 64 channel acute NeuroNexus probe to a 64 channel ZIF Clip headstage Note X Ref is a reference pin that is connected from the adapter to the probe only See the jumper configuration below for more information Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels Front 18 20 22 2428 32 19 23 27 31 50 52 54 566064 51 555963 263017 212529 Ge e 586249 53 5761 e eee 28 415117 3 RX 403647 433935 1614121062139 1 48 46 44 42 38 34 45 4137 33 lt pe m a e e a a os 40 pin Samtec FOLC Back High Density Socket Strip x 2 Jumper Configuration The following table describes the jumper configurations for both the ZCA NN32 and ZCA NN64 Jumper Connections Operation Shorts headstage Ground and Reference inputs together yielding single ended amplification of signals relative to ground Shorts headstage Reference input to the pin labeled X a low impedance site on the probe yielding differential amplification of signals relative to the voltage of the X Ref site Headstage Ground and Reference separated and X Ref pin is not used yielding differential amplification of signals relative to the voltage of the Reference System 3 Manual 10 8 Adapters and Connectors ZCA GM60_ ZIF Clip Headstage to 60 Channel Ch
148. be head looking into connections The numbers in the above diagram show the channel connections to the amplifier The electrode connector accepts 0 76 mm diameter male pins The RA4AC1 RA4AC4 is also provided with a 6 pin male connector with flying leads When connecting to the headstage note that the silver dots marking channel line up The colors of the lead wires correspond to the headstage channels as follows Black 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Blue Reference Green Ground System 3 Manual 8 22 High Impedance Headstages SH16 16 Channel Switchable Acute Headstage Overview The SH16 is a 16 channel acute headstage containing recording circuitry that can be bypassed for selected channels and connected to the stimulus isolator It features high voltage low leakage solid state relays to allow for remote switching Note The SH16 Switching headstage provides unity gain 1x for its recording channels The minimum switching time for the SH16 is dependant on the length of time it takes to send the 24 bit serial control bit pattern see Creating the Serial Control Bit Pattern for more information that defines which channels are switched plus an inherent 2 ms delay associated with the solid state relay switches The minimum switching time can be calculated as follows Number of bits in serial control pattern 24 Serial data transfer Rate 939 Hz Max 2 ms Serial Transfer Rate Hz Minimum SH16 Switching
149. but the two sides of the connector are different See the diagram below to determine the correct way to make the connection for each device Preamplifier Base Station To Base Amp e e IKI Analog Input Each Preamp comes with eight channels of analog input Each analog input uses 16 bit PCM parts for high quality signal conversion See the technical specifications for a Pinout Diagram for the 25 pin Analog Input connector A PP16 patch panel can be used to simplify connection to the preamplifier s analog inputs A ribbon cable can be connected from the RA8GA Analog I O connector to the RA16 connector on the back of the PP16 allowing acquisition of signals via the first eight BNC connectors on the front of the PP16 RA8GA Gain Settings Voltage Range RPvdsEx Scale Factor 10 V 1700 System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 27 Accounting for Gain Settings in RPvdsEx The output from a RA8GA generates a floating point value of between 6 mVolts i e the voltage value of the RA16PA A scale factor must be used in order for the acquired signal to display the correct voltage The scale factor for each gain setting is listed in the table above The scale factor should be added after the channel input AdcIn The following example shows a circuit segment that could be used to add the scale factor for a 1 Volt range 1 2 0 _Ch 1 ScaleAdd b SF 170 1 1 0 pShft 0 A parameter tag may be used to allow
150. by an optically connected preamplifier are still governed by the bandwidth and frequency response of the preamplifier When acquiring up to 16 channels of data on the first fiber optic input port of the RX5 the signals will be oversampled 4X to 100 kHz If data is being acquired only on the first two fiber optic ports the signals will be oversampled 2X to 50 kHz System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 7 Amp Status and Clip Warning Lights Amp lights are located to the right of each fiber optic port These lights are used to indicate the power status or provide a clip warning for the connected amplifiers When an amplifier is not connected the Amp light will flash in a slow steady pattern The light is lit when the amplifier is connected and begins to flash quickly when the voltage on the battery for the corresponding amplifier is low When any channel on the connected amplifier produces a voltage approaching the maximum input of the amplifier the corresponding light will flash rapidly to warn that clipping may occur if the signal exceeds the maximum input voltage See the corresponding preamplifier section for more information on input range and clip warnings Important Note The Li ion batteries voltage decreases rapidly once the battery low light is on Data acquisition will suffer if the battery is not charged soon after the light goes on Amplifier Status Patterns Light Pattern Amplifier Status Very slow flash 1 every two seconds
151. capacitor in parallel with a one MOhm resistor The coupler acts as a 1 6 Hz highpass filter eliminating the DC bias current It also acts as a voltage divider decreasing the voltage and thus the current delivered through the electrode Note When using the ACC16 you will NOT be able to deliver the MAXIMUM Rated current See Designing the Stimulus Signal page 6 9 for more information Stimulus Isolator Batteries Power for stimulation is supplied by one of TDT s battery packs Power requirements are determined by the amount of current needed for stimulation and the impedance of the electrode being used When using a high impedance electrode approximately 1 MOhm the HV250 Battery Pack will most likely be required With lower impedance electrodes 100 kOhms to 200 kOhms the NC48 Battery Pack may be more suitable Users should contact TDT for further information before attempting to use an external power supply See Battery Reference page 6 20 for technical specifications and for more information Hardware Set up To connect the system hardware 1 Ensure that the TDT drivers PC interface and device caddies are installed setup and configured according to the installation guide provided with your system 2 Connect the battery pack to the back panel of the Stimulus Isolator via the connector labeled Battery as shown in the diagram below MS16 MS4 STIMULUS ISOLATOR BACK PANEL BATTERY POWER CHARGER ON 6 9 V
152. cases Only channels 0 7 have indicator lights Digital Output Lights Lights are on when a TTL pulse is sent out of a digital output line All eight channels 0 7 have a TTL indicator light 25 pin Connector for Digital Inputs and Outputs A 25 pin connector gives access to all 24 channels of digital I O The pin outs for the connector are shown in the technical specifications page 3 16 TDT provides the PP16 with 24 connectors to give users easy access to all the digital output channels of the Barracuda Barracuda Device Setup The Barracuda has several additional features not found in other RP devices An expanded dialog box opens after selecting the RV8 option System 3 Manual 3 14 RP Processors Set Hardware Parameters x m Device Select Type Rvs Baracuda x OK Index fI z Cancel r Bandwidth and Timing Standard Sample Rate 200K SR 195312 5 OR Arbitrary Sample Rate fo Number Time Slices 10 i m Device Configuration Registers Modify Special Mode Sample Counter Low 16 2 Und fo Sample Counter High 16 3 Und Output Logic Mask 10 Und Input Logic Mask Bandwidth and Timing Standard Sample Rates are in powers of two from 6 kHz to 400 kHz The actual sample rate is given in the box to the right Arbitrary Sample Rate can be from 10 Hz to 500 000 Hz In the Arbitrary Sample Rate box type a number between 10 Hz and 500 000 Hz To reset to th
153. cations please see that application s documentation If you have questions about how to design your own applications for the button box call 386 462 9622 for technical assistance Controlling the LEDs This topic demonstrates several methods to control LEDs The button box may have up to four LEDs for each button and each LED can be turned on and off independently of any other Using the LEDs involves two steps 1 designating the LED to turn on or off and 2 turning the LED on and off LEDs are designated by specifying the column button number and position LED number System 3 Manual 15 8 Subject Interfaces 0 1 2 Te he o s reS See a e J eeeeeee Buttor Numbering 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BBox Organization of LEDs and Buttons Selecting an LED Control the position within a column Bits 2 3 4 Control which column is selected Turning on off LEDs Turns on selected LED Turns off selected LED Turns off all LEDs Bit Patterns Table Note Because the button box has its own power supply the LED s will remain on until they are turned off via the RP2 or RV8 or until the power is turned off The circuits shown below as well as some MATLAB examples for use with ActiveX controls are included with RPvdsEx RPvdsEX Examples ButtonBox In the first design the user designates the LED and the button number or column position in two separate steps In the second the steps are combined In the final
154. ccsccscescocssceccesceve csososnscvesesdeseopessvsosscntesaasessescaceseessssussvecssestecsenessesventsss SSS rsr tosir sisisi 10 16 PART 11 MICROWIRE ARRAY Sivscssstsitecsccccccscassttnccccnceasansaansnecsucucraneneuana 11 1 ZIF Clip Based Microwire ATVays sscssssseoceasescsaiestiesssaciedshisceiai nies iostiousoeinieadduaastarbectns eau tadeaasones 11 3 Omnetics Based Microwire ArrayS scsccssccssccsssssscssscssessssssssssesssssssssssssssssseseessssssesssnsecesseseees 11 6 Suggestions for Microwire Insertion cscssccsscssssssssscssscssscsssssssssssssessseesssesssesssessecssesssssssssseseees 11 8 PARE 12 ATTENUATOR reen a aa E a Ea 12 1 System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors iii PAS Programmable Attenuator ssssssssescevsssosssssssosesososrsessossusoesosrosssvo ss voscstosssses usorosssrsssvo sesvos s ossssss vse 12 3 PART 13 GOMMUTATORS ei sticccthetsnianeutin dcihebininidubinssteudinenitutionstdubindeiietica 13 1 ACX Motorized Commuttators ssccscssssssssssccssecssesssesssvesessssssesssssssssesssssssssssesnsssssessssesesssnessoessoees 13 3 PART 14 TRANSDUCERS AND AMPLIFIERS 0 c cssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 1 CFI FF1 Magnetic Speakers ccsscsssssscsssessscssesssesssssssssssssscsssssssscsesnsesssessssesenessnesssesssessessssseseees 14 3 ECT ES1 Electrostatic Speaker cssccsssssscssscssscssssssscsscsssesssesssssssssssnsssesesessnessssesessseessesssessesssoesees 14 8 ED1 El
155. ccurs The Button_Press parameter tag allows the user to read the value from the button box If only the first button press is important then a reset line should be included in the circuit to rest the Latch Resetting the Latch A Wordin produces an Integer value ALatch stores the value of the A Parameter tag allows user to based on the buttons pressed Button press triggered by the read the value from the button box z GEI iCompare 1 9 0 Z M 4 gt S Latch b lt K Button Press J Trg 0 J 11 6 0 1 10 0 P 4 aE a RSHipHop Int2Aoat gt iCompare bHSet 0 sat oK 0 p Test NE k When the Set line on the A Parameter watch allows user to see When a Button press occurs RSAip op goes high then the the Bit value from the Wordin iCompare generates a Logical 14 0 Latch is Triggered The Rst line i i sets the RSFipFLop low pre that sets the RSHipHlop Sto sottt p pFLop A SoftTrg Resets the RSAipFlop to zero to acquire the next button press In the previous examples all button presses are acquired that is if a person presses buttons simultaneously there is the chance that both responses will be obtained This will happen infrequently with circuits that use an iCompare and Latch but it is still possible In some cases the user will want to determine if the proper button press was acquired or wait until a particular button press has happened Additional circuitry can be added that checks for this System
156. cond then release to automatically cycle through each of the display options The VFD screen may also report system status such as booting status Reset Note When burning new microcode or if the firmware on the RZS5 is blank the VFD screen will report a cycle usage of 99 and the processor status lights will flash red Status Indicators Cye cycle usage Bus percentage of internal device s bus capacity used VO percentage of data transfer capacity used Opt Connection sync status of amplifiers A and B Important Note The status lights flash when a DSP goes over the cycle usage limit even if only for a particular cycle This helps identify periodic overages caused by components in time slices Amplifier and Onboard Analog I O The RZ5 is equipped with both amplifier input and onboard analog I O capabilities The fiber optic ports allow a direct connection to Medusa Preamplifiers Physiological signals are digitized on the preamplifier and transferred across noiseless fiber optics The RZS5_AmpIn_ MC and RZS5_AmpIn macros automatically apply the necessary scale factors and channel offsets for configuring the preamplifier fiber optic ports RZ5_Ampin RZ5_Ampin_MC Output m 8 ChanSel 1 Amp A 16 Chans 1 16 The following table provides a quick overview of the amplifier and analog I O features and how they must be accessed during circuit design When the RZ5_AmpIn_ MC and RZ5_AmplIn macros are not used referenc
157. convenient BNC connections for easy access to the digital and analog inputs and outputs of a variety of System 3 devices Originally designed for use with the RP2 Real time Processor RA16 Medusa Base Station and RV8 Barracuda the PP16 back edge is equipped with a nine pin and three 25 pin connectors which have been marked with the corresponding device label to minimize the possibility of miswiring To connect the PP16 to a device Connect the male end of the 9 or 25 pin ribbon cable to the desired module and connect the female end to the correct PP16 input according to the following table RV8 Barracuda RA16 Medusa or RX5 Pentusa RP2 RV8 9 Pin RV8 25 Pin RA16 25 Pin RP2 25 Pin Devices RV8 Optional RV8 Digital 1 O T O GND Jumper When using the PP16 and the RV8 Barracuda the jumper located on the PP16 connects the analog ground of the DB9 connector to the device ground on the RV8 DIP Switch The DIP switches located on the PP16 is used to control the input of either digital signals or the output of analog signals on the RV8 When the DIP switches are in the ON position digital input bits 8 15 are connected and will be available on the PP16 BNCs A1 A8 Do not attempt to output any analog signals from the RV8 while the DIP switches are in the ON position When the DIP switches are in the OFF position the analog ouputs are available on the PP16 BNCs Al A8 System 3 Manual Signal Handling 16 13 Mapping the Inpu
158. cross DSPs below This architecture facilitates fast DSP to off chip data handling Because each DSP has its own associated memory access is very fast and efficient However large and complex circuits should be designed to balance memory needs such as data buffers and filter coefficients across processors Memory use can be monitored on the RZ2 front panel display RZ Z Series Processors The zBus Interface The I O Interface When designing circuits also note that the maximum number of components for each RZ2 DSP is 768 The zBus Interface provides a connection to the PC Data and host PC control commands are transferred to and from the DSP Block through the zBus Interface Bus allowing for large high speed data reads and writes without interfering with other system processing The I O Interface serves as a connection to outside signal sources or output devices It is used primarily to input data from a PZ amplifier via the high speed optical port but also serves the Legacy amplifier inputs and digital and analog channels The I O Interface Bus provides a direct connection to each DSP and the Data Pipe Bus Distributing Data Across DSPs To reap the benefits of added power made possible by multi DSP modules processing tasks must be efficiently distributed across the available DSPs That means transferring data across DSPs The RZ2 architecture provides two data buses for this type of data handling The Data Pipe Bus The D
159. d 55 63 71 56 64 72 80 88 NA MN D N D N N N A N N N E N A N a 51 59 67 52 60 68 76 84 G Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels A four pin header located on the backside of the adapter is provided for access to two probe reference pins These pins are separate references and are connected internally to the adapter Connecting a jumper between the headstage reference pins Ind and either of the probe reference pins Ref or Ref2 connects the headstage reference to the desired probe reference see table below for more information System 3 Manual 10 10 Adapters and Connectors Jumper Configuration The following table describes the jumper configurations for the ZCA CK96A Jumper Connections Operation Headstage Ground and Reference separated and Ref Ref pins are Ind Ref not used yielding differential amplification of signals relative to the Ind Ref voltage of the Reference Ind An external connection for the headstage reference Ind must be used for differential amplification Shorts headstage Reference input Ind to the pin labeled Ref a low ind Refi impedance site on the probe yielding differential amplification of Ind Ref signals relative to the voltage of the Ref site Ind Ref Shorts headstage Reference input Ind to the pin labeled Ref a low impedance site on the probe yielding differential amplification of Lind Ret signals relative to the voltage of the
160. d the MS16_ Control macro can be used for single channel stimulation The Stimulation Mode on the Setup tab of the macro s properties box must be set to Single Ended and the Channel Select Method must be set to With Chan Number to enable the StimSignal input StimSignal accepts floating point input representative of the desired stimulus current waveform The macro will send the stimulus signal to the channel set using the StimChan_Num input System 3 Manual Stimulus Isolator 6 13 MS16_Conitrol ty StimChan_Num Single Ended Stim Mode RZ5 This example sends floating point values representing the amplitude of the waveform in microAmps to a user specified channel of the stimulator as long as the enable is high If using the ACC16 be sure to scale the signal by the necessary correction factor See ACC16 Correction Factor page 6 10 for more information Note To conserve the life of the stimulus isolator s onboard and external batteries remember to power down unused bank of channels on the MS16_ Control macro s Power Control tab Simultaneous Stimulation on Multiple Channels and or Local Reference Mode The MS16_ Control macro s StimSignal is disabled whenever the local reference mode is used or when a channel mask is used to set multiple stimulation channels In these cases the macro should still be used to configure or turn on channels for stimulation see Configuring Reference and Stimulation Channels page
161. d while a red indicator designates the battery is currently charging When the device is in operation charger is not connected the A and B LEDs are not lit Operation Mode charger not connected System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 7 PZ2 Technical Specifications Technical specifications for the PZ2 Z Series Preamplifier A D Up to 256 channels 18 bit hybrid Maximum Voltage In 10 mV Frequency Response 3 dB 0 35 Hz 7 5 kHz 6 dB 0 2 Hz 8 5 kHz Anti Aliasing Filter 4 order Lowpass 24 dB per octave S N typical 73 dB Distortion typical lt 1 A D Sample Rate Up to 48828 125 Hz Input Impedance 10 Ohms Power Requirements 2 Lithium Ion cells at 10 AmpHours each Battery Eight hours to charge both batteries Battery life between charges per battery 32 ch 13 hrs 64 ch 11 hrs 128 ch 8 hrs 256 ch 5 hrs Charger External 6VDC 3A power supply Indicator LEDs Up to 256 status or clip warning battery life active battery bank Input inferred noise 2uV rms typical 300 7000Hz 8uV peak typical Fiber Optic Cable 5 meters standard cable lengths up to 20 meters Note When sampling at a rate of 48 828 kHz the PZ2 preamplifier is limited to a maximum of 128 channels Note If longer cable lengths are required contact TDT System 3 Manual 5 8 Preamplifiers Input Connectors PZ2 Preamplifiers have up to 16 26 pin headstage connectors on the back of the unit Al A16 represent the
162. d two amps or 15 Volts because severe damage can be caused to the module Each RP2 can control up to four PM2R devices and each PM2R can have one active channel Therefore a maximum of four signals can be played out simultaneousely when using four PM2Rs To connect to a System 3 module attach the 25 pin blue ribbon cable from the RP2 device to the PM2R Connect your powered signal source to the Signal In and connect the signal out to the RP2 connection on the PP16 or your own connectors The channel outs on the PP16 from the left to right correspond to the 16 channels 0 15 on the device Power The PM2Relay is powered via the System 3 zBus ZB1PS No PC interface is required Features The PM2R uses a bit pattern code to control the output of a powered signal to one of sixteen output channels The powered signal can come from any power amplifier such as the SA1 Stereo Amplifier or the HB7 Headphone Buffer The PM2R is designed to use a bit code pattern from an RP2 Real Time Processor or RV8 Barracuda Processor RP Control Input The male DB25 connector on the left is the interface to the RP2 A blue ribbon connector is used to directly connect the RP2 and the PM2R The PM2R uses all the bit outputs from the RP2 If you require additional bit outs TDT recommends purchasing an RV8 In addition any System 3 processor that has at least eight digital outputs including the RX family of devices can be used to control the PM2R a sp
163. d with RPvdsEx RPvdsEX Examples ButtonBox A simple circuit for acquiring button presses A parameter tag allows the user to read the value from the button box gt 1 1 0 M 1 he Button Press 10110100 i ____ ParWatch Wordin produces an integer value eagle based on the buttons pressed A parameter watch allows the user to see the bit value from the Wordin In this example the user would continuously poll the component from a program that acquired the value from the ButtonPress parameter to determine which buttons are pressed A simple circuit like this may be required if the RP2 that controls the button box is also used for stimulus presentation System 3 Manual 15 6 Subject Interfaces A more likely circuit design for button acquisition Wordin prad winteaarval A Latch stores the value of the A Parameter tag allows user to b 2 d p i butt ar SE ey ue Button press triggered by the read the value from the button ased on the buttons presse iCompare box a 1 5 0 s 4 4 gt gt Latch p lt Button Press _ retg 0 1 2 0 iCompare K 0 Test EQ When a button press occurs iCompare generates a logical high that triggers the Latch component In this example the WordIn produces an integer value based on the buttons pressed When a button press occurs an iCompare generates a logical high that triggers the Latch component The Latch stores the value of the button press until the next button press o
164. data to be transferred to the PC quickly and efficiently The DSPs include one master and one or four auxiliary DSP s 128 MB SDRAM of system memory is shared by all DSPs When designing circuits the maximum number of components for each RX DSP is 256 Each DSP communicates with an internal bus to send and receive information from the I O controller and the shared memory The master DSP supervises overall system boot up and operation The master DSP also acts as the main data interface between the zBus host PC and the multi DSP environment System 3 Manual 2 14 RX Processors Because the zBus communicates only with the master processor these devices operate most efficiently when the circuit related processing tasks assigned to the master DSP are minimized allowing more processor power cycles for communication and overhead tasks z zBus ir DSP r ss Host PC to Interface Host PC Controller Qa Sarea 2 Memory EE An DSP eo o oS VO Aux DSP Interface Preamp lt gt Internal Bus Z Digital I O lt gt Front Panel Aux DSP Ports Connectors cae Ga gt Front Panel gt The RX6 contains a DB25 connector for interfacing with 24 bits of digital I O and four BNC connectors for interfacing with four channels of analog I O An optional fiber optic Medusa preamp port enables connections for up to 16 channels of analog input Distributing Data Across DSPs In
165. de System 3 Manual 5 20 Preamplifiers Medusa Preamplifiers Overview The Medusa Preamplifiers are low noise digital bioamplifiers and are available with either PCM or Sigma Delta ADCs The system amplifies and digitizes up to 16 channels of analog signal at a 24 414 kHz sampling rate The amplified digital signal is sent to the base station via a noiseless fiber optic connector e Digitizes either four or 16 channels at acquisition rates of approximately 6 12 or 25 kHz e Connects to the headstage via a 25 pin e Powered by a Lithium ion battery that provides 20 hours of continuous data acquisition in 16 channel mode and 30 hours of operation in 4 channel mode e Clip warning lights indicate when any signal is 3db from the preamplifier s maximum voltage input Features Analog Acquisition Channels The RA16PA and RA4PA standard Medusa Preamplifiers acquire signals using 16 bit PCM ADCs which provide quality acquisition with minimal delay The RA16SD and RA4SD use Sigma Delta ADCs which have several characteristics that improve signal quality Oversampling of the signal before conversion removes aliasing of high frequency RF signals RAI6SD testing indicates that signals greater than 150 of the Nyquist frequency are removed from the signal This allows users to acquire at lower sampling rates 6 kHz without worry of significant aliasing In addition each converter also has a two pole anti aliasing filter 12 dB per Oc
166. depending on the number of channels in the headstage Each MiniDB26 connector is labeled with a bank letter that corresponds to its intended connecting bank on the preamplifier For example the MiniDB26 connector labeled Bank A should connect to bank 1 on the PZ2 and will carry channels 1 16 Subsequently banks B C D etc correspond to the next 16 channels of the headstage Below is a table which shows the Bank labeled connectors as well as the necessary channels or banks they connect to on the PZ2 ZIF Clip headstage Bank Label on MiniDB26 Connect to PZ2 Bank ZC16 Connects Bank A Bank A 1 Channels 1 16 ZC32 Connects Banks A B Bank B 2 Channels 17 32 ZC64 Connects Banks A D Bank C 3 Channels 33 48 IZC96 Connects Banks A F Bank D 4 Channels 49 64 ZC128 Connects Banks A H Bank E 5 Channels 65 80 Bank F 6 Channels 81 96 Bank G 7 Channels 97 112 Bank H 8 Channels 113 128 The diagram below illustrates the connection of a ZC64 ZIF Clip headstage to the PZ2 Preamplifier Note that the bank channel numbering matches on both the preamplifier and headstage MiniDB26 connectors PZ2 BACK PANEL 113 128 97 112 81 96 sse 49 64 S 33 0 O 17 320C 16 ZIF Clip Headstage 64 Channels System 3 Manual 8 6 High Impedance Headstages Headstage Voltage Range When using a TDT preamplifier the voltage input range of the preamplifer is typically low
167. disabling the LED clip status lights enabling Impedance mode for electrode channels and enabling Impedance mode for indifferrent channels Under the Power Control tab are additional options that specify how the PZ3 channel banks are powered Powering Down the Channel Banks Channel banks may be powered down through the macro As long as the Power Control Mode under the Power Control tab is set to Static channel banks may only be powered up or down through the Power Control Mode options within the macro Dynamic mode will allow channel banks to be powered on or off either through both the Power Control Mode options or by inputs on the macro through RpvdsEx components Each of the letter indexed channel banks in the macro correspond to 32 channels of the PZ3 Selecting No will enable a bank of channels while selecting Yes will power down and disable that bank of channels For Example If you are using a PZ3 with 128 channels powering down Bank A Select Yes would power down the first four blocks of 8 channels of the PZ3 disabling channels 1 32 System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 13 PZ3_ChanMap Macro In the data stream on the RZ2 the odd numbered channels are the recording channels and the even numbered channels can report impedance measurements or RMS values The PZ3_ChanMap should be added to your RPvdsEX circuit along with the RZ2_Input_MC macro to remap the data stream The channel mapping macro selects the appropriate
168. dsEx Manual for more information on programming and addressing the digital I O DSP Status Displays The RZ6 includes status lights and a VFD Vacuum Fluorescent Display screen to report the status of the individual processors Status Lights PROCESSORS 1 2 3 4 LEDs report the status of the multiprocessor s individual DSPs and will be lit solid green when the corresponding DSP is installed and running The LED will be lit dim green if the cycle usage on a DSP is 0 If the demands on a DSP exceed 99 of its capacity on any given cycle the corresponding LED will flash red 1 time per second Important The status lights flash when a DSP goes over the cycle usage limit even if only for a particular cycle This helps identify periodic overages caused by components in time slices Front Panel VFD Screen Idle ul u u3 u All Cyc 8 8 0x MODE The front panel VFD screen reports detailed information about the status of the system The display includes two lines The top line reports the system mode Run Idle or Reset and displays heading labels for the second line The second line reports the user s choice of status indicators for each DSP followed by an aggregate value The user can cycle through the various status indicators using the Mode button to the bottom right of the display Push and release the button to change the display or push and hold the button for one second then release to automatically cycle throu
169. e one master and one or four auxiliary DSP s 128 MB SDRAM of system memory is shared by all DSPs When designing circuits the maximum number of components for each RX DSP is 256 Each DSP communicates with an internal bus to send and receive information from the I O controller and the shared memory The master DSP supervises overall system boot up and operation The master DSP also acts as the main data interface between the zBus host PC and the multi DSP environment System 3 Manual 2 4 RX Processors Because the zBus communicates only with the master processor these devices operate most efficiently when the circuit related processing tasks assigned to the master DSP are minimized allowing more processor power cycles for communication and overhead tasks n zBus a metce qam _ DSP ZzBus al Host PC Interface i Host PC Controller Qa Sarea s Memory gt eic DSP 2 a vO E Goa Aux DSP Interface Preamp a ni j Optical lt Optical Fibe gt VO Port Q gt Aux DSP _ Digital VO lt gt Front Panel Sa Aux DSP ie aan gt Front Panel gt comet The RX5 contains two DB25 connectors for interfacing with 40 bits of digital I O and 4 channels of analog output A BNC connector is provided for access to the first analog output channel Four fiber optic Medusa preamp ports enable connections for up to 64 channels of analog input Distributing Data Across D
170. e Set Hardware Parameters dialog box click the Device Type box and select any RX device from the list System 3 Manual 15 14 Subject Interfaces 3 The dialog expands to display the Device Configuration Register r Device Configuration Registers Register Modity 140 Setup Control Clear Click Modify to display the Edit I O Setup Control dialog box In this dialog box a series of check boxes are used to create a bitmask that is used to program all bits i 4 Decimal Value Und Cancel F Fae Mie Are fs in sa a e es oa a a en ai es Te a se th f Uy ey tb e I 15 14 13 12 11 10 To enable the check boxes delete Und from the Decimal Value box and enter 240 This configures Bits 4 through 7 as outputs TS Edit 1 0 Setup Control x Decimal Value 240 Cancel OK Cou m m m m m m m a a a a a m m ese Ver eS de i WW sl Ele Sa a When the configuration is complete click OK to return to the Set Hardware Parameters dialog box RBOX Technical Specifications Response Box for RP2 1 Buttons 4 LEDs 4 Connection 25 pin Cable Length 6 System 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 15 RBOX DB25 Pin Out GND Buttons LEDs rN 5 NI AN i A ZA gt a e D ay 6 7 8 109 49 42 gt Ap 49 ID 3A 20 B 22 23 24 25 j Pins Name Description Pins Name Description 1 GND Ground 15 BO Button Bit 0
171. e Standard Sample Rates type 0 in the Arbitrary Sample Rate box To determine the true sample rate click Check Realizable The sample rate is based on the system clock 25 MHz or a sample period of 40 nanoseconds 40 10 0 To calculate the true sample rate take the reciprocal of the required sample period in seconds Device Configuration Parameters The device configuration parameters allow RPvdsEx access to unique features on the RV8 To access a particular parameter either double click on the parameter name or click on the parameter and click the Modify button To reset the parameter value to the default mode click Clear Special Mode The Special Mode is a bit masked value that determines which features of the Barracuda are activated The default mode for the Special Mode is zero This makes the system behave like other RP devices There are seven modes that are accessed through the bit mask shown below Special Mode can be accessed with the ActiveX controls SetDevCfg and GetDevCfg System 3 Manual RP Processors 3 15 Bit Enabled Name Function number Value 0 1 DoCount Sets up system to run under trigger mode 1 2 AutoClr Clears the DAC out buffers after a trigger event 2 4 TickOut Sends a pulse at the beginning of each tick period on Digital Out 7 Pulse length is 40 nanoseconds 3 8 ClkOut Sends pulses at 1 2 the clock frequency 25 MHz 4 16 UseZTRGA Starts the Barracuda when a ZtrgA goes high On
172. e a direct connection between the electrodes and the headstage The LI CONN uses standard 1 5 mm safety connectors to ensure proper connection between electrodes and the preamplifier LI CONN Z Low Impedance Connector for the PZ3 The PZ3 is designed to record from low impedance electrodes and electrode caps with input impedances less than 20 kOhm Signals are input via multiple DB26 connectors on the PZ3 back panel A break out box or connector s is required for electrode connection The LI CONN Z for Shared Differential mode features standard 1 5 mm safety connectors and provides easy connections between electrodes and the amplifier System 3 Manual 10 16 Adapters and Connectors Splitters S BOX Amplifier Input Splitter The S BOX is a 32 channel passive signal splitter for use with the PZ3 Low Impedance Amplifier The splitter provides a simple and effective means of routing low impedance biological signals to both a TDT acquisition system and a parallel recording system Four DB26 connectors provide direct connection to a PZ3 amplifier and a single DB37 provides a parallel output connection Bank letters as well as channel number ranges are labeled on all the DB26 connectors i e Bank A Channels 1 8 Important The S BOX is NOT FDA approved and is intended for use with the PZ3 Amplifier in Shared Differential mode It DOES NOT support Individual True Differential mode The S BOX uses standard 1 5 mm safety connector
173. e accessed using the Pipe components When the DataPipe is used to feed signals from the Amplifier a MCiInt2Float or Int2Float must be used with a scale factor of le 9 The Amplifier inputs can also be accessed using the RPvdsEx MCAdcIn component starting at channel 1 however this access method is less efficient and not recommended for high channel count applications Unlike the Legacy Port this high speed port can input up to 256 channels at a maximum sampling rate of 25 kHz or 128 channels at a maximum sampling rate of 50 kHz System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 9 Legacy Fiber Optic Ports The base station can also acquire digitized signals from the Medusa preamplifier RA8GA or other legacy enabled device over a fiber optic cable using the Legacy ports Two Legacy fiber optic ports labeled A and B are provided to support simultaneous acquisition from up to two Medusa preamplifiers Each port can input up to 16 channels at a maximum sampling rate of 25 kHz The Legacy fiber optic ports can be used with any of the Medusa preamplifiers including the RAI6PA and the RA4PA or the RA8GA The channel numbers for each port begin at a fixed offset regardless of the number of channels available on the connected device Digital 1 0 The digital I O ports include 24 bits of programmable I O The digital I O is divided into three ports A B and C as described in the chart below All digital I O lines are accessed via the 25 pin connec
174. e at which the light blinks is a general indicator of cycle usage with faster blinking indicating a higher cycle usage Bits Lights Bit lights indicate when a bit input is set high The LED s will light if the input signal is set high or if the output bit is set high Voltage high is 3 3 volts and voltage low is nominal 0 Volts Access System 3 Manual RM Mobile Processors 4 5 to the digital I O port is through a 9 pin connector on the back panel The Bit In s are set logical high by default Analog I O The analog inputs and outputs use a 1 8 stereo plug and deliver or accept a 1 Volt signal with a dynamic range of over 45 dB The RM uses 24 bit Sigma delta A D and D A converters In The maximum analog input is 1 Volt with a peak sample rate of 97 656 kHz The input impedance is 10 kOhm Out The maximum analog output is 1 volt with a peak sample rate of 97 656 kHz The low level output impedance 10 Ohm of the system allows users to drive earphones at up to 100 dB SPL Because of the 0 16 Hz high pass filter on the D A converter the RM cannot play out DC or very low frequency lt 1 Hz signals Level The RM has an internal speaker that is driven by channel output The Level knob controls the volume of the speaker and analog channels 1 and 2 when connected to the 1 8 audio jack labeled OUT To achieve the full output level specified in your circuit on these two channels set the Level knob to Max
175. e clip warning lights on top of the amplifier on or off Power Requirements The Lithium ion batteries charge in four hours Keeping the battery charger connected to the amplifier does not affect the battery life However the charger will significantly increase the noise of the system if it is plugged in while an experiment is running A 6 volt battery charger is included with the amplifier The charger tip is center negative If it is necessary to replace the charger make sure that the power supply has the correct polarity The Li ion battery supplied with the system cannot be removed If battery life longer than 30 hours is required an external battery pack can be connected to the voltage inputs of the charger TDT recommends a 6 minimum to 9 Volt maximum battery such as lead acid batteries used for motorized wheel chairs Contact TDT for more information System 3 Manual 5 22 Preamplifiers Medusa Preamplifier Technical Specifications Technical Specifications for the RA4PA RAI6PA and RA16SD Medusa Preamplifiers A D RA4PA 4 channels 16 bit PCM RAI6PA 16 channels 16 bit PCM RA16SD 16 channels 16 bit sigma delta Maximum Voltage In RA4PA and RAI6PA 4 millivolts RA16SD 5 millivolts Frequency Response 3 dB 2 2 Hz 7 5 kHz Highpass Filter 2 2 Hz Anti Aliasing Filtering RA4PA and RAI6PA 7 5 kHz 3 dB corner 1st order 6 dB per octave RA16SD 7 5 kHz 3 dB corner 2nd order 12 dB per octave S N typical R
176. e mode turns off that entire bank of channels An ACC16 AC Coupler is supplied with all MS4 MS16 modules and may be connected directly to the Stim Output connector to block any DC current bias present on the Stim Ouput lines this problem primarily affects researchers using electrodes with impedances of more than 100 kOhms when set in stimulate mode Note When using the ACC16 you will NOT be able to deliver the MAXIMUM current Stim Lights A Stim Light one for each channel indicates that a Stim Output channel is in use as a stimulus output The Stim Lights are located above the Stim Output connector and are numbered 1 16 to indicate the active channel number The LEDs will flash once every three seconds to indicate any bank of channels that has been powered off Ref Lights A Ref Light one for each channel indicates that a Stim Output channel is in use as a reference The Ref Lights are located above the Stim Output connector and are numbered 1 16 to indicate the active channel number Status Lights Syne Flashes once a second when the stimulator is not connected to a base station and glows steady when it is correctly connected Stim Ref When lit indicates that the stimulator has been configured to use a global reference Battery When lit indicates when the stimulator s onboard battery is low The battery voltage decreases rapidly once the battery low light is on Fast charging Slow low battery High Voltage Whe
177. e noted in the table below Adding masked values together will set multiple channels System 3 Manual 6 16 Stimulus Isolator The table below maps channel numbers to mask values Channel Channel Mask Channel Channel Mask For example If channels 1 channel mask 1 2 channel mask 2 and 3 channel mask 4 are desired use a channel mask of 7 1 2 4 7 Stimulus Reference or Control Channel Setup To enable a given channel an integer value is written to the appropriate memory address of the base station The integer value is the sum of the channel masks see table above for mask values for all the stimulation channels that the user wishes to activate 1 23 0 1 24 0 Constl d Poke StimChans _ 8k 0 bAddr 48 1 25 0 1 26 0 Constl 4 Poke RefChans _ K 0 bAddr 49 N A x 1 27 0 1 28 0 Constl k Poke DigitalChans lt ae Addr 51 In the example circuit above the StimChans parameter tag feeds a ConstI an integer value used to assign channels as stimulus channels RefChans sets the reference channels and DigitalChans sets the digital channels This example above is configured for the RZ5 Important The memory addresses for the RZ5 and RX7 are different See the memory address table page 6 14 for more information Note When using the SH16 switching headstage the digital I O channels on the MS4 MS16 are used to control the switching headstage These are acc
178. e the ZBIPS Operations Manual for power and safety information Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the processor through TDT run time applications or custom applications This manual includes device specific information needed during circuit design For circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circuit components see the RPvdsEx Manual RA16 Features Status Lights The four lights on the left hand side are status lights that relate to the amplifier Active The active light blinks when there is no active connection between the base station and the amplifier The active light is on when there is a connection to an amplifier and the amplifier is on Error The error light blinks when there is a communication error between the base station and the amplifier Clip The clip light is a warning light and flashes when any channel on the connected amplifier produces a voltage approaching the maximum input of the amplifier The light will flash rapidly to warn that clipping may occur if the signal exceeds the maximum input voltage System 3 Manual 3 4 RP Processors Battery The battery light flashes when the battery voltage is low The Li Ion battery voltage decreases rapidly once this indicator light is on Data acquisition will suffer if the battery is not charged soon after this warning Digi
179. e the table and be sure to use the appropriate component channel offset scale factor and so forth Also see the RPvdsEx Manual for more information on circuit design Analog I O Description Components Channels Notes ADC Analog Input AdcIn 1 4 Accessed through ADC Input Inputs BNCs or Analog I O labeled DB25 DAC Analog Output DacOut 9 12 Accessed through DAC Output Outputs BNCs or Analog I O labeled DB25 Optical Medusa AdcIn 17 32 When the RZ5_AmpIn_ MC or Amp A PreAmp Input RZS5_AmpIn is NOT USED apply a scale factor of 000833 Optical Medusa AdcIn 33 48 When the RZ5_AmpIn_ MC or Amp B PreAmp Input RZS5_AmpIn is NOT USED apply a scale factor of 000833 System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 17 Onboard Analog I O The RZ5 is equipped with four channels of 16 bit PCM D A and four channels of 16 bit PCM A D All 8 channels can be accessed via front panel BNCs marked ADC and DAC or via a 25 pin analog I O connector See RZ5 Technical Specifications page 1 10 for the DB25 pinout Fiber Optic Preamplifier Ports The RZ5 acquires digitized signals from a Medusa preamplifier over a fiber optic cable This provides loss less signal acquisition between the amplifier s and the base station Two fiber optic ports are provided to support simultaneous acquisition from up to two preamplifiers Each port can input up to 16 channels at a maximum sampling rate of 25 kHz The fiber optic ports can be used with any of the Medusa
180. e used to trigger the flashlamp To trigger the lamp push the switch up and then press down Flash Driver Output LS1130 or MVS7000 The Flashdrive LS1130 output will drive the standard LS1130 flashlamp that ships with the FLSYS The MVS7000 output can be used to control other flashlamps Important note contact TDT for assistance before using any other flashlamps with the FD1 Flash Intensity To calculate the flash intensity use the following equation J 1 2 0 50 uF Vref 100 2 FLYSYS Technical Specifications Includes FD1 Flash Lamp Driver LS1130 Flashlamp and FO1 Liquid Light Guide Flash Rate 0 1 200 Hz Flash Duration 10 usec Trigger TTL 5V max Flash Intensity max 0 235 Joules Charge Time 30 msec Spectrum 350 800 nm Input Signal Vref 4 10V Life 10 flashes Power and Communication zBus required for FD1 System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 17 LS1130 and MVS7000 Connector Pinout Note connectors are wired the same System 3 Manual 14 18 Transducers and Amplifiers HB7 Headphone Buffer HB7 ee ee Inputs err Rinse Overview The HB7 headphone buffer is used to amplify signals for headphones The HB7 is a two channel device The outputs include both a stereo headphone jack and Left and Right BNC connectors The output level can be controlled with a Gain knob and there is a Differential switch that allows the LEFT input to be output to the Left and Right outputs resulti
181. e using the System 3 Device Programmer PrgG21K exe This program is copied to the host PC during TDT Drivers installation and is stored in the following directory C TDT RPvdsEx RPProg Important Notes You should not use your PC for other tasks while devices are being reprogrammed Most processors can be programmed in four minutes however the RZ processors may take up to 40 minutes five minutes per DSP For instructions on updating an RL2 contact TDT Support To update the microcode 1 Run the System 3 Device Programmer To run the System 3 Device Programmer click the Start Programs menu point to TDT Sys3 and click RPProg System 3 Manual 19 6 System 3 Utlities System 3 Manual Select the Device and System Interface Type T G21K System3 Device Programmer Eg m 1 Connection c 3 Progam Dev Type RP2 v Device Interface HANAN m 2 Erase uCode File Browse Unknown Device ID RP2_ 1 Ver 68 Erase Device Program Device Refresh a Under 1 Connection select the device type to be programmed from the Dev Type drop down list b Select your system s interface type from the Interface drop down list Connected devices of the type selected will appear in the Device ID drop down list Erase Prepare the Device Important Note High performance processors such as the RXS are erased using a different method from ot
182. e version starts with a single DSP and makes an excellent all in one psychoacoustics system or can be added to any system to add audio stimulus generation to experiments The RZ6 A P1 comes equipped with three DSPs for more processing power and includes the optional fiber optic input port allowing it to serve as a BioAmp base station for ABR and OAE studies Both configurations can be upgraded with additional DSPs up to a maximum of four for complex filtering and high frequency applications Power and Communication The RZ6 s Optibit optical interface ensures fast and reliable data transfer from the RZ6 to the PC and is integrated into the device Connectors are provided on the back panel and are color coded for correct wiring The RZ6 s power supply is also integrated into the device and is shipped from the factory configured for the desired voltage setting 110 V or 220V If you need to change the voltage setting please contact TDT support at 386 462 9622 or email support tdt com Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the processor through TDT run time applications or custom applications Several RZ6 macros are provided and are required to handle all System 3 Manual 1 24 RZ Z Series Processors programmable features related to the RZ6 This manual includes device specific information needed during circuit design For
183. e zBus Interface provides a connection to the PC Data and host PC control commands are transferred to and from the DSP Block through the zBus Interface Bus The I O Interface serves as a connection to outside signal sources or output devices It is used to input data from the optional preamplifier input and digital and analog channels The I O Interface Bus provides a direct connection to each DSP RZ Z Series Processors 1 25 Mic A Distributing Data Across DSPs To take advantage of multi DSP modules processing tasks must be efficiently distributed across the available DSPs The RZ6 architecture provides the zHop Bus for transferring data across DSPs The zHop Bus The zHop Bus allows the transfer of single or multi channel signals between each DSP in the RZ6 1 3 0 MCzHopPick ChanNo 1 f a zHopOut gt zHopin Ka 6 MCzHopout gt MCzHopin pnChan 4 nChan 4 l EUS In RPvdsEx data is transferred across the zHop Bus using paired zHop Components including zHopIn zHopOut MCzHopIn MCzHopOut and MCzHopPick Up to 126 pairs can be used in a single RPvdsEx circuit Bus Related Delays The zHop Bus introduces a single sample delay This delay is taken care of for the user in OpenEx when Timing and Data Saving macros are used Functional Signal Flow Diagrams The following diagrams illustrate how analog signals for channels A and B flow through the RZ6 and its modules For more information on ana
184. eal time processing and simultaneous acquisition on all 256 channels at sampling rates up to 25 kHz and 128 channels at sampling rates up to 50 kHz The RZ2 is typically used with a Z Series Amplifier such as the PZ2 or PZ3 High bandwidth data is streamed from the amplifier to the RZ2 over a lossless fast fiber optic connection The RZ2 also features 16 channels of analog I O 24 bits of digital I O two Legacy optical inputs for Medusa PreAmps and an onboard LCD for system status display Power and Communication The RZ2 s Optibit optical interface ensures fast and reliable data transfer from the RZ2 to the PC and is integrated into the device Connectors are provided on the back panel and are color coded for correct wiring The RZ2 s power supply is also integrated into the device and is shipped from the factory configured for the desired voltage setting 110 V or 220V If you need to change the voltage setting please contact TDT support at 386 462 9622 or email support tdt com The RZ2 is UL compliant see the RZ2 Operations Manual for power and safety information Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the processor through TDT run time applications or custom applications This manual includes device specific information needed during circuit design For circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circ
185. ecial connector may be required System 3 Manual 16 4 Signal Handling Signal In The BNC connector is the powered signal input The maximum power input is a two amp 15 Volt continuous signal or approximately 30 watts of continuous power Signal Out The female DB25 connector on the right is the interface for the powered signal output Users can also connect the PM2R output to the patch panel PP16 connector labeled for the RP2 for easy BNC access to the powered signal Channel Sixteen LEDs indicate which channel is active One channel can be active at a time It is also possible to inactivate all channels PM2R Bitcode Pattern The bitcode pattern from the RP2 consists of an 8 bit word that contains the following information the device ID the channel ID and a set bit A final bit shuts off all channels To control the PM2R generate the bitcode pattern associated with the device and channel then send out the set bit to change the channels Be aware that the relays on the PM2R have a transition time of around one millisecond Bits 0 3 identify the channel number Integer 0 or bitpattern xxxx 0000 is channel 0 and integer 15 or bitpattern xxxx 1111 is channel 15 Bits 4 and 5 identify the device number Integer value 0 or bit pattern xx00xxxx is device number 0 and integer value 48 or bit pattern xx11xxxx is device number 3 The device number is set internally for each PM2R and allows for an RP2 to contro
186. ecommend a durotomy using the tip of a sterile syringe needle as a micro scalpel to cut an X shaped incision through the dura Reflect the flaps of dura aside taking care not to disturb the pia or pial vasculature Advance the array to the pial surface using a stereotaxy and check that all electrodes are unobstructed by bone or dura We have also used the stereotaxy to quickly advance the array through the pia and then to adjust the array to its final depth This method has worked well for a number of our customers as well There have been two schools of thought on insertion speed Fast insertion e g Rousche PJ Normann RA Ann Biomed Eng 1992 20 4 413 22 using an inserter device and slow insertion e g Nicolelis et al Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A 2003 Sep 16 100 19 11041 6 A recent paper by Rennaker et al 2004 J Neurosci Methods 2005 Mar 30 142 2 169 76 explores the relative merits of each method Regardless of which insertion method you choose advance the array to its desired position leaving it attached to the stereotaxy until it is fully bonded to the skull with dental acrylic Prevent System 3 Manual Microwire Arrays 11 9 CSF from weeping from the craniotomy by gently packing around the array with gelfoam The CSF will eventually soak through and keep the acrylic around the craniotomy from curing so perform this step quickly Bone wax or Kwik Cast would probably work better than the gelfoam but we have not used
187. ectrical interference from other electrical devices 50 60 Hz and their harmonics It is best to keep the MZ60 interface cables away from any AC line power sources to avoid unnecessary noise interference We recommend that the MZ60 and the PZ2 be approximately 1 meter from computers Oscilloscopes RZ and RX devices This will reduce the noise To avoid unnecessary interference make sure there are no wires crossing the MZ60 cables Make sure there is no liquid on the MEA plate contacts Clean the contacts gently but thoroughly with isopropyl alcohol to assure a clean connection Make sure the MZ60 knob is oriented in the correct position If the MZ60 top is not tight enough open the MZ60 and ensure that the MEA plate is seated correctly in the MZ60 housing As you close the MZ60 top ensure that all of the gold pins are touching the MEA electrode dish contacts System 3 Manual 7 8 MicroElectrode Array Interface Make sure that all of the spring loaded contact pins are out and not stuck in a compressed position If a pin happens to be stuck use a pair of forceps or small pliers to gently pull the pin out MZ60 Noise Floor is Too High If 50 60 Hz hum caused by mains voltage sources is prevalent in your recordings make sure that the common ground wire is making contact with the liquid in the MEA Proper filtering is useful for removing artifacts from your recordings Be sure to configure high and low pass filter corners that corresp
188. ectrostatic Speaker Driver s cscsssssscssscssscsssssscsssssssccssesssecsecesessssssessssnessseessssseessessessoess 14 13 FLYSYS FlashLamp System sccsscsscsssssssessssssscssscsscsssssssssscssesesesssessesssenessssssesssssnessscesecssonseees 14 15 HB7 Headphone Buffer scscccsssssscssssssesssesssessssssssssesessssssssesnsesnsessssssesesensssssssesessnessssnsscssonseoes 14 18 MAS Microphone Amplifier ccccccscsssssscssssssscssscssscsscsssssscsnsessesssessssesesesesssssssessessssosssssonseoes 14 21 MS2 Monitor Speaker scssccsscssssssscssssssessssssssssessssssscsessessssssnsesnsesssessssessnesssessscssecssesssosssessceseees 14 24 SALI Stereo Amplifier assessoires ossis ia E EEE 14 25 SA8 Eight Channel Power Amplifier e sesseseesoeseeeoeseeoeseseoeseeoesoeeecsoeseeeoeseeoeroeeoeroreereorserooeseeseseeeerseeeee 14 27 PART 15 SUBJECT INTERFACES nsssssnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 15 1 BBOX Button Box cssccssccssesssecsesssessssssesssscsscsssssssessscsesssessssesenesesssseseneseneesscsseesssessesssessonsesnsesssees 15 3 RBOX Response BoX cssccssccsscsssssssssesssesessssesssscsesesesesssssssnsesnsessssssesessnessssesossseessosssesssessseseessoess 15 12 HITI3 Head Tracker Interface ssccscscssssssssscssscesscssscssssssssssssesesesessssssesessnssessssesesesenessscesesssonseees 15 16 PART 16 SIGNAL HANDLING wisiscicrisiseccitisoasiiaieastielueneii
189. ed into banks of eight recording channels each with a paired alternate indifferent channel inverting channel Bank 1 Bank 2 Chit N Ch9 a AID A D Ch1 Convertor Chg Convertor Ch2 Ch10 Ss A D be A D gt gt ae gt Convertor Chio Pa Convertor Ch8 AID Convertor AJD Convertor Individual True Differential Bank 1 and 2 Functional Diagram For Shared Differential operation each bank of channels uses a separate shared reference Bank 1 Bank 2 Chi Ch9 A D AID fe Convertor Convertor gt Es Ch2 Ch10 IN A D A D Convertor Convertor aE Pa Ta Ch8 Chi6 N N A D N A D Convertor Pi Convertor A a Reference Reference Shared Differential Bank 1 and 2 Functional Diagram The PZ3 s impedance checking and a high voltage range features can be used in both true and shared differential modes System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 11 It is also important to note that in the various modes of operation the RZ2 processor may use the alternate channels to report information such as impedance values or RMS This occurs at the software level on the RZ2 For example in Shared Differential mode the RZ2 maps RMS levels for each channel to the alternate channels See the PZ3 RZ2 Channel Data Chart on page 5 17 for more information Electrode Connectors The PZ3 is designed to record from low impedance elect
190. ed to a base station It glows steady when it is properly connected The 10V 1V and 0 1V lights indicate the current acceptable voltage range If the signal input reaches 6db from the maximum input for the selected range a clip warning light on the base station will be lit On high performance processors such as the RX5 or RX7 the LED located next to the fiber optic input port serves as the clip warning light Range Select Button All channels use a group adjustable gain control i e all channels are either 1 Volt 10 Volts or 0 1 Volt A Range Selection button adjusts the gain setting among the following voltages 0 1X gain 10 Volts 10X gain 100 milliVolts 1 0 X gain 1 volt Press the button to scroll through the available voltage ranges Max input lights located to the left of the button indicate the current selection To Base The To Base connector is used to connect the device to the base station such as RAI6BA RX5 or RX7 using a fiber optic cable pair One end of the fiber optic cable connects to the device using this connection pair and the other end connects to the input on the base station System 3 Manual 5 26 Preamplifiers Connecting the Base Station to the Preamplifiers To make the connection plug one end of the cable into one of the fiber optic connectors as shown below and connect the other end of the cable to the fiber optic port on the base station Both ends of the cable are the same
191. edance Checking with the Low Impedance Headstage The Impedance checker on the RA16LI provides a simple check of the channel impedance relative to ground To check the impedance level press the button next to the channel indicator The highest level light indicates the maximum impedance between the channel and the ground If all impedance lights are illuminated it is likely that one of the channels is not properly connected The impedance button checks the impedance between the reference and the ground Headstage Voltage Range When using a TDT preamplifier the voltage input range of the preamplifer is typically lower than the headstage and must be considered the effective range of the system Check the specifications of your amplifier for voltage range Also keep in mind that the range of the headstage varies depending on the power supply provided by the preamplifier TDT preamplifiers supply 1 5 VDC but third party preamplifiers may vary TDT recommends using preamplifiers which deliver 2 5 VDC or less Check the preamplifier voltage input and power supply specifications and headstage gain to determine the voltage range of the system The table below lists the input voltage ranges for the RA16LI headstage for either a 1 5 VDC or 2 5 VDC power source Headstage input range when using Headstage input range when 1 5 VDC power source using 2 5 VDC power source 80 mV System 3 Manual 9 6 Low Impedance Headstag
192. een when the electrode impedance is less than or equal to the target impedance or red when electrode impedance is greater than the target impedance value 16 Green Less than or equal target impedance Red Greater than target impedance Impedance Checking For True Differential Mode Impedance values of either recording or alternate indifferent channels can be tested gt To toggle between and channel impedance measurements press the Display Mode button on the PZ3 front panel The status LED located below the Display button of the PZ3 will flash green while electrode channel impedances are being tested or red while alternate indifferent channel impedances are being tested System 3 Manual 5 16 Preamplifiers Returning to Signal Acquisition Modes gt To leave Impedance mode simply hold down the Display Mode button on the PZ3 front panel after enabling impedance mode Battery Overview The PZ3 amplifier features two Lithium ion batteries to allow for longer record times A three position switch selects the active battery between Bank A Bank B or both banks off Battery Status LEDs BATTERY STATUS Battery Level Eight LEDs indicate the voltage level of the selected battery bank These LEDs can be found on the front of the PZ3 amplifier by the heading Level When the battery is fully charged all eight LEDs will be lit When the battery voltage is low only one green LED will be lit If the volt
193. eference pins to the site labeled Ref System 3 Manual 5 36 Preamplifiers A Common Error to Avoid When using multiple headstages a common error is to connect separate grounds for each headstage This allows additional noise to corrupt signals increasing the number of artifacts present To avoid this ensure that all headstage ground pins are wired as a single ground per Heap pase Stage System 3 Manual Incorrect Configuration Both headstages are connected to a unique node for ground This will introduce additional noise artifacts into the recordings Correct Configuration These headstages are correctly sharing a single node for ground All headstages will be able to reference the same ground and will eliminate unnecessary noise artifacts from the recordings Part 6 Stimulus Isolator System 3 Manual 6 2 Stimulus Isolator System 3 Manual Stimulus Isolator 6 3 MS4 MS16 Stimulus Isolator Conte Outeurs ore Oureure Overview The MS4 MS 16 Stimulus Isolator converts digital waveforms into analog current waveforms as part of a computer controlled neural microstimulator system that delivers user defined current waveforms through multichannel electrodes The MicroStimulator System A typical system consists of an RZ5 or RX7 processor base station RX7 must be housed in a zBus Device Caddie with power supply and interface module an MS4 or MS16 Stimulus Isolator ACC16 A
194. eference value Refrnce turn the Select knob to the desired value and then press and release to save changes gt To exit any menu without saving parameter changes press and release the ESC button before the settings are saved About UserAtten Mode Parameters In UserAtten Mode the user may set parameters such as step size StpSize update mode Update and minimum attenuation AbsMin The scale can be adjusted using the base attenuation BaseAtt and reference value Refrnce parameters Both base attenuation and reference can be used simultaneously producing an actual attenuation equal to Refrnce BaseAtt dial setting See Manual Operation Menus for more information BaseAtt Base Attenuation Adds a fixed attenuation value shifting the scale down and allowing attenuation to be displayed relative to this base level useful for calibrating signals played over varying transducers See Setting Base Attenuation page 12 8 for more information StpSize Step Size Sets the increments in which attenuation is applied to the signal when using the Select knob System 3 Manual 12 6 Attenuator Refrnce Reference Sets a reference value used to flip the scale of the display useful for displaying actual signal level on the front panel of the PAS May be used only when the intensity of the input signal is known See Setting a Reference Value page 12 9 for more information Update Update Determines whether attenuation chan
195. el banks and each bank will only power up when a headstage is connected This design helps to increase battery life PZ2 Software Control PZ2_Control The preamplifier s hardware operation power options and indicator LEDs can be configured using the PZ2_Control macro within the RPvdsEx control circuits running on the RZ2 base station Double clicking the macro in RPvdsEx displays the macro properties and allows users to easily configure the macro Additional information on using the macro is available in the macro properties dialog box This macro is not required for preamplifier operation but is recommended if the user requires more control over the amplifier power up or power down status or front panel LEDs See the relevant sections below for more information about these features PZ2 Features Clip Warnings and Activity Display 256 front panel LEDs can be used to indicate spike activity and or clip warning depending on display mode and configuration See Display Button and Status LED below for more information Recording Channel LEDs When enabled LEDs for each channel may be lit green to indicate activity or red to indicate a clip warning 1 16 1 16 Green Activity Red Clip Warning System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 5 Clip Warning When the input to a channel is greater than 3dB from the preamplifier s maximum voltage input the LED for the corresponding channel is lit red indicating clipping may occur Acti
196. el can be used to acquire neural signals The stimulus isolator utilizes an onboard rechargeable Li Ion battery for logic control and D A converter operation Special circuitry on the stimulus isolator draws on external high voltage battery packs to convert low voltage waveforms from the D A converters to analog current waveforms as shown in the diagram below Digital Waveforms Analog Low Analog and Control Voltage Current Logic D A Waveforms Circuit to convert low voltage Waveforms Converters waveforms to constant current output Onboard Battery for High Voltage Battery for Logic Control Stimulation Current Stimulus Isolator Diagram The ACC16 AC Coupler The stimulus isolator may generate a DC bias current of up to 0 2 of full scale up to 0 2 uA on 100 uA device on any stimulation channel even during a quiescent state While this may not have significant short term effects over time it may cause unintended tissue damage This problem primarily affects researchers using electrodes with impedances of more than 100 kOhms Users may connect the ACC16 AC coupler supplied with all MS4 MS16s directly to the Stim Output connector on the stimulus isolator to block any bias present on the Stim Output lines Note Single ended operation G and Ref jumper pins tied together is the only mode supported on the ACC16 System 3 Manual Stimulus Isolator 6 5 Each channel of the ACC16 coupler includes an RC circuit with a one uF
197. el on the display changes as the Select knob is turned but the attenuation is not applied to the signal until the Select knob is pressed and released In this mode the intensity of the display dims to indicate that the attenuation has not been applied to the signal Sets the minimum attenuation level for the UserAtt mode This is used to avoid signals that are too loud for the subject or equipment The default value is 0 0 dB and its range is 0 0 to 100 0 dB Note that setting this parameter limits the range of possible attenuation levels For example when it is set to 30 0 dB the range of attenuation is 30 db to 120 dB Load PS Loads one of four preset UserAtt configurations from non volatile memory See Save PS Below The default is 1 and its range is 1 to 4 Save PS Saves the current UserAtt configuration in one of four non volatile memory buffers This permits the user to save commonly used UserAtt configurations The default is 1 and its range is 1 to 4 To save a configuration first ensure that all UserAtt parameters are set as desired then turn the Select knob until the desired memory location is displayed and press the Select knob Saving appears on the display The preset is ready of use Reset _ Resets all menu items including presets to their default conditions Confirm The user must confirm the reset by pressing and releasing the Select knob While the module is resetting Reseting appears on the display The user mu
198. elect or clear the check boxes according to the table below By default all check boxes are cleared value 0 Selecting a check box sets the corresponding bit in the bitmask to one 8 When the configuration is complete click OK to return to the Set Hardware Parameters dialog box Each of these bits controls the configuration of one of the eight addressable bits as inputs or outputs Setting the bit to one will configure that bit as an output Each of these bits controls the configuration of one of the four addressable bytes as inputs or outputs Setting the bit to one will configure that byte as an output bit 8 byte A bit 9 byte B bit 10 byte C and bit 11 byte D 12 14 Create a bit code that determines how the front panel Bits lights are used see table below Setting the bit to one will disable the D A upsampler System 3 Manual 2 10 RX Processors Bit Codes for Controlling the Bit Lights Boxes 12 14 By default check boxes 12 14 in the Edit I O Setup Control dialog box previous diagram are cleared to create the bit code 000 This configures the eight front panel Bits lights to act as activity lights lit when high for the eight bit addressable digital I O lines The Bits lights can also be configured to provide information about amplifier status or act as activity lights for any of the other four bytes of digital I O Bit Flags Bit Lights Used For Logical level lights for bit addressable I O
199. els across the fiber optic connection channel numbers are offset by 16 Channel one from the preamp maps to channel 16 of the RM2 channel two maps to 17 and so forth Users must modify existing circuit designs and OpenEx files by setting an offset value to match the channel organization of the RM2 There is no fiber optic repeater to allow multiple RM2s to be linked for data acquisition from a single preamplifier All acquisition from the preamplifier must take place on a single RM2 Signal Voltage The maximum signal voltage for acquisition and presentation is 1 volt Circuits that have components generating signals greater than 1 volt will cause the device to clip either on input or output Mobile Processor Technical Specifications Technical specifications for the RM1 and RM2 processors DSP 50 MHz Share 21065 150 MFLOPS Memory 32 MB A D 2 channels 24 bit sigma delta A D S N typical 85 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Distortion typical 80 dB for 1 kHz input at 630 mV rms Sample Delay 16 samples D A 2 channels 24 bit sigma delta D A S N typical 85 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Distortion typical 80 dB for 1 kHz input at 630 mV rms Sample Delay 17 samples Highpass Filter 0 16 Hz System 3 Manual RM Mobile Processors 4 9 Digital I O 8 user selectable System Reset Front panel next to ERR light Input Impedance 10 kOhm Output Impedance 10 Ohm RM2 Fiber Optic Inputs up to 16 channels Sampling Rate 24 414 kHz max Digital
200. em is designed for users that require high speed real time control of System 3 devices or precise system wide device synchronization The gigabit interface consists of a PCI card PI5 that fits in the computer and one or more GBit to zBUS interface modules FI5 that mounts in the rear slot of a zBUS device chassis Devices are connected in a simple loop using provided cabling When using the gigabit interface all devices across all chassis are automatically phase locked to a single clock Over 100 devices can be connected in a single Gigabit loop with automatic device identification and system initialization Part Numbers PI5 PCI Card for Hardware Software Control FI5 PI5 to zBus Interface PI5 Technical Specifications The PIS and POS zBus to PC interface cards must be installed in a standard size PCI v 2 2 or greater compliant 3 3 V slot Notes e Do not install in a PCI X slot the interface might fail e Do not attempt to install in low profile PCI slots While low profile and standard PCI cards maintain the same electricals protocols PC signals and software drivers as standard PCI expansion cards the low profile bracket is not compatible with standard cards e Maximum cable length 30 meters e Interface Transfer Rates vary by transfer type and device Gigabit Anomalies and Tech Notes The PIS must be installed in a computer that has a 3 3 V compliant PCI slot v2 2 or greater The PIS is not compatible with
201. en UserAtt is in use the letter U appears on the left side of the display while the attenuation level appears on the right side of the display UserOps Access UserOps submenu UserOps Sub menu BaseAtt Sets a fixed level of attenuation as a reference The default setting is 0 0 dB and the range is 0 to 100 0 dB When BaseAtt is set a symbol appears on the left side of the display When used the attenuation level displayed is relative to BaseAtt For example with BaseAtt set to 60 0 dB the attenuation level will be display from 60 0 dB to 60 0 dB StpSize Sets the increments of attenuation The default setting is 3 0 dB and the range is 0 1 to 60 0dB Refrnce Changes the display so it shows the output signal intensity rather than the attenuation level This function may be used only when the input signal strength is known When Refrnce is set the letter R appears on the left side of the display The default setting is 0 0 and the range is 300 0 For example when Refrnce is set to 136 and the attenuation level set to 0 0 dB the display shows 136 0 When the attenuation level is adjusted to 30 0 the display shows 106 Determines when attenuation is applied to the signal When set to Dynamic attenuation is applied as the Select knob is turned When set to Manual attenuation is applied after the Select knob is pressed and released The default setting is Dynamic Note that when Update is set to Manual the attenuation lev
202. equest the matching male Omentics connector OMCON_ML_ HB from TDT for use in building electrode arrays Part Numbers LP16CH 16 Channel Chronic Low Profile Headstage for Medusa PreAmps LP16CH Z 16 Channel Chronic Low Profile Headstage for Z Series PZ PreAmps RA16CH 16 Channel Chronic Headstage for Medusa PreAmps RA16CH Z 16 Channel Chronic Headstage for Z Series PZ PreAmps La The headstage has sensitive electronics Always ground yourself before handling Headstage Voltage Range When using a TDT preamplifier the voltage input range of the preamplifer is typically lower than the headstage and must be considered the effective range of the system Check the specifications of your amplifier for voltage range Also keep in mind that the range of the headstage varies depending on the power supply provided by the preamplifier TDT preamplifiers supply 1 5 VDC but third party preamplifiers may vary TDT recommends using preamplifiers System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 19 which deliver 2 5 VDC or less Check the preamplifier voltage input and power supply specifications and headstage gain to determine the voltage range of the system The table below lists the input voltage ranges for the 16 channel chronic headstages for either a 1 5 VDC or 2 5 VDC power source Headstage input range when using Headstage input range when 1 5 VDC power source using 2 5 VDC power source LP16CH
203. er than the headstage and must be considered the effective range of the system Check the specifications of your amplifier for voltage range Also keep in mind that the range of the headstage varies depending on the power supply provided by the preamplifier TDT preamplifiers supply 1 5 VDC but third party preamplifiers may vary TDT recommends using preamplifiers which deliver 2 5 VDC or less Check the preamplifier voltage input and power supply specifications and headstage gain to determine the voltage range of the system The table below lists the input voltage ranges for the ZIF Clip headstage for either 1 5 VDC or 2 5 VDC power sources Headstage input range when Headstage input range when using 1 5 VDC power source using 2 5 VDC power source ZIF Clip headstage 1 48 V 2 49 V Technical Specifications Important When using multiple headstages ensure that a single ground is used for all headstages This will avoid unnecessary noise contamination in recordings See the headstage connection guide on page 5 33 for more information ZIF Clip headstage Input inferred rms 3 u V bandwidth 300 3000 Hz noise rms 6 u V bandwidth 30 8000 Hz Headstage Gain Unity 1x Input Impedance 10 Ohms Dimensions Headstage Length Width Height Approx ZC16 ZC32 14 80 mm 10 60 mm 7 50 mm ZC64 17 mm 15 mm 7 50 mm ZC96 17 75 mm 18 60 mm 7 75 mm ZC128 18 70 mm 25 mm 7 75 mm Form factor for both
204. erial clock Bit 2 on the SH16 can be run at a maximum rate of 5 MHz for other devices Technical Specifications Headstage Gain Unity 1x Input Impedance 10 Ohms System 3 Manual 8 28 High Impedance Headstages SH16 Pinout Diagrams PreAmp Connector For SH16 headstages with serial numbers lt 2000 the DB25 connector labeled Preamp must be connected as it supplies power to the headstage For headstages with serial numbers gt 2000 this connector does not need to be connected if the user is not recording on the non stimulating channels DB25 Pinout Connections for use with Medusa Preamps Analog Input Ref X GSO Oo OOOO 2 amp 13 19 17 0 Bh 22 29 2 08 v enp V Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 Al 14 V Positive Voltage p pa farsos Ipu Chamel i3 OND foun 3 A3 16 GND Ground 4 A4 17 JV Negative Voltage 5 IREF Reference Pin 18 NA Not Used 6 NA Not Used 19 NA Not Used 7 A5 20 A6 Ae Analog Input Channel ro nalog Input Channel 9 A9 Number Ch 5 7 9 11 13 22 A10 Number Ch 6 8 10 12 10 All land 15 23 A12 14 and 16 11 A13 24 JA14 12 JA15 25 JA16 13 NA Not Used System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 29 Mini DB26 Pinout Connections for use with PZ preamps Analog Input GND
205. es Headstage Technical Specifications Warning When using multiple headstages ensure that all ground pins are connected to a single common node See page 5 29 for more information Input inferred noise rms 0 1 u V bandwidth 300 3000 Hz 0 3 u V bandwidth 2 8000 Hz Headstage Gain 20x Highpass Filter 2 2 Hz Lowpass Filter 7 5 kHz Input Impedance 10 Ohm The electrode connector is a 25 pin connector Information on the pin inputs is provided below GNO Analog Input Ref Analog Input 43 42 41 40 9 8 7 6 5 4 73 2 11 28 24 23 22 21 20 49 48 47 46 48 44 Ud GND Note Pins 6 14 17 18 and 19 are not connected Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 Al 14 NA Not Used 2 a2 Analog Input 15 GND Ground Channels 3 JA3 16 GND 4 A4 17 NA Not Used 5 Ref Reference 18 NA 6 NA Not Used 19 NA 7 JA5 20 JA6 8 amp 8 JA7 21 JA8 9 A9 Analog Input 22 Al0 Analog Input 10 JAll Channels 23 JA12 Channels 11 JA13 24 JA14 12 JA15 25 JA16 13 IGND Ground System 3 Manual Low Impedance Headstages 9 7 RA16LI D 16 Channel Headstage with Differential The RAI6LI D headstage is designed for fully differential recordings from low impedance electrodes and electrode caps with input impedances between lt 1 kOhm and 20 kOhm It connects to the Medusa preamplifier s 25 pin connector The s
206. es D A 2 channels 24 bit sigma delta Frequency Response DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate S N typical 105 dB 20 Hz to 20 KHz 95 dB 20 Hz to 50 KHz Distortion typical 95 dB for 1 KHz output at 5 Vrms D A Sample Rate RP2 1 195 312 kHz maximum RP2 97 656 kHz maximum RP2 5 48 828 kHz maximum Sample Delay RP2 1 30 samples RP2 30 samples Digital Inputs 8 bits 1 TRIG input Digital Outputs 8 bits System Reset Force input see following section on how to reset Input Impedance 10 kOhm Output Impedance 10 Ohm System 3 Manual 3 10 RP Processors DB25 Connector Pin Out GND Digital I O GND Dout Din Force VCC See note below 3 3V 1mA Max Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 IGND Ground 13 GND_ Ground 2 NA Not Used 14 VCC 1 3 3V 1A Max 3 IDII Digital Input Bits 15 DIO Digital Input Bits 4 DI 16 DI2 5 DIS 17 DI4 6 DI7 18 DI6 7 DO1 Pigital Output Bits 19 DOO Digital Output Bits 8 DO3 20 DO2 9 DOS 21 DO4 10 DO7 22 DO6 11 NA Not Used 23 NA Not Used 12 Force Used to reset the RP2 1 24 25 Note TDT reccomends the PP16 Patch Panel for accessing digital I O Important Force is used to reset the RP2 1 including deleting the device s microcode It has no function in data acquisition or manipulation To reset the device l 2 System 3 Manual
207. ess 5 25 TB32 32 Channel Digitizer sssccscsssssssscsscssscsssssesesssssssssesssesssessssesssesssessesessessnssssscssonsesnsessseesens 5 29 Headstage Connection Guide csccssssssscsscesscsssssssssssssscsesssessssssssesensssseesecsssessessssssesssnsesnsessesesens 5 33 PART6 STIMULUS ISOLATOR Ww iniicinsiscnscsis iin ciuisaansaetaceesieisatiusaiacodsdedsannsinenn 6 1 MS4 MS16 Stimulus solator ccsccssscssssssessesssscssssssesessssscssessesssessssesenesssessssesesenessneessesseessessessoese 6 3 System 3 Manual PART 7 MICROELECTRODE ARRAY INTERFACE eeceeeeseeeees 7 1 MZ60 MicroElectrode Array Interface sccsscssscssssssssssscssesssccssesssesssssessssesssessnessseessessessssessessoese 7 3 HC10 Temperature Controller csscssscsssssssssssssssssssssscssesssesssessesssesssssesssesssessesscssscssenssssssssoesens 7 10 PART 8 HIGH IMPEDANCE HEADSTAGEG ceccecceesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 AEC lip PEAS CAE EEE E E ca nan EE lea aon A E 8 3 RAI6AC 16 Channel Acute Headstage scsscsssssscssccsscssssssessssnsessessscsescsssscssscsesnsesssoesssnsesssees 8 12 NN64AC 64 Channel Acute Headstage cscsscsssssssssscssessscssssssessesssessessssscssssssscsssnsesssensssnsesssees 8 14 NN32AC 32 Channel Acute Headstage sscsscsssssssssscsssessscssesssssssssesscsssssssssssssensssnsessseesesnsesesees 8 16 RA16CH LP16CH 16 Channel Chronic Heads
208. essed via a DB25 connector labeled Control For SH16 switching headstages serial number 2000 and greater channels 1 3 are used for communication and channels 4 8 are used to provide power to the SH16 When the SH16 is not being used the MS4 MS 16 digital I O can be used for any type of digital control See SH16 16 Channel Switchable Acute Headstage page 8 22 for more information about controlling the headstage System 3 Manual Stimulus Isolator 6 17 Working with the MS16 MilliAmp Mode The MS16 can be modified at the factory to deliver stimuli in the 1 mA range If your device has this modification please note the following important differences in operation The HV250 battery pack CANNOT be used with milliAmp mode This mode should only be used with the NC48 battery pack Circuit Design for the MS16 in MilliAmp Mode MS16_Control Macro When using the MS16_Control macro set High Current Range on the Setup tab of the macro s properties box to Yes If High Current Range is set to Yes all other circuit design considerations are handled automatically by the macro Scale Factor When using the Poke component for stimulus delivery use the appropriate scale factor for your processor to convert the signal in desired or corrected microAmps to the necessary voltage for A Ds RZ5 When using RZ5 use a scale factor of 1 7394e 006 RX7 When using RX7 use a scale factor of 26 541 See Converting the Signal to an Integer
209. essor through TDT run time applications or custom applications This manual includes device specific information needed during circuit design For circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circuit components see MultiProcessor Circuit Design and Multi Channel Circuit Design in the RPvdsEx Manual System 3 Manual 1 14 RZ Z Series Processors RZ5 Architecture The RZ5 processor utilizes a multi bus architecture and offers three dedicated data buses for fast efficient data handling While the operation of the system architecture is largely transparent to the user a general understanding is important when developing circuits in RPvdsEx DSP Block zBus Interface Block en KE zBus s Processor f ORS G gt Controter z Host PC Gam recat j VO Interface Block Paap Puan Digtal VO Front Panet Ports Connectors y mr a un As shown in the diagram above the RZ5 architecture consists of three functional blocks The DSPs Each DSP in the DSP Block is connected to 64 MB SDRAM and a local interface to the three data buses two buses that connect each DSP to the other functional blocks and one that handles data transfer between the DSPs as described further in Distributing Data Across DSPs below This architecture facilitates fast DSP to off chip data handling Because each DSP has its own associated memory access is very fast and efficient However large and complex
210. essors or programmable attenuators Most nonprogrammable devices such as speaker drivers or signal mixers do not require an interface You will need a USB2 0 port available on the host PC for each UZ2 in a multi chassis system We recommend upgrading to an Optibit interface if a system requires more than three chassis Note The USB 2 0 interface requires Windows XP with either Service Pack 1 or 2 or Windows 2000 with Service Pack 5 Connecting the UZ2 The UZ2 connects to your computer with standard USB 2 0 A to B cables provided with each module Interface drivers are bundled with the TDT Drivers and will be installed when the device is connected to the host computer for the first time The UZ2 can be safely connected or unconnected while the computer is running Important Note Wait ten seconds after devices have gone through the boot sequence or 30 seconds after turning on devices with the computer already running before running applications that use TDT devices We also recommend using zBUSmon to verify the logical order of devices before beginning any experiment See Boot Up Sequence below for more information Sync The Sync allows users to synchronize several modules that are mounted in different device caddies Each USB module has its own clock Clocks on multiple USB devices will drift relative to each other The Sync line uses the clock from one USB module the master to synchronize the clocks across all zBUS device caddies
211. ficantly increase the noise of the system if it is plugged in while an experiment is running A 6 Volt battery charger is included with the digitizer The charger tip is center negative The Li ion battery supplied with the system cannot be removed If battery life longer than 20 hours is required contact TDT for more information TB32 Digitizer Technical Specifications A D 31 channels 16 bit sigma delta Maximum Voltage In 2 Volts Frequency Response 3 dB 8 Hz 4 5 kHz Highpass Filter 8 Hz Anti Aliasing Filtering 4 5 kHz 3 dB corner 2nd order 12 dB per octave S N typical 74 dB Input Inferred Noise Re 2V rms 400 microvolts bandwidth 300 3000 Hz 1 millivolt bandwidth 30 5000 Hz Group Sample Delay 20 Samples A D Sample Rate 6 12 or 25 kHz Input Impedance 10 Ohms Power Requirements 500 mAmps while charging 50 mAmps once charged Battery Li Ion Polymer Battery 5000 mAh 20 30 hours between charges Charger 6 9 Volts DC greater than 500 mAmps center negative Fiber Optic Cable 5 meters standard maximum cable length 20 meters Note Given the standard gain on the TB32 these values are luV and 2 5uV respectively System 3 Manual 5 32 Preamplifiers Pin Diagrams 31 channel pin out Analog Input GND 37 36 SSMA SRS 2S VES OR o o ah 72 C2 S242 S222 V2 0 GND IPinINameDescription Pin
212. fication Default Options n Rows Xn Electrodes 2X8 Max channels 32 Metal Tungsten Wire Diameter 50 um 33 um Insulation Polyimide Electrode Spacing 250 um 175 um 350 um 500 um Row Separation 500 um 1000 um 1500 um 2000 um Tip Angle Blunt Cut 0 degrees 30 45 60 degrees Tip Length 2mm 0 5 4mm Attached G R Wires None Ground Reference See the Online Order Form PDF format for more information on ordering specifications Pinout Omnetics dual row 18 pin nano connector s 0 025 mil pitch lt 2x7x4mm o6o7 OO QOODQO O OOG OOOOOCOOD rs M Q n Looking into connector Lmoy ZmMOo System 3 Manual 11 8 Microwire Arrays Suggestions for Microwire Insertion I General Procedures The following are general suggestions for insertion of TDT microwire arrays and may not comply with your animal care and use guidelines Investigators should consult officials at their respective institutions to determine the regulations governing animal care and use in their laboratory We use aseptic techniques and avertin anesthesia for mouse ketamine xylazine anesthesia for rat We use the general procedures for rodent survival surgery described in Principles of Aseptic Rodent Survival Surgery General Training in Rodent Survival Surgery Part I In Laboratory Animal Medicine and Management Reuter J D and Suckow M A Eds International Veterinary Information Service Ithaca NY www ivis org 2004 B2514 0604
213. figurations for 16 32 and 64 channel ZIF Clip based microwire arrays Site numbers reflect the preamplifier channels when connected with a ZIF Clip headstage 16 and 32 channel ZIF Clip microwire arrays Looking into the array Row Number a oe m N These diagrams indicate the site map or channel output to a TDT amplifier from the ZIF Clip based microwire array Note 16 channel ZIF Clip based microwire arrays contain only the first 2 rows Notch Guide Pi 56666666 0000000 0000000 O00000 System 3 Manual Microwire Arrays 11 5 64 channel ZIF Clip microwire array Looking into the array Row Number 3 4 5 6 N Z f gt AA Aa 00000000 7X Notch Guide N XS XS N ZCAP Aluminum ZIF Clip Cap a QOOOOOO OOOOVO O OOOOO 0000000 0000000 0000000 Part Number ZCAP The Aluminum ZIF Clip Cap is designed to protect the ZIF Clip micro connector from potential damage in the absence of the ZIF Clip headstage The caps are made of high quality aluminum and feature a rubber O ring for easy handling and grip The ZCAP fits directly over all ZIF Clip compatible connectors protecting your ZIF Clip probe adapters and microwire arrays Using the ZCAP Grip the ZCAP with two fingers and gently slide it onto the ZIF Clip micro connector To remove grasp both sides of the O ring grip and gently pull away from the ZIF Clip micro connector u
214. first be set to Attn or UserAtt mode to manually adjust attenuation To access a menu e Turn the knob until the name of the desired menu appears on the display then press and release the knob The module has two levels of menus Top level menu items are indicated by a single filled box in the upper left corner of the menu display and sub menus are indicated with an additional indicator box for each level Only the UserOps menu item has sub menu items See Display Icons page 12 11 for more information For a definition of each menu item e Turn the Select knob until the name of the menu appears on the display then press and hold down the Select knob A description of the menu function will scroll across the display To exit a menu without changing settings e Press and release the ESC button Operation in Atten Mode In Atten mode the user sets the desired level of attenuation with the Select knob When the unit is powered on it defaults to the Atten mode with 0 0 dB of attenuation To use Atten mode 1 Turn the Select knob until Atten appears on the display then press and release the Select knob A small letter A appears in the upper left corner of the display indicating the unit is in Atten mode and a decibel reading appears on the right side of the display See Display Icons for more information System 3 Manual Attenuator 12 5 2 Turn the Select knob to adjust attenuation in 0 1 dB increments Operat
215. flexible and powerful signal processing modules for TDT s System 3 The RP2 system consists of an Analog Devices Sharc floating point DSP with surrounding analog and digital interface circuits to yield a powerful programmable signal processing device capable of handling a variety of tasks Power and Communication The PR2 1 mounts in a System 3 zBus Powered Device Chassis ZB1PS and communicates with the PC using any of the zBus PC interfaces The ZB1PS is UL compliant see the ZBZ PS Operations Manual for power and safety information Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the processor through TDT run time applications or custom applications This manual includes device specific information needed during circuit design For circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circuit components see the RPvdsEx Manual Features Memory The RP2 comes with 16MB of memory for data storage and retrieval The RP2 1 has 32MB of memory for data storage and retrieval Digital Input Output Bits The digital I O circuits include eight bits of digital input and eight bits of digital output that are accessed on the 25 pin connector on the front of the RP2 The eight bits of I O can be used within the processing chain in a variety of ways including implementing triggers timing trigger responses and lighting LEDs The first fou
216. fore returning any hardware Repairs are usually completed within one week of receipt Package the hardware carefully and label the outside of the box with the RMA number Ship to TDT 11930 Research Circle Alachua FL 32615 Custom hardware carries a one year warranty on parts and labor ES1 and EC1 carry a two year warranty Table of Contents PART 1 RZ Z SERIES PROCESSORS asvccisscicescciscsesdecnccesisiessantneswendedsevendie 1 1 RZ2 BiOAMP Processor ccscccscccscerscsssessecssessscssesesscssscssscsssssssssssssessessssesssesssesssesssesseesssesssesssssseseees 1 3 RZS5 BiOAMP ProcessOr secccssrsscesccsscesscssecssscssscssssssssssessesseessesssesssessseessssssesssessssssssonsecssessseesees 1 13 RZ6 Multi T O Processor sccsscscssecsscssscsssvssscssscssssssssssesesessssssssesessssscsssesssssssssssssssessseesssesecesesesees 1 23 PART 2 RX PROCESSORS 6 vswisssicivisscsnsenecicssiwesanssnnncnsveiwesinsnnseesaeiwininevenee 2 1 RX5 Pentusa Base Station cccssccsscssessecssesssessesssscsssssssssssssssssessscnsessssessseseseseseessceseesssessossscessnseens 2 3 RX6 Piranha Multifunction Processor sccsscssscssscssssssccssssssesssessssssssssssssssssssesssesssssssssssssssssesesees 2 13 RX7 Stimulator Base Station csccssscsssssscsscsssssssessscssssssessssesssssssessssssseesesssesssesssesseessensssesessssesees 2 25 RX8 Multi TO sp sccccsccsscistsiagesecesestasesissdesssstadatubicetecscssisedsis
217. ge in mind In the figure below the amplitude of a biphasic pulse is defined in the Amp A and Amp B parameters PulseGenN Amplitude Parameters When using components that output a logical signal such as a PulseTrain the output range can be defined when the output is converted to the desired data type In the figure below the PulseTrain component sends out a standard TTL signal with a fixed duration A TTL2Float component is then used to convert the signal to a user specified value between 0 and 100 This value indicates the desired stimulator output in microAmps 1 3 0 1 4 0 aa Sere BS ees PulseTrain TTL2Foat OThi 10 OHiVal 100 bTg 0 S OTlo 10 Npls 0 Trg 0 Pee E Amplitude CurN 0 Parameter If the ACC16 is not in use the desired uAmps in floating point format can be fed directly to the MS16_Control macro s Stim Signal input If the ACC16 is being used a correction factor must be applied see below System 3 Manual 6 10 Stimulus Isolator ACC16 Correction Factor An ACC16 AC coupler can be used with the system in single ended operation global reference to block any DC bias present on the Stim Output lines a problem primarily affecting researchers using electrodes with impedances of more than 200 kOhms When the ACC 16 is in use it acts as a voltage divider decreasing the voltage and thus the current delivered through the electrode The actual current delivered through the ACC16 depends on the r
218. ge input range when using Headstage input range when 1 5 VDC power source using 2 5 VDC power source System 3 Manual 9 4 Low Impedance Headstages Headstage Technical Specifications Warning When using multiple headstages ensure that all ground pins are connected to a single common node See page 5 29 for more information Input inferred noise Headstage Gain Highpass Filter Lowpass Filter Input Impedance System 3 Manual rms 0 1 u V bandwidth 300 3000 Hz 0 3 u V bandwidth 2 8000 Hz 20x 2 2 Hz 7 5 kHz 10 Ohm Low Impedance Headstages 9 5 RA16LI 16 Channel Headstage The sixteen channel low impedance headstage RA16L1 is a high quality low impedance headstage designed for recording high channel count EEG s The RAI6LI headstage is designed for low impedance electrodes and electrode caps with input impedances between lt 1 kOhm and 20 kOhm Either headstage unit connects to the Medusa preamplifier s 25 pin connector The simple interface to the RA16PA preamplifier makes it easy to connect your electrodes to our system An adapter is also available to connect a low impedance headstage to a PZ preamplifier See DBF MiniDBM page 10 12 for more information A built in impedance checker can be used to test each channel and the reference Additional 20x gain on the headstage improves signal to noise of low voltage signals 25 pin connector to preamplifier 25 pin connector to electrodes Imp
219. generate signal spikes that simulate a physiological recording The simulated spike signals can then be passed through the ETM1 and acquired by the connected headstage The ETM also includes a connection to receive signals via the Patch Panel PP16 Using the PP16 virtually any signal source can be used The ETM1 allows the experimental setup to be tested without using a subject There is 1000 to 1 signal attenuation in the ETM1 Therefore 1 V on the input is equivalent to ImV on the output to the headstage The ETM1 uses transformer isolation of the incoming signal to the resulting output to the headstages Inputs or processor and patch panel connections are located on one end of the device and output or headstage connections are located on the other end of the device Connecting the Headstage Connect the headstage to the corresponding connector on the ETM1 eases banaue peeaeeneaaad Chronic Headstage connected to ETM1 System 3 Manual 16 24 Signal Handling gt enra i Acute Headstage connected to ETM1 Connecting the Signal Source The connectors labeled J1 J2 and J3 are used to connect the ETM to signal sources The first eight headstage channels 1 8 are wired to connector J2 The other eight headstage channels 9 16 are wired to connector J3 All 16 channels are wired to connector J1 See technical specifications page 16 25 for pinouts Connecting to an RA16BA or RV8 For headstage channels 1
220. ges dynamically as the selector knob is turned or only after pressing enter to select the current value AbsMin Minimum Attenuation Sets the minimum level of attenuation the user can apply to the signal to avoid accidentally presenting excessively loud signals PA5 Manual Operation Menus To access a menu e Turn the knob until the name of the desired menu appears on the display then press and release the knob The module has two levels of menus Top level menu items are indicated by a single filled box in the upper left corner of the menu display and sub menus are indicated with an additional indicator box for each level Only the UserOps menu item has sub menu items For a definition of each menu item Turn the Select knob until the name of the menu appears on the display then press and hold down the Select knob A description of the menu function will scroll across the display To exit a menu without changing settings Press and release the ESC button System 3 Manual Attenuator 12 7 PA5 Top Level Menu Atten Sets attenuation from 0 0 to 120 0 dB in 0 1 dB increments The default setting is 0 0 dB When Atten is in use the letter A appears on the left side of the display while the attenuation level appears on the right side of the display UserAtt Sets attenuation based on UserOps settings Before use attenuation parameters must be set up via the UserOps sub menus see below The default setting is 0 0 dB Wh
221. get the event time in microseconds 1 8 0 19 0 1 10 0 1 11 0 SimpCount 4 Int2Aoat 6 ScaleAdd 3 SerStore 1 10 ORst 0 oSF 1 OSF 4 096e 00 bSize 1000 Sre Softi 1 9Enable 1 gt Shit 0 PReset P ORS 0 y XN 7 p WrEnab 1 Index 0 1 5 0 Data gt A Data j Ue ES InputBit 3 P BitNum 0 b gt oRst Run see St0be 0 Strobe 0 Cy ActiveX The Barracuda uses two additional ActiveX methods SetDevCfg and GetDevCfg Detailed information about them is included in the ActiveX help System 3 Manual RP Processors 3 19 Barracuda Technical Specifications Specifications for the RV8 Barracuda Processor DSP 50 MHz Share 21065 150 MFLOPS Memory 32MB SDRAM Digital Inputs 16 bits 1 TRIG input Digital Outputs 8 bits Analog Outputs 8 Channels Input Impedance 10 kOhm Output Impedance 10 Ohm DB25 Connector Pin Out Digital I O GND Din eeto o 7 Me 5 4 3 2 4 25 ii24 l23 i220 2zoNlse k8 47 46 45 14 Dout Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 Do0 Digital Output Channels 14 Dol Digital Output 2 Do2 15 Do3 Channels 3 IDo4 16 Do5 4 Do6 17 Do7 5 IGND Ground 18 Di0 6 Dil 19 Di2 7 D3 20 Di4 8 Di5 21 Di6 Digital Input 9 Di7 22 Dig Channels 10 D9 Digital Input Channels 23 Dild 11 Dill 24 Dil2 12 Dil3 25 Dil4 13 DilS
222. gh Out 8 GND GND p GND GND Out 1 Out 2 Out 7 Out 8 SA8 Technical Specifications Input Signal Range 10V peak Power Output 1 5 W channel into 8 ohms Spectral Variation lt 0 1 dB from 50 Hz to 200 kHz Signal Noise 116 dB 20 Hz to 80 kHz THD lt 0 02 at 1 Watt from 50 Hz to 100kHz Noise Floor 10 5 uV rms Input Impedance 10 kOhm Output Impedance 2 ohms Cross Talk lt 60 dB System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 29 Analog Input Pinout Diagram GND Analog Input Pin Name Description _ 6 A2 Analog Input Channels Analog Output Group 2 Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 Al Analog Output Channels 14 A2 Analog Output Channels 2 1A3 Group 1 15 A4 Group 1 3 JA5 16 A6 4 JA7 17 A8 5 IGND GND 18 JAl Analog Output Channels 6 19 A2 Group 2 i 20 A3 8 21 A4 9 22 JA5 10 23 A6 11 24 A7 12 25 J A8 13 System 3 Manual 14 30 Transducers and Amplifiers System 3 Manual Part 15 Subject Interfaces 15 2 Subject Interfaces System 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 3 BBOX Button Box Overview The button box is a complete subject response interface It is an excellent system for psychoacoustics including n alternative forced choice GO NO GO Bekesy style presentation and modified method of limits experiments The button box provides accu
223. gh each of the display options The VFD screen may also report system status such as booting status Reset Note When burning new microcode or if the firmware on the RZ6 is blank the VFD screen will report a cycle usage of 99 and the processor status lights will flash red System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 31 Status Indicators Cye cycle usage Bus percentage of internal device s bus capacity used VO percentage of data transfer capacity used DAC Displays the current analog attenuator setting Also displays bars according to the RMS level of DAC A and B using a logarithmic scale Note Eight solid bars denote that the signal on DAC A or B is clipping ADC Displays bars according to the RMS Level on ADC A and B using a logarithmic scale Note Eight solid bars denote that the signal on ADC A or B is clipping Analog Input ADC LED Indicators The ADC LED indicators are labeled and located at the top right of the RZ6 front panel The LEDs indicate the level of the signals on ADC channels A and B This provides a useful indicator for adjusting the gain and to detect and prevent clipping The following table describes the LED indicators operation Light Pattern LEDs Description Lit A B 4 Input is lt 6 dB down from max input voltage E 6DB O 712 3 Input is between 6 dB and 12 dB down from max input voltage 25 By abe 2 Input is between 12 dB and 25 dB down from max input voltage LEVEL 1 Input i
224. he default state for a high voltage on a digital line is 1 high true Setting InLogic 1 inverts the logic low true and makes a high input voltage produce a 0 and a low input voltage produce a 1 Similarly when setting OutLogic 1 a high voltage on a digital output line will produce a 0 and a low voltage will produce a 1 Software Control The Barracuda has two modes free run and trigger In free run mode the circuit is always running and signals are constantly generated acquired and filtered In the trigger mode the circuit runs for a set length each time it is triggered The advantage of the trigger mode is that some circuit design is simplified The example below shows two circuits that present a tone burst of 100 milliseconds The first circuit works under the free run mode and the second with trigger Free Run Mode 1 4 0 15 0 m N50 a Tone al LinGate Ch 1 bAmp 1 colt 2 0 gt tat e OShft 0 Schmitt o gt ence J 1 6 0 a Ss pills rads gt Thi 100 Rst Run Tlo 10 x 1 1 0 Src Soft1 Fla Trigger Mode 1 1 0 Tone g Ch 1 DAmp 1 b DShft 0 1 2 0 OFreq 1000 DPhse 0 Rst Run The first circuit requires three additional components LinGate gates the output on and off Schmitt opens and closes the gate and Src Soft1 starts the Schmitt trigger The second circuit requires that the Barracuda be controlled from the trigger mode Trigger mode is accessible within RPvdsEx or from the Acti
225. her detail can be found below the table Also see the RPvdsEx Manual for more information Analog Description Components Channels Notes T O Port D Analog Input AdcIn 1 8 Standard Configuration may vary Accessed through Port D BNCs or Analog I O labeled DB25 Port E Analog Output DacOut 9 16 Standard Configuration may vary Accessed through Port E BNCs or Analog I O labeled DB25 High Z Series MCPipeln 1 256 When the RZ2_Input_MC is NOT Speed BioAmp Input Pipeln USED use MCInt2Float or Int2Float Fiber located on RZ recommended with a scale factor of le 9 Optic Bort back panel MCAdcIn 1 256 No scale required Legacy Medusa AdcIn 17 32 When the RZ2_Input_MC is NOT Amp A PreAmp Input USED apply a scale factor of 000833 Legacy Medusa AdcIn 33 48 When the RZ2_Input_MC is NOT Amp B PreAmp Input USED apply a scale factor of 000833 Onboard Analog I O The RZ2 is equipped with eight channels of 16 bit PCM D A and eight channels of 16 bit PCM A D All 16 channels can be accessed via front panel BNCs marked Port D and Port E or via a 25 pin analog I O connector See RZ2 Technical Specifications page 1 10 for the DB25 pinout PZ Amplifier Fiber Optic Port The RZ2 s primary amplifier input a high speed fiber optic port is located on the back panel The connectors on the fiber optic pair used for PZ amplifier communication are color coded for correct wiring When designing circuits in RPvdsEx the PZ Amplifier input channels ar
226. her real time processors Please note your device type and follow the appropriate procedure for erasing the device Classic Single DSP Processors and Z Series Processors a To erase the first device in the list click the button below the Device ID list under 2 Erase Erase Device or Prepare Device A warning message will be displayed b Click Yes to continue When the device has been erased a message is displayed ce Click OK RX Series Processors a To erase the device press and hold the Mode button on the front panel of the device and click Refresh in the programmer window Release the Mode button After the device is erased the display on the device should read FirmWare BLANK After a device is erased it appears in the 3 Program area In that list it appears with a generic name such as G21K_1 the remaining programmed devices are renumbered This can sometimes make it difficult to identify devices if more than one device is erased at a time System 3 Utlities 19 7 Be sure to program this device before erasing others G21K System3 Device Programmer xi m 1 Connection Dev Type RP2 at Interface GBit OptBit m 3 Program Device G21K_ 1 Ver 30 v uCode File 2 Erase Device ID Erase Device Browse CATDTAR PydsEx RPProg RP21 dee 4 Program the Device Refresh a Click Browse next to the uCode
227. hibit BNC During critical recording periods it may be necessary to prevent rotation to ensure signal integrity A logical low 0 on the Inhibit BNC will prohibit any rotation initiated by either the sensors on the commutator or the manual rotational button External Ground A banana jack located in the top right corner of the front plate directly above the charger input port provides connections to common ground on the commutator System 3 Manual 13 8 Commutator AC16 AC32 AC64 Technical Specifications Channels Signal Noise RPM approx Digital Inputs Power Consumption Power Supply Dimensions in Weight g 16 32 or 64 120 dB 20 Hz to 25 kHz 12 1 Inhibit 35 mAh quiescent 65 mAh rotating Battery 1500 mAh Li ion Battery 1000 cycles of charging not removable by user Charger 6 9 V DC 500 mA center negative Backplate to end of connector 4 15 Minimum diameter for access hole 2 75 Distance between mounting holes 7 3 665 AC16 and AC32 945 AC64 Interface Receptacles The interface receptacle diagram shows how the pins on each receptacle map to the pins on the associated DB25 connector on the front of the commutator 13 15 16 System 3 Manual Commutator 13 9 AC16 and AC32 Headstage Connector s Pinout Electrode Ref Electrode GND ODOOOODOOODO Q OO CBOQHOOOHH V GND V
228. hree inputs an XLR microphone input and two 4 TRS connector inputs Signals from two microphones can be amplified simultaneously Bias The Bias switch produces a bias voltage for microphones that require it Gain Control The gain control amplifies the microphone input in 5 dB steps from 10 55 dB 3x 560x The Gain Switch adds an additional 20 dB 10x of gain for a maximum amplification of 5600 Outputs Two BNC outputs give easy connection to any TDT System 3 device The maximum voltage output is 10 Volts Clip lights indicate and overvoltage on the signal output System 3 Manual 14 22 Transducers and Amplifiers MA3 Technical Specifications Input Signal Range 10 V peak 3dB Bandwidth 200 kHz 40 dB gain Gain Accuracy 1 dB Spectral Variation 1 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz Signal Noise 110 dB 20 Hz to 30 kHz at 9 9 V Noise Floor 9 2 uV rms THD lt 0 002 1 kHz tone 7 V peak Input Impedance 600 Ohm Output Signal Range 10 V peak Bias Voltage 10 V 150 mA max superimposed onto microphone Output Impedance 5 Ohm Output Diagram MA3 Output 25 dB Gain 0 1000 System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 23 Frequency Response Diagram MA3 Frequency Response 15 mVp Input ka Tren LTTE SST TSK SAIS Billi ETT O a B H a 5 e System 3 Manual 14 24 Transducers and Amplifiers MS2 Monitor Speake
229. ht The power switch s green LED will illuminate when the chassis is switched on The light will flash rapidly when it receives a command from software and slowly to indicate a communications error check all cable connections System 3 Manual The zBus and Power Supply 18 5 Disconnecting Power from the Chassis AN CAUTION When removing the power cord from either the power supply or socket outlet grasp the plug not the cord in order to avoid damaging the cable To disconnect the ZB1PS 1 Turn off the power switch 2 Disconnect the power cord from the power supply 3 Disconnect the power cord from the wall socket plug Adding and Removing Modules Before adding or removing modules make sure the zBus is powered off To remove a module from the chassis 1 Unscrew the two thumb screws on the corner of the module faceplate 2 Pull straight out on the front panel BNC connectors A BNC T connector makes a great handle for removing zBus devices To add a module to a chassis 1 Insert the module into an empty bay and push straight back until it seats onto the connector 2 Hold the module in place with the thumb screws Maintaining the ZB1PS Safety Notices This device has passed rigorous testing by Underwriters Laboratories and is UL compliant for CAT II installation in laboratories and other indoor environments Before applying power to the ZBUS caddie verify that the correct safety precautions are taken
230. icantly outdated such as versions older than v62 and should be updated immediately Show Statistics The zBUSmon program when used with the Optical Gigabit interface provides an additional option to view system statistics When Show Statistics is checked the window expands to display the amount of data transferred and error codes if necessary Rebooting the system resetting the hardware or cycling power on the zBUS racks will reset the data in the expanded window System 3 Manual System 3 Utlities 19 5 RPProg Microcode Update Utility About the Microcode The microcode is low level software that resides in flash memory on the System 3 processor devices The microcode contains the DSP instructions for the RPvdsEx processing components Because the System 3 design allows users to update this software quickly and efficiently users can take advantage of the latest software tools available without purchasing new equipment or sending devices to our manufacturing facility for upgrades Updating the Microcode When should the microcode be updated Every time a new version of RPvdsEx is installed on the host PC the microcode should be updated on all processors in the system This includes programmable devices that may have been purchased prior to your new system New versions of the files need to update the microcode are always included in the TDT Drivers installation How is the microcode updated Users must update the microcod
231. ications or custom applications This manual includes device specific information needed during circuit design For circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circuit components see the RPvdsEx Manual Nanosecond Event Timing The Barracuda is a nanosecond accurate event timer The TimeStamp component uses the high speed clock on the system to record when a TTL event occurred during a sampling period This means that event times are independent of sample rate When an event occurs the TimeStamp sends out the time in microseconds from the start of that sample period At the end of each sample period the event timer is reset to zero In the figure below three events occurred during a sample period of ten microseconds For each digital input a unique time stamp is recorded for that sample period System 3 Manual 3 12 RP Processors Time Stamp Sample Period ties CL Event 1 Do 1 1 psec Event 2 D1 7 04 usec Event 3 D2 Fast Digital Analog Converters The Barracuda ships with PCM DAC s with up to 500 kHz sample rate The fast DAC s can be used for high frequency presentations In addition the Barracuda s PCM DAC s give users precise control over voltage outputs for microelectrode stimulation Variable Sample Frequency The Barracuda allows users to set the sample period in 40 nanosecond steps Users can select sample frequency from 10 to 500 000 Hz User Control of Syste
232. idth from 1 50 kHz These broadband speakers have more power at lower frequencies than our electrostatic speakers making them well suited for laboratory species with lower frequency hearing Their high output levels and broad bandwidth also make them excellent for noise exposure studies These 4 Ohm magnetic speakers are available in either free field or closed field models The free field model delivers signals of over 100 dB SPL with lt 1 distortion over its entire bandwidth 4 V 10 cm The closed field model has an internal parabolic cone designed to maximize output and minimize distortion Its tapered tip can be inserted directly to the subject s ear or fitted with the provided tubing and used with most standard ear tips The FF1 and CF1 magnetic speakers can be driven using either TDT s SA1 or SA8 stereo amplifiers The speaker input is connected via a BNC connector which carries both bias and signal voltages from the stereo amplifier Both models feature a rugged polymer enclosure with a stable base as well as a built in 4 20 threaded post for positioning with laboratory mounting hardware Part Numbers FF1 Free Field Magnetic Speaker CF1 Closed field Magnetic Speaker Provided with 6 of 1 8 O D PVC tubing Cable Connection Connections to the speakers are made through a BNC connector located on the back of the FF1 and CF1 housing If using the SA1 stereo amplifier simply connect a BNC cable from the FF1 or
233. ied by the user will be constant regardless of electrode impedance within system limits The MicroStimulator System standard configuration is capable of delivering up to 100 uA of current simultaneously across up to 16 stimulating electrodes impedances up to 1Mohm See Working with the MS16 MilliAmp Mode on page 6 17 for information if your stimulus isolator has been configured for MilliAmp mode The Stimulus Isolator The stimulus isolator features either four or 16 D A converters that can deliver arbitrary waveforms of up to 10 kHz bandwidth PCM D As are used to ensure sample delays of only 4 5 samples and square edges on pulse stimulation waveforms Each of the device s stimulation channels can be configured in one of three states Stimulate Channels in stimulate mode pass current through the selected electrodes Reference Channels in reference mode become part of the return path for the current All channels in Reference mode use the same return path to analog ground on the stimulator Note Users can also use a dedicated global reference channel as a current return path In this mode all channels can be used for stimulation Open The Open mode is the default mode for all channels In the open mode the corresponding electrode channel is disconnected from output and internally grounded to eliminate noise and crosstalk On multichannel electrodes these electrodes might instead be connected to a recording preamp In this mode a chann
234. iestesustsadearsedetecudssesuibedsrsteusessseasbsdeleeasestsuavedsedeess 2 35 PART3 RP PROCESSORS wi iniciiicicisssssecdsecisentsertaenduedsecdaastuandascdsnndeasduentnane 3 1 RA16 Medusa Base Station ccscssscsssessesssesssessesssssssscsscsssssssssecsecssessssssssessseseseessesseesseessssssssnseens 3 3 RP2 1 Real Time Processor csscssscssssssesssesssessesssscssssesssssssssssssesnsecnsessssssesesesessssssscssessssessssssssnseoes 3 7 RV 8 Barracudas cscccsscessseseccctsesssossoosasccsestesonsassoadssessaseaesseseenessesestedstcassesedseasosoateapsetesecteasscosssessseasesseseases 3 11 PART 4 RM MOBILE PROCESSORS cccccccsscssseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneees 4 1 RM Mobile Processors scsscssssssssssessssssssesscssesssssssssessessssesesnsessssssssesenesesssneesecssesssenssessocssesssessoess 4 3 PART5 PREAMPLIFIER S cie aanas aaa aa S aaea Eaa nS an E 5 1 PZ2 Preamplifier scssccsscssscsssccsscssscssscsssssesssensssssssssssesssessssssssssnsesssesssnsssssessssssssesessesseessnssesenseees 5 3 PZ3 Low Impedance Amplifier scssccsscssscssscsssesscssscssssssscssssssessssnsessssssssesenessseessesssessesssessosssnseees 5 9 Medusa Preamplifiers cssccsssssssssssssessssssssssscssssssssscsscsesssssessssesssessssesssessnesssessessseesssnsesnsesssoesens 5 20 Adjustable Gain Preamp cccsscsssssssssssssssssccssesssesssessevesensesscesecsseessenssssscsssesesnsessssssssesenesenessoesso
235. igh 1 System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 19 Analog I O ADC Inputs and DAC Outputs ADC and DAC LED indicators are labeled and located to the right of the byte C LED indicators Light Pattern Off Dim Green Solid Green Solid Red Description Analog I O channel signal voltage is less than 100 mV Analog I O channel signal voltage is less than 5 V Analog I O channel signal voltage is between 5 V to 9 V Analog I O channel clip warning voltage greater than 9 V System 3 Manual 1 20 RZ Z Series Processors Technical Specifications Specifications for the RZ5 BioAmp Processor Note Technical Specifications for amplifier A D converters are found under the preamplifier s technical specifications DSP 400 MHz DSPs 2 4 GFLOPS peak per DSP One or Two Memory 64 MB SDRAM per DSP D A 4 channels 16 bit PCM Sample Rate Up to 48828 125 Hz Frequency Response DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate Voltage Out 10 0 Volts S N typical 82 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz at 9 9 V A D 4 channels 16 bit PCM Sample Rate Up to 48828 125 Hz Frequency Response DC 7 5 kHz 3 dB corner 2nd order 12 dB per octave Voltage In 10 0 Volts S N typical 82 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz at 9 9 V Fiber Optic Ports Stimulator MS16 One output for MS16 Stimulus Isolator Preamplifier Medusa Two 16 channel inputs Digital I O 24 bits programmable Note When used with the Stimulus Isolator the sampling rate
236. igured as inputs or outputs in groups of eight bits that is as byte A byte B byte C and byte D Note however that the bytes must be addressed as if part of a word not as individual bytes See Addressing Digital Bits In A Word in the RPvdsEx Manual for more information By default all bits are configured as inputs This default setting is intended to prevent damage to equipment that might be connected to the digital I O lines The user can configure the bits in the RPvdsEx configuration register The configuration register is also used to determine what the eight front panel Bits lights represent To access the bit configuration register in RPvdsEx 1 Click the Device Setup command on the Implement menu 2 Inthe Set Hardware Parameters dialog box click the Device Type box and select the RX5 Pentusa from the list 3 The dialog expands to display the Device Configuration Register m Device Configuration Registers Register WO Value Modity 140 Setup Control 4 Und Clear System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 9 4 Click Modify to display the Edit I O Setup Control dialog box x Decimal Value Und Cancel Biman I PP yes a PO a fe ES fe St i a ibs deh e ee Wil a SS tee da EP e a IL 5 In this dialog box a series of check boxes are used to create a bitmask that is used to program all bits To enable the check boxes delete Und from the Decimal Value box To determine the desired value s
237. igured in two rows of eight electrodes each and are accessed via our ZIF Clip headstage A notch at the base of the connector facilitates proper insertion into the ZIF Clip headstage and also denotes the 1 row of electrodes See page 8 3 for connection instructions Grounding the Electrode The following illustration shows the possible connections made for reference or ground wires These wires are attached at TDT Important note A notch guide provides easy connections to the ZIF Clip headstage Ensure that the notch side is properly aligned with the arrow symbol on the headstage as shown in the pinout diagram Back View Front View Notch Guide Caution The microwire array can be damaged by extreme heat Use caution when soldering Specifications might vary based on custom order Specification Default Options n Rows X n Electrodes 2X8 Max channels per connector 64 Metal Tungsten Wire Diameter 50 um 33 um Insulation Polyimide Electrode Type Standard Flex Ribbon Flex Ribbon Site Specification Attached Separated System 3 Manual 11 4 Microwire Arrays Electrode Spacing 250 um 500 um Row Separation 375 um Tip Angle Blunt Cut 0 30 45 60 degrees degrees Tip Length 2mm 0 5 10 mm Ground and Reference Wires Differential Single Ended See the Online Order Form for more information on ordering specifications ZIF Clip Based Microwire Array Site Map The following diagrams illustrate the site map con
238. imize the torque caused by subject motion relative to a fixed cable Sensors on the commutator continuously measure the rotational angle applied to the headstage cable and spin the motor to compensate eliminating the turn induced torque at the subject s end of the cable Pushbuttons allow for optional manual control and an input BNC can be used to inhibit the commutator motor during critical recording periods A rechargeable Li Ion battery powers the motorized commutators Part numbers AC16 16 Channel Commutator AC32 32 Channel Commutator AC64 64 Channel Commutator Power and Interface The commutators are powered by a 1500 mAh Li ion Battery A 6 9 V DC 500 mA center negative adaptor one provided charges the unit Low battery status is reported only by a decrease in rotational speed No PC interface is required for operation Mounting The commutator assembly can be mounted above the subject by utilizing the two mounting holes provided Depending on the mounting configuration a 2 75 diameter access hole may have to be drilled into the support to which the commutator is mounted Dimensions are provided below to determine clearance requirements System 3 Manual 13 4 Commutator Mounting Holes 415 7 3 Connection and Setup Before using the AC32 and AC64 commutators it is important to adjust the wire harness on the back so it is balanced The AC32 harness should be in two loops 180 degrees apart and
239. imple interface to the RA16PA preamplifiers makes it easy to connect your electrodes to our system An adapter is also available to connect a low impedance headstage to a PZ preamplifier See DBF MiniDBM page 10 12 for more information The differential inputs allow for improved common mode rejection on all channels Because of the increased complexity of the circuitry the RA16LI D does not have impedance checking The headstage connector is a DB44 The pin out diagram is shown below Headstage Voltage Range When using a TDT preamplifier the voltage input range of the preamplifer is typically lower than the headstage and must be considered the effective range of the system Check the specifications of your amplifier for voltage range Headstage Technical Specifications Warning When using multiple headstages ensure that all ground pins are connected to a single common node See page 5 29 for more information Input inferred noise rms 0 1 u V bandwidth 300 3000 Hz 0 3 u V bandwidth 2 8000 Hz Headstage Gain 20x Highpass Filter 2 2 Hz Lowpass Filter 7 5 kHz Input Impedance 10 Ohm System 3 Manual Low Impedance Headstages es Differential Input Analog Input AGND Note Pins 1 21 24 and 39 are not connected System 3 Manual Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 NA Not Used 25 AGND Anal
240. imum input of the amplifier Analog Output The RX5 is equipped with four channels of 16 bit PCM D A The sampling rate is user selectable up to a maximum of 100 kHz The D A is DC coupled and has a built in upsampler for improved audio playback The upsampler is controlled through one of the RX5 s programmable bits and can be turned off to allow the D A to drive external devices such as a stimulator Channel one analog output can be accessed via a front Panel BNC DAC 1 All four analog channels can be accessed via the DB25 Multi I O connector pins 14 17 Digital 1 0 The RX5 processor has 40 digital I O lines Eight bits are bit addressable The remaining 32 bits are four word addressable bytes Digital I O lines are accessed via the two 25 pin connectors on the front of the RX5 See the Digital I O Circuit Design section of the RPvdsEx Manual for more information on programming the digital I O ee The first eight bits of bit addressable digital I O on RX devices are unbuffered When used as inputs overvoltages on these lines can cause severe damage to the system TDT recommends when sending digital signals into the device 1 never send a signal with amplitude greater than seven volts into any digital input and 2 always use the byte addressable digital I O lines Configuring the Programmable I O Lines Each of the eight bit addressable lines can be independently configured as inputs or outputs The digital I O lines can be conf
241. ines are fed directly to bits 0 1 and 2 respectively on the FromBits component and bits 3 7 are set high by ORing the value from the FromBits component with the value 248 binary 0000 0000 1111 1000 Headstage Relay Register 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 7 0 d j A N d ae Tet FromBits 4 iOr 4 Poke ORst 0 y oN 248 Addr 51 vee BitO is the load pulse for loading data b2 0 Bi B Bit1 is the serial data line b4 0 b5 0 Bit2 is the serial clock for the data A poke component is used to send the resulting value to memory address 51 on the RZ5 processor or memory address 3 on the RX7 The Poke RPvdsEx component writes values to a specific device memory location and should be used with care Using the Switching Headstage with Other Devices When using the SH16 with hardware other than a microstimulator System connect as follows o base station with Simulation input to headstage fiber optic input Control device producing 3V logic signal RA16PA q CONTROL A NSTimuLaToR x y x x A The Serial Control Bit Pattern that controls connection of a given channel to the Stimulus Isolator can be sent using any 3 digital logic lines that will produce a 3V logic signal Circuit design is similar to the example above designed for use with the RZ5 and RX7 processors but must be modified by routing Bit 0 Bit 1 and Bit 2 to the appropriate digital outputs of the device instead of using the Poke component Note The s
242. information needed during circuit design For circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circuit components see the RPvdsEx Manual RX Architecture Each RX multiprocessor device is equipped with either two or five digital signal processors DSPs The multi DSP architecture allows processing tasks to be distributed across multiple processors and enables data to be transferred to the PC quickly and efficiently The DSPs include one master and one or four auxiliary DSP s 128 MB SDRAM of system memory is shared by all DSPs When designing circuits the maximum number of components for each RX DSP is 256 Each DSP communicates with an internal bus to send and receive information from the I O controller and the shared memory The master DSP supervises overall system boot up and operation The master DSP also acts as the main data interface between the zBus host PC and the multi DSP environment System 3 Manual 2 26 RX Processors Because the zBus communicates only with the master processor these devices operate most efficiently when the circuit related processing tasks assigned to the master DSP are minimized allowing more processor power cycles for communication and overhead tasks z zBus ir DSP r ss Host PC to Interface Host PC Controller Qa See 2 Memory EE An DSP vO Stimulator Aux DSP Interface j7 Optical lt picai Fbet gt PreAmp i VO Port
243. ing to the amplification of the TBSI headstage and receiver This can be simplified into a single conversion of 400 Grgs Where Gregs Gain of TBSI wireless headstage and receiver Headstage Connector The headstage connector is a 37 pin 31 channel female connector Information on the pin inputs is provided with the technical specifications on page 5 31 Base Station Connectors To Base One end of the fiber optic cable connects to the digitizer and the other end connects to the digitizer amplifier input on the base station Two fiber optic base station connectors are provided Connect each fiber optic cable as shown below Digitizer Output Base Station Connector To Base Station For Digitizer Input LILA KI Each connector on the TB32 is labeled and corresponds to the channels of the wireless headstage Refer to the System 3 Manual for specific device channel configurations Power Switch A switch on the front panel powers up the digitizer The power light and fiber connectors at the left will be illuminated when the digitizer is on System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 31 Power Light The power light is illuminated when the device is on It flashes quickly if the battery is low It flashes slowly while the battery is charging Power Requirements Onboard lithium ion batteries charge in ten hours Keeping the battery charger connected to the digitizer does not affect the battery life However the charger will signi
244. ion in UserAtt Mode In UserAtt mode the user can adjust the attenuation level of the signal using user programmed parameters available in the UserOps menu Users can also save common parameter configurations in the PAS s nonvolatile memory See Using Preset Configurations for more information To use UserAtt mode 1 Turn the Select knob until UserAtt appears on the display then press and release the Select knob A small letter U appears in the upper left corner of the display indicating the unit is in UserAtten mode and a decibel reading appears on the right side of the display See Display Icons page 12 11 for more information 2 Turn the Select knob to adjust attenuation according the current user programmable parameters available in the UserOps menu The default settings include a step size of 3 0 dB and dynamic update mode Note When the Update attenuation parameter is set to Manual the intensity of the display will dim as the user turns the knob this indicates that the changes have not been applied to the output signal The user must press and release the Select knob to apply attenuation changes to the output signal To access the UserOps menu 1 Turn the Select knob until UserOps appears on the display 2 Press and release the Select knob 3 Set the UserOps parameters as desired gt To set parameters such as step size StpSize update mode Update minimum attenuation AbsMin base attenuation BaseAtt and r
245. iple headstage configurations use a common node for all grounds regardless of the operation of the headstage Headstage Operations Description Single Ended Ground and reference pins are tied together and the probe s reference all channels to ground Differential Ground and reference pins are separate and the probes may use shared or multiple references Hybrid A mixture of single ended or differential operations when multiple headstages are used System 3 Manual 5 34 Preamplifiers Single Headstage Configurations D HEAD STAGE System 3 Manual HEAD STAGE Single headstage with a Shared Ground and Reference When using a single headstage with a shared ground and reference the ground and reference pins of the headstage should be tied together A ground is used and attached to a skull screw All recordings will reference this connection This configuration is referred to as Single Ended Single headstage with a Separate Ground and Reference When using a single electrode with a separate ground and reference it is important that the headstage itself is not single ended that is its ground and reference pins are NOT tied together This will allow the headstage to reference each channel to ground as well as an additional chosen site on the subject This configuration is referred to as Differential Preamplifiers 5 35 Multiple Headstage Configurations Note All headstages must use
246. is configured to use a global reference Single ended or a local reference s Differential Global Reference Mode If a global reference is desired set the MS16 Control macro s Stimulation Mode to Single Ended on the Setup tab of the macro properties dialog box In this mode the RefChan input is disabled Local Reference Mode If local reference is desired set the MS16 Control macro s Stimulation Mode to Differential on the Setup tab of the macro properties dialog box In this mode the RefChan input is enabled System 3 Manual Stimulus Isolator 6 11 Note In Local Reference Differential mode writing a 0 to the RefChan_Mask macro input while the Channel Select Method is set to With Chan Mask will disable all local reference channels and enable the global reference Configuring Reference and Stimulation Channels The MS16_ Control macro sets reference and stimulation channels Feeding an integer value to the macro s StimChan and RefChan inputs will turn on channels for stimulation or reference respectively The Channel Select Method on the Setup tab of the macro properties dialog box determines whether the integer is read as a single channel number or as a mask value representing multiple channels Important Note Configuring a channel as both stimulus and reference will cause the unit to automatically turn off that bank of channels Setting a Single Channel for Stimulation or Local Reference By default the Channe
247. is default setting is intended to prevent damage to equipment that might be connected to the digital I O lines The user can configure the bits in the RPvdsEx configuration register The configuration register is also used to determine what the eight front panel Bits lights represent To access the bit configuration register 1 Click the Device Setup command on the Implement menu 2 Inthe Set Hardware Parameters dialog box click the Device Type box and select the RX7 Elec Stimulator from the list 3 The dialog expands to display the Device Configuration Register m Device Configuration Registers Regier VOT vael meaw 140 Setup Control 4 Und Clear System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 31 4 Click Modify to display the Edit I O Setup Control dialog box x Decimal Value Und Cancel Biman I PP yes a PO a fe ES fe St i a ibs deh e ee Wil a SS tee da EP e a IL 5 In this dialog box a series of check boxes are used to create a bitmask that is used to program all bits To enable the check boxes delete Und from the Decimal Value box To determine the desired value select or clear the check boxes according to the table below By default all check boxes are cleared value 0 Selecting a check box sets the corresponding bit in the bitmask to one 8 When the configuration is complete click OK to return to the Set Hardware Parameters dialog box Each of these bits controls the configuration of o
248. is limited to 24 414 kHz System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 21 BNC Channel Mapping Please note channel numbering begins at the top left block of BNCs for both analog and digital I O and is printed on the face of the device to minimize miswiring A Maps to Ch 1 4 on Analog I O DB25 lt o Maps to Ch 9 12 on a Analog I O DB25 l lt Maps to Port C Bits 0 3 on 5 Digital I O DB25 QO DB25 Analog I O Pinout AGND Analog Analog Output Input 43 42 41 10 8 8 7 65 3 2 4 25 24 23 22 21 2019 4847 de 45 44 Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 NA Not Used 14 NA Not Used 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 AGND Analog Ground 18 JAl ADC Analog Input 6 A2 ADC Analog Input 19 43 Channels ADC Inputs 7 a4 Channels ADC Inputs bo INA INot Used 8 NA INot Used 21 9 22 A9 IDAC Analog Output 10 A10 DAC Analog Output 23 IAll Channels DAC Outputs 11 A12 Channels DAC Outputs 24 NA Not Used 12 INA Not Used 25 13 System 3 Manual 1 22 RZ Z Series Processors DB25 Digital I O Pinout B B G3 62 G1 GO Coe 0 00 010 2 3 G8 G4 G3 Ie D D DOODT GND Byte C PinjName Description 1 CO Byte C 2 2 Bit Addressable digital I O ieee Bits 0 2 4 and 6 4 C6 5 GND Digital I O Ground 6 Al
249. it Bit Dir Control x Decimal Value Und En EE Eel eee eree 1514131211109 8 7 6 Cancel i EPEE oes e m bo eh 2 We 5 In this dialog box a series of check boxes are used to create a bitmask that is used to program all bits 6 To enable the check boxes delete Und from the Decimal Value box 7 To determine the desired value select or clear the check boxes By default all check boxes are cleared value 0 Click the check boxes for desired bits 0 7 to set the bit to one and configure that bit as an output Note Modifying any of the bits will change the default configuration by default bits 0 3 are inputs and bits 4 7 are outputs 8 When the configuration is complete click OK to return to the Set Hardware Parameters dialog box Using the RM2 Fiber Optic Port The RM2 Fiber Optic Port can be used with a Medusa or Loggerhead preamplifier however it is unlikely that a single RM2 device can acquire 16 channels of high frequency activity Instead we recommend that the RM2 be used for low channel count up to four channels high sample rate acquisition or for high channel count low sample rate activity e g 16 channels of slow EEG activity Using the RM2 as part of a Medusa Loggerhead system effectively provides two channels of high quality A D inputs and up to 16 channels of signal input running at 25 kHz The signal input lines accessed via the analog I O and fiber optic port are mapped as described below to
250. l 1 6 0 1 70 i Src zBusA f1 M 32 Sre zBusB Fle M 64 Sro Soft2 fl M 128 To follow along with this example open the LED RPvdsEx file in the ButtonBox example folder TDT RPvdsEX Examples ButtonBox e To set the color or position of the LED 0 Top 1 the green up and down arrows on the DataTable labeled Color Left 2 Right 3 Bottom click e To determine which column the LED is in 0 Far Left 7 Far Right click the green up and down arrows on the DataTable marked Column e To turn on the LED press the zBusA trigger button in RPvdsEx Make sure to click the zA pulse Fl button for the zTrig To turn off the LED press the zBusB 1 trigger You can select one at a time several lights to turn on and off For example to light the top LED in the first column and the bottom LED in the last column perform the following steps 1 Set the Color DataTable to 0 and the Column DataTable to 0 2 top LED in the first column 3 Set the Color DataTable to 3 and the Column DataTable to 7 Turn on the LED by clicking the zBusA trigger button in RPvdsEx This will turn on the 4 Click the zBusB trigger button in RPvdsEx Both LED s should now be on 5 To turn off the latter LED click the zBusB trigger button 2 6 To turn off all LEDs click the Soft2 iL button in RPvdsEx ZA 7 To turn on all LED s in succession set the zBusA trigger line high and then cycle through the DataTable values
251. l Byte C 7 1c3 Word addressable digital I O 8 C3 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 9 C7 10 D1 yte D 11 D3 Word addressable 12 D5 digital I O 13 D7 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 Digital I O GND Byte B Byte A Pin Name _ Description 14 Al Analog Output 15 A2 Channels 16 143 17 A4 18 ICO Byte C 19 C2 ord addressable digital I O cae Bits 0 2 4 and 6 21 C6 22 DO IByte D 23 D2 ord addressable digital I O pa Bits 0 2 4 and 6 25 D6 OE OC OO OS GS 24 GJ CIRI GIKICAGD C 6I GA Bit Addr PinjName Description 1 BAO Bit Addressable gt IBA2 digital I O 3 Baa Bits 0 2 4 and 6 4 BA6 5 GND Digital I O Ground 6 Al Byte A 7 A3 Word addressable digital I O SAs Bits 1 3 5 and 7 9 JA7 10 B1 yte B 11 B3 Word addressable 12 IBS digital I O 13 B7 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 System 3 Manual Pin Name Description 14 BAI Bit Addressable 15 BA2 digital I O 16 BA3 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 17 IBA4 18 AO IByte A 19 A2 ord addressable digital I O ae ie Bits 0 2 4 and 6 21 A6 22 IBO Byte B 23 B2 ord addressable digital I O BR Bits 0 2 4 and 6 25 B6 RX Processors 2 35 RX8 Multi I O Overview The RX8 is a high channel count high sample rate analog I O system which provides a maximum of 24 channels of analog I O and generates a maximum sampling rate of 10
252. l I O lines are accessed via the 25 pin connector on the front panel and can be configured as inputs or outputs See the Digital I O Circuit Design section of the RPvdsEx Manual for more information on programming the digital I O The first eight bits of bit addressable digital I O on RX devices are unbuffered When used as inputs overvoltages on these lines can cause severe damage to the system TDT recommends when sending digital signals into the device 1 never send a signal with amplitude greater than seven volts into any digital input and 2 always use the byte addressable digital I O lines Configuring the Programmable I O Lines Each of the eight bit addressable bits can be independently configured as inputs or outputs The digital I O lines can be configured as inputs or outputs in groups of eight bits that is as byte A and byte B Note however that the bytes must be addressed as if part of a word not as individual bytes See Addressing Digital Bits In A Word in the RPvdsEx Manual for more information By default all bits are configured as inputs This default setting is intended to prevent damage to equipment that might be connected to the digital I O lines The user can configure the bits in the RPvdsEx configuration register The configuration register is also used to determine what the eight front panel Bits lights represent To access the bit configuration register 1 Click the Device Setup command on the Implement menu
253. l Select Method on the Setup tab of the macro properties dialog box is set to With Chan Number The StimChan and RefChan inputs accept an integer value of 0 through 16 and the macro will set the selected channel for stimulation or local reference Note an integer value of 0 fed to StimChan disables all channels Setting Multiple Channels for Stimulation or Local Reference To configure multiple reference channels the Channel Select Method on the Setup tab of the macros properties box must be set to With Chan Mask In this mode StimChan and RefChan inputs accept an integer value channel mask representative of the desired channels shown in the table below The integer value is the sum of the channel masks for the channels Channel Mask Table Channel Channel Mask Channel Channel Mask 1 256 2 512 3 1024 4 2048 5 4096 6 8192 7 16384 8 128 16 32768 For example If you wish to simultaneously set channels 1 channel mask 1 2 channel mask 2 and 3 channel mask 4 to stimulation mode add their respective channel masks from the table above 1 2 4 7 and send that sum 7 to the StimChan_Mask input as shown in the figure below System 3 Manual 6 12 Stimulus Isolator 1 12 0 MS16_Conitrol gt Consti q StimChan_Mask b 9K 7 Single Ended Stim Mode RZ5 This example sets channels 1 2 and 3 for stimulation Unused banks of channels are powered down The stimulus design and delive
254. l scaled 32 47 20 35 for D A varies depending on device Global 0 off or 1 on 50 9 Reference System 3 Manual Stimulus Isolator 6 15 Reference Mask for channels between none and 49 8 Channels 16 integer value between 0 and 65535 Digital Out Mask for channels between none and 51 3 16 integer value between 0 and 65535 Signal Output to Stimulus Channels To generate signals on the stimulus isolator the output waveforms are poked written to memory locations as integer values See Converting the Signal to an Integer Value page 6 13 for more information The table below maps the output channels of the RZ5 and RX7 to their poke address Global Reference Enable Global reference uses the analog ground to complete the stimulation circuit The global reference feature can be enabled by setting the value of a specific memory address to one The StimRef indicator light on the front panel of the stimulus isolator is illuminated when the global reference has been set 1 23 0 1 24 0 d Consti a Poke oK 1 d Addr 50 beet SE RZ5 To enable global reference when using an RZ5 set the value of memory address 50 to one as pictured above RX7 To enable global reference when using the RX7 set the value of address 9 to one Channel Masks Memory addresses for stimulus reference or digital I O channel setup expect an integer value between zero and 65535 Masked values for each channel ar
255. l up to four PM2R modules If only one PM2R is being used it should have device number 0 Bit 6 is the set bit When this bit is set high the channel and device from the previous six bits is activated Bit 7 deactivates all channels across only the specified device The chart below shows the bit ID its integer value and its function es Se Least significant bit of device number Most significant bit of device number Turns on the channel of the specified device Turns off all channels on specified device only System 3 Manual Signal Handling 16 5 Note Make sure to put a delay of one sample between setting the channel number and turning the channel on Trying to do both at the same time will not work correctly For example send 00000111 to select channel 7 and then send 01000000 one sample later to turn the channel on PM2R Technical Specifications Switching Mode Switching Time Input output Level Channel Cross Talk S N typical Maximum Allowable Current RP Control Input DB25 Pinout GND 2 mSec lt 80 dB 90 dB 15 Volts Single 1 to 16 16 to 1 2 Amps continuous GND CE gm aren 43 42 49 Yo ORRO 0 5 hs 25 24 2322212019 48 4 46 45 44 Digital Input Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 IGND Ground 14 NA INot Used 2 NA Not Used 15 NA 3 INA
256. lator with TDT s Switching Headstage When using TDT s switching headstage ensure that relays for channels used for stimulation have been switched to the correct position using the SH16 Control macro Any stimulus channel for which the corresponding control channel has not also been set will fail to generate a signal See Switchable Headstage Operation page 8 24 System 3 Manual 6 22 Stimulus Isolator System 3 Manual Part 7 MicroElectrode Array Interface System 3 Manual 7 2 MicroElectrode Array Interface System 3 Manual MicroElectrode Array Interface 7 3 MZ60 MicroElectrode Array Interface Overview The MZ60 Microelectrode Array Interface is used with our RZ2 BioAmp Processor and the PZ2 Amplifier as part of a complete solution for high spatio temporal resolution tissue slice and cell culture recordings The interface supports simultaneous stimulation and extracellular in vitro recording on up to 60 channels and offers built in environmental control Headstage amplification provided on the MZ60 is optimized for high input impedance and low output impedance to achieve high signal to noise ratio high sensitivity and stability for long experimental durations The MZ60 is compatible with a large selection of MEA plates and both inverted and upright microscopes The Microelectrode Array System A typical system consists of an RZ2 processor a PZ2 amplifier the MZ60 microelectrode array interface a
257. led RP2 PP16 At A2 A3 A4 A5 AG A7 A8 Bi B2 B3 B4 BS B6 B7 BB C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 CB Analog Channels 0 7 Analog Channels 8 15 Connect to the ETM1 The connector labeled J1 is used to connect the ETM1 to a PP16 Plug one end of a serial DB25 male female cable into the J1 connector and plug the other end into the RA16 port of the PP16 Channels 1 8 and 9 16 of the headstages can be accessed through the patch panel BNCs labeled A1 A8 and B1 B8 respectively Also a custom cable can be fabricated to connect the ETM1 connector J1 to virtually any signal source System 3 Manual Signal Handling 16 17 PP24 Patch Panel SLIG EE 2 Overview The PP24 Patch Panel provides front panel BNC connections for easy access to the digital and analog inputs and outputs of the RX family of processors The PP16 Patch Panel is recommended for use with devices such as the RP2 1 and RA16BA processors Power Multiplexer PM2R and Power Amplifier SA8 The PP24 can also be used with the RZ5 The PCB Adapter Advantage The PP24 is supplied with a single device specific PCB adaptor that can be used with either RX or RZ processors The PCB provides better performance than ribbon cables facilitating faster data transfer rates and improved signal to noise ratios Adjustable Positioning The PP24 is equipped with a 25 pin connector on the front panel The PCB Adapter can be used to connect the PP24 to an RX device posi
258. lications Available in 32 64 and 128 channel models the PZ3 amplifier offers shared or true differential operation low input inferred noise impedance checking and an optional high input range mode System Hardware A standard configuration for low sample rate low impedance recordings includes 1 5 mm TouchProof connectors for electrodes a PZ3 amplifier and an RZ2 base station The battery powered PZ3 digitizes and amplifies signals recorded from each of the electrode channels All digitized signals are sent via a single fiber optic connection to the RZ2 base station for further processing The RZ2 also sends amplifier configuration information to the PZ3 across the fiber optics The diagram below illustrates this flow of data and control information through the system Electrode Signals to be Amplified High speed Interface Software control and data transfer LI CONN Z PZ3 Amplifier RZ2 Base Station Electrodes of Filters and Analysis of amplifies signals acquired signals Breakout Box from electrodes and PZ3 control Fiber Optic Connection Digitized data to be processed sent to the RZ2 Configuration information sent from the RZ2 to the PZ3 PZ3 Data and Control Flow Diagram System 3 Manual 5 10 Preamplifiers Recording Modes The PZ3 supports two recording modes Individual Differential and Shared Differential For Individual Differential true differential operation the amplifier inputs are group
259. lifier and the base station The port can input up to 16 channels at a maximum sampling rate of 25 kHz See Fiber Oversampling below for more information The fiber optic port can be used with any of the Medusa preamplifiers including the RAI6PA RA4PA or RA8GA The channel numbers for each port begin at a fixed offset regardless of the number of channels available on the connected device Channels are numbered as follows Amp A 1 16 Fiber Oversampling The fiber optic cable that carries the signals to the fiber optic input ports has a transfer rate limitation of 6 25 Mbits s With 16 channels of data and 16 bits per sample this limitation translates to a maximum sample rate of 24 414 kHz However the need may arise to run a circuit at a higher sample rate while still acquiring data via a fiber optic port The fiber optic port on the RX6 can oversample the digitized signals that have already been sampled up to 4X or 100 kHz This will allow an RX6 to run a DSP chain at 50 kHz or 100 kHz and still sample data acquired through an optically connected preamplifier that digitized the incoming data stream at a maximum rate of 25 kHz Oversampling is performed on the base station The signals being acquired will still be sampled at 25 kHz on the preamplifier This means that even with oversampling signals acquired by an optically connected preamplifier are still governed by the bandwidth and frequency response of the preamplifier Amp St
260. lines Amplifier Clip Warning Power Status display Enable logical level lights for byte A Enable logical level lights for byte B Enable logical level lights for byte C 12 13 14 Enable logical level lights for byte D XLink The XLink is not supported at this time System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 11 Pentusa Base Station Technical Specifications The RX5 has no onboard A D converters Technical Specifications for the A D converters are found under the preamplifier s technical specifications DSP 100 MHz Share ADSP 21161 600 MFLOPS Peak Two or Five Memory 128 MB SDRAM Shared D A 4 channels 16 bit PCM Sample Rate Up to 97 65625 kHz 8X upsampled to 200 kHz default operation Frequency Response DC Nyquist 1 2 sample rate Voltage Out 10 0 Volts Voltage Out Accuracy 10 S N typical 84 dB 20 Hz to 25 KHz 82 dB with upsampling disabled THD typical 77 dB for 1 kHz output at 5 Vrms 74 dB with upsampling disabled Output Impedance 10 Ohm Fiber Optic Ports Two or Four Inputs Medusa Digital I O 40 bits programmable 8 bits bit addressable and a 32 bit word addressable as 4 bytes System 3 Manual 2 12 RX Processors DB25 Connector Pinouts TDT recommends the PP24 patch panel for accessing the RX5 I O Multi I O
261. lipping would occur Legacy Optical Amp Light For The Legacy Preamplifier Sync Flash when no amp is connected and will be light light blue when the amplifier is correctly connected Amplifier and Onboard Analog I O The RZ2 is equipped with both optical port amplifier input and onboard analog I O capabilities The high speed fiber optic ports located on the RZ2 back panel and Legacy fiber optic ports shown left allow a direct connection to Z Series or Medusa Preamplifiers Physiological signals are digitized on the preamplifier and transferred across noiseless fiber optics Legacy Preamp Analog Inputs ADC and DAC Analog I O System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors The RZ2 also includes onboard D A for stimulus generation and experiment control and A D for input of signals from a variety of other analog sources RZ2_Input_MC SourceData Data Pipe 16 Chans 1 16 The RZ2_Input_MC macro provides a universal solution for analog input via the RZ2 automatically selecting the correct components applying any scale factors or channel offsets and performing data type conversion needed based on information the user provides about the input source The table below provides a quick overview of these I O features and how they must be accessed during circuit design When the RZ2_Input_ MC macro is not used reference the table and be sure to use the appropriate component channel offset scale factor and so forth Furt
262. log input and output see page 1 26 The diagram to the left depicts the analog AME ADE input flow for the RZ6 A Input signals for channel A are input either 4 i through the XLR input Mic A the audio jack input Diff A or BNC In A Input ps signals for channel B are input through the Q wa 8 BNC In B ya A switch located to the left of the gain control knob allows a single gain setting for both channels to be applied or bypassed completely A RZ6 Analog Input Flow Diagram The diagram below depicts analog output flow through the RZ6 Signals A and B flow out of the DAC and pass through the programmable and manual attenuation modules prior to being output on the front panel BNC connectors Out A and Out B The signals for channels A and B are also passed to two stereo headphone output ports labeled A amp B and Mon Individual stereo power amplifiers are used for the BNC and stereo headphone outputs A single channel monitor speaker is connected either to signal A signal B or disabled based on the monitor control switch setting The monitor level knob controls the sound level of both the stereo headphone jack labeled Mon and the monitor speaker Finally if the electrostatic speaker driver is enabled via its switch located on the front panel signals A and B are output from the mini DIN ports located on the RZ6 front panel System 3 Manual 1 26 RZ Z Series Processors
263. low voltage of the HV250 battery pack Serial numbers below 4000 The MS4 MS16 has undergone several design changes to improve performance and usability TDT recommends that all users upgrade to the latest versions serial numbers 4000 and above Contact TDT for an RMA to upgrade your current module Serial numbers below 3000 Noise on outputs is high when the output is in Open mode The noise is especially evident during recording and stimulation events Contact TDT for an RMA for upgrade of your current device Conservation of Power The stimulus isolator s analog channels are arranged in four channel banks Each of these banks is powered up on reset of the device and will remain powered on To conserve power TDT recommends powering down unused banks of channels The MS16_ Control macro can be used to turn off unused banks of channels When not using the macro simultaneously setting any channel in a bank to both Stimulate and Reference mode turns off that four channel bank Maximum Voltage Output The stimulus output channels drive a current signal that ranges from 0 100 microAmps The maximum voltage output from the MicroStimulator system using the TDT NC48 battery is the 24 volts and the maximum voltage output using the TDT HV250 battery is 125 Volts The actual voltage output depends on the current waveform specified and the impedance of your electrodes that is V ZI where V Volts Z impedance and I current Using the MicroStimu
264. ly works in the trigger mode must also have bit number 1 enabled 5 32 UseZTRGB Starts the Barracuda when a ZtrgB goes high Only works in the trigger mode must also have bit number 0 enabled 6 64 UseEXTR Starts the Barracuda using the external trigger Only works in the trigger mode must also have bit number 0 enabled 7 128 MTRIG _ Enables multiple trigger mode Users can repeatedly trigger the Barracuda without stopping and rerunning the circuit 0 Very Large Number of Triggers The Special Modes are set with a bit masked pattern For example to set the trigger mode using a ZTRGA the value for the Special Mode would be set to 1 16 or 17 To use the Mtrig function the value would be 1 DoCount 16 UseZTRGA 128 MTRIG or 145 DoCount Enable DoCount to use the trigger mode If this is not enabled then the device is in free run mode AutoClr AutoClr works in trigger mode AutoClr clears the output of the DAC s to zero after the last value is played Otherwise the output of the DAC is set to the last value converted Trigger Mode In trigger mode the circuit only runs after it has been triggered After a trigger it runs for set number of samples and then stops Using the trigger mode requires three steps 1 Set the value of the Special Mode parameter 2 This value is a bit masked value To calculate the value needed sum the individual bit masks see above The bit masks include Do
265. m Devices The Barracuda has two control modes Free run and Triggered In Free run mode the circuit runs continuously and gating functions are required to control the signal outputs and inputs In Trigger mode the circuit only runs after it has been triggered It then runs for a set number of samples and then stops The system can be triggered once or multiple times The circuit must be reset before it can trigger again Gating functions are not required for turning on and off stimuli Additional Features To simplify signal synchronization it is possible to send out the sample clock and the system clock 50 MHz on the digital outputs Users can also send out the sample clock period Barracuda Features Trigger Takes an external TTL pulse and triggers components free run mode or triggers the circuit trigger mode System 3 Manual RP Processors 3 13 Status Lights The status lights indicate the state of the RV8 Armed Running DC DoCount and FreeRun Combinations of the status light describe the state of the RV8 Free Run Mode Free Run Mode Trigger Mode Trigger Mode Trigger Mode w Circuit with System with System Running Armed Running ARMED ARMED ARMED ARMED ARMED RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING DC DC DC DC DC FREERUN FREERUN FREERUN FREERUN FREERUN Digital Input Lights Lights are on when there is a TTL pulse on the digital input line Pulse times may be too brief to see in many
266. mulation or recording From Stim Port To PZ2 10kO F AN To MEA Recording Channel S06 Sa ecording Channe Electrode Site Record Mode Selected _ Stimulate Mode Selected MZ60 Single Channel Circuit Diagram In the circuit diagram above a single MZ60 channel is shown Each channel is either in record mode the MEA recording site is connected through the corresponding MZ60 headstage to the PZ2 A D channel or in stimulate mode the MZ60 stimulate port contains a path to the global ground pin and the MEA recording site is grounded Switch State Reference Table Record Mode Stimulate Mode Stim Port Connected to Electrode Site Electrode Site Connected to Shorted to MZ60 Headstage Common Ground PZ2 Channel Records analog Shorted to signals from MZ60 Common Ground Headstage Warning Channels designated for recording are still connected to the corresponding stim port located on the MZ60 To avoid damage to the MZ60 headstage DO NOT attempt to present stimulus signals to channels configured for record mode System 3 Manual MicroElectrode Array Interface 7 7 Environmental Control The MZ60 Interface housing contains built in environmental control and allows the microelectrode array MEA to have regulated temperature control MZ60 Interface Cable Connector An interface cable is provided to connect the MZ60 to the PZ2 amplifier and optionally to the HC10 temperature controller The
267. n lit indicates that the stimulator is correctly connected to the designated Battery Pack Solid correct working voltage Flashing low voltage Digital Output Control Outputs The Control Output connector provides access to the stimulator s 16 channels of Word addressable digital output These outputs can control the relays on the SH16 switching headstage or other digital output device maximum current 40 mA maximum voltage 3 3 Volts Control Output Lights A Control Output Light one for each digital I O indicates that the digital output channel is set high or active The Control Output Lights are located above the Control Output connector and are numbered 16 to indicate the active digital output channel System 3 Manual 6 8 Stimulus Isolator Fiber Optic Port To Base The stimulus isolator s fiber optic input port labeled To Base provides an isolated connection to the base station RZ5 or RX7 The fiber optic cable carries digital signals to D A s on the stimulus isolator It also carries control information and information about the state of the stimulation channels One end of the fiber optic cable connects to the device using the To Base connection pair and the other end connects to the Stimulator input on the base station Keep in mind because of the fiber optic cable data transfer rate the corresponding Stimulator fiber optic output port on the base station RZ5 or RX7 will be disabled if the sys
268. nces that range from 20 kOhm to 5 Mohm Square Guide Notch Guide N Front of Probe Front or Adapter O Ring Sleeve System 3 Manual 8 4 High Impedance Headstages Connect probes and adapters to the headstage as described below ZIF Clip Headstage O Rings All ZIF Clip headstages are shipped with two o rings for additional connection security Gently slip the o ring onto the headstage sleeve and then roll the o ring towards the back of the headstage Connect the probe or adapter to the headstage as described above Once the connection is secure roll the o ring forward until it settles into the sleeve on the front of the headstage System 3 Manual Wo UW Se Firmly press and hold the back to open the headstage Align the notch guide of connector to the black square guide of the fully opened headstage then move headstage into position t A WARNING The ZIF Clip headstage must be held in the fully open position while being slid into position The headstage should only be closed when fully engaged Sliding the headstage into position while applying pressure to the tip will permanently damage the ZIF Clip headstage and micro connectors Press the front of the headstage together as shown to lock the connector in place High Impedance Headstages 8 5 Preamplifier Connection One or more MiniDB26 connectors are used to connect the ZIF Clip headstage to a PZ2 preamplifier
269. ncluded to handle the required timing functions used by programs such as OpenEx and a PZ3_Control macro configures the operation mode of the PZ3 as well as any additional options that may be necessary Three parameter inputs allow toggling of clipping LEDs and toggling or channel impedance measurements System 3 Manual 5 14 Preamplifiers PZ3 Operation RCX control circuits running on the base station must include PZ3 specific macros to configure the amplifier s mode of operation Shared Differential or Individual Differential and other configuration options such as input range and clip warning display See PZ3 on page 5 11 for more information Impedance checking is also available from the front panel Powering ON gt To turn the amplifier on move the three position battery switch to either the Bat A or Bat B position Powering OFF gt To turn the amplifier off move the three position battery switch to the OFF position Operation Modes Recorded signals are acquired in Shared or Individual differential mode Shared Differential In shared differential mode a single shared reference and a ground are used for each bank of eight recording channels Note In this mode no connection should be made to the alternate indifferent channels Use the LI CONN Z connector to ensure proper connections Enabling Shared Differential Operation gt To enable shared differential mode use the PZ3 control macro and under the O
270. nd Elevation information to change the perception of a signal input Channels 1 and 2 are latched via the PulseTrain2 decimation construct discussed earlier 1 8 0 1 9 0 h N OSF 180 gt T rg 0 J OShft 0 1 12 0 1 13 0 i N gt ScaleAdd gt Latch C C Elv1_Deg gt SF 180 __peTrg 0 J OShft 0 N The output of the HTI3 is sent to an HRTF filter that converts the mono input into a stereo output that can be sent to Headphone buffers etc A random access buffer stores the HRTF filter values Ch 1 1 20 0 1 19 0 y Fa ee P i gt gt Hrtffr Stereo l 1 21 0 bOrder 32 SOR gt Pn RKA MaxITD 100 f E D HrtfCoef gt o gt Coef gt Delay gt Azmi_Deg 9 CmpNo 24 gt Azm1_Deg oF aaa dn RamBuf Size 1000 NoName Index 0 Write 0 lt b gt Data About the Sample Circuit The sample circuit HTIFLOCKOFBIRDS rpx illustrates the scale factors for all incoming channels from the FOB motion tracker Page 0 shows the initial scaling and the secondary scaling for channels 1 3 deg and 4 6 in Page 1 shows the scaling of the channels relating to the optional 2nd motion tracker input channels 7 12 HTI3 Technical Specifications Max update rate 120 Hz Boresight trigger External RS232 acquisition rate 115 kbaud System 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 23 To Tracker DB9 Pinout for Ascension Flock of Birds Transmit Pin
271. nd the HC10 temperature controller An optional stimulus generation device may also be used and controlled by the RZ2 processor as part of an integrated solution The diagram below illustrates the function of the components in the system High Speed Fiber Optic Interface Fiber Optic Connection Software control and data transfer Transfer control info for PZ2 amplifier and digitized signals RZ2 Processor Real time PZ2 Amplifier DSP controls I O signals Digitizes recorded and processes digitized data data from the from the PZ2 amplifier MEA60 MZ60 Interfaces with MEA electrode sites for stimulation and recording Optional Stimulus generation device for designated microelectrode sites HC10 Programmable heating unit Microelectrode Array System Diagram As seen in the illustration above the MZ60 acquires analog input signals from cell lines or tissue slices via a MicroElectrode MEA plate and sends those signals to the PZ2 amplifier All channels are digitized on the PZ2 using an 18 bit hybrid A D architecture and up to 50kHz System 3 Manual 7 4 MicroElectrode Array Interface sampling per channel Digitized data is streamed to the RZ2 multiprocessor DSPs on a lossless fiber optic connection and processed data is transferred to the PC for data storage via a highly optimized bus and high throughput fiber optic connection A single RZ2 and PZ2 system is capable of interfacing with up to four MZ60 s The HC10 temper
272. ne of the eight addressable bits as inputs or outputs Setting the bit to one will configure that bit as an output Each of these bits controls the configuration of one of the four addressable bytes as inputs or outputs Setting the bit to one will configure that byte as an output bit 8 byte A bit 9 byte B bit 10 byte C and bit 11 byte D 12 14 Create a bit code that determines how the front panel Bits lights are used see table below Setting the bit to one will disable the D A upsampler System 3 Manual 2 32 RX Processors Bit Codes for Controlling the Bit Lights Boxes 12 14 By default check boxes 12 14 in the Edit I O Setup Control dialog box previous diagram are cleared to create the bit code 000 This configures the eight front panel Bits lights to act as activity lights glow when high for the eight bit addressable digital I O lines The Bits lights can also be configured to provide information about amplifier status or act as activity lights for any of the other four bytes of digital I O Bit Flags Bit Lights Used For Logical level lights for bit addressable I O lines Amplifier Clip Warning Power Status display Enable logical level lights for byte A Enable logical level lights for byte B Enable logical level lights for byte C 12 13 14 Enable logical level lights for byte D XLink The XLink is not supported at this time System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 33 Stimulator B
273. ng in an additional 6 dB of gain Power The HB7 Headphone Buffer is powered via the System 3 zBus ZB1PS No PC interface is required Features Inputs The HB7 has two inputs for signals up to 10 V accessed through front panel BNC connectors labeled LEFT and RIGHT Outputs The outputs include both a stereo headphone jack labeled PHONES and Left and Right BNC connectors Note When monitoring both output channels with only one input connected users should short the unused input channel to ensure maximum channel separation Gain A single GAIN knob provides control over the signal output level in 3 dB steps from 0 to 27 dB DC AC Switch The DC AC switch can be used to switch from DC coupling to AC coupling mode In AC coupling mode DC shifts in the signals are removed DIFF Switch The DIFF switch will switch to a differential output mode that gives 6 dB of additional gain when connected to a speaker When DIFF is switched on the switch in the up position the left channel input goes to both the left and right channels and is inverted on the right channel the right input BNC is not used The differential output will usually only be used with speakers not headphones System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 19 To connect the speaker connect the left output to one pole of the speaker and the right output to the other pole of the speaker neither ground of the left nor right output will be connected
274. ns are connected to a single common node See page 5 29 for more information Input inferred noise rms 3 u V bandwidth 300 3000 Hz rms 6 u V bandwidth 30 8000 Hz Headstage Gain Unity 1x System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 17 Input Impedance 10 Ohms Pinout Female connectors to facilitate easy connections to external devices compatible with 0 5mm diameter male pins Back 32 30 31 G R Ref 119 7 Front looking into connections Pins for jumper connections 28 29 27 25 22 23 21 26 24 20 1918 17 1 4 13141516 53 2 6 8 1012 Important When using the NN32AC with the NeuroNexus Acute 32 channel probe keep in mind that there are several versions of the probe and the NN32AC was designed to correspond to the NeuroNexus rev 3 probe Check the NeuroNexus Website for pin diagrams Also see MCMap in the RPvdsEx User Guide for a description and examples on how to re map channel numbers The numbers in the diagram above show the channel connections to the amplifier The surfaced connections on the back of the headstage include female connectors to simplify connections to external devices and jumper locations to short G R and Ref Ref refers to the built in reference site on the NeuroNexus probe The ground channel should either be tied to an external ground or to the reference for a single ended input Jumper Configurati on The following table describes the jumper configurations and as
275. ntil the ZCAP releases from the connector System 3 Manual 11 6 Microwire Arrays Omnetics Based Microwire Arrays Part Numbers OMN1010 OMN1005 OMN1020 OMN1030 Standard 50 um polyimide insulated tungsten microwire gives the arrays excellent recording characteristics and the rigidity of tungsten facilitates insertion The standard OMN1010 array consists of sixteen channels configured in two rows of eight electrodes each and are typically accessed via our RA16CH 16 channel headstages OMN1005 OMN1020 and OMN1030 share this standard configuration with varying electrode separation specifications Consult the documentation provided with your array for custom specifications Grounding the Electrode Our latest laser cut microwire arrays OMN1010 have one location each to connect needed ground and reference wires Because the reference and ground are shorted together in our RA16CH chronic headstages unless the jumper is cut by the user only one wire will be needed for most cases Important note The solder pad is located on the backside of the microwire circuit board Back view Front view Mm m reference x J ground The illustrations above show a single wire connected to the ground pad located on the backside of the array Caution The microwire array can be damaged by extreme heat Use caution when soldering System 3 Manual Microwire Arrays 11 7 Specifications might vary based on custom order Speci
276. o 20 dB i e K 0 1 to 10 using a GAIN knob on the front panel The sign of K for channels A and B can also be selected using front panel toggle switches labeled INV A and INV B If an input is not being used it should be grounded by attaching a shorted BNC cable This will prevent unwanted noise from being added to the output Clipping The variable weighting provides a great deal of flexibility in input and output signals However care should be taken to avoid clipping any signal component The SM5 output signal Ka A Kb B C is limited to 10V peak In addition the raw inputs A B and C as well as the weighted inputs Ka A and Kb B are limited to 10V peak System 3 Manual 16 10 Signal Handling SM5 Technical Specifications Input Signal Range Weighting Range Max Output Spectral Variation S N typical THD Noise Floor Output Impedance Input Impedance Inversion System 3 Manual 10V peak 20 0 to 20 0 dB 10V lt 0 1 dB from 10 Hz to 200 kHz 111 dB 20 Hz to 80 kHz lt 0 002 1kHz tone 7V peak 19 uV rms 20 Ohm 10 kOhm Channels A amp B Signal Handling 16 11 SM5 Frequency Response 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency Hz SM5 Total Harmonic Distortion 5 6 V Peak System 3 Manual 16 12 Signal Handling PP16 Patch Panel a Ta anjar a ee OOO DTO O WOVE NOOO COLO 2 IOR HOD a The PP16 Patch Panel provides
277. o experiments in real time without any increase in latency Positional information from motion trackers can be efficiently stored and synchronized with biological signals such as T Transmitter R Receiver on head of person or animal FOB Ascension Flock of Birds FT Polhemus FASTRAK HTI3 TDT Head Tracker Interface RA16 TDT Medusa Base Station RX6 TDT Multifunction Processor EMG EEG and extracellular neurophysiology or used to update a 3D audio signal presentation in real time The HTI3 parses the incoming signals from the motion tracker into the following data components Receiver Each HTI3 can handle up to 2 channels of motion tracker receivers Error code The HTI3 will generate four channels that encode the decimal error codes from the Fastrack motion tracker XYZ coordinate space The HTI3 will generate three channels of coordinate space distance from each receiver in either inches or centimeters based on information from the motion tracker Azimuth Elevation and Roll AER The HTI generates three channels of AER information for each receiver based on signal information from the motion tracker NOTE The XYZ space is absolute distance from the transmitter while the AER information is relative to the boresight point System 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 17 The raw HTI3 output signals must be scaled to achieve the appropriate signal range before the data can be used Special processing mus
278. odifications to the EC1 or ES1 should be performed by TDT If you need to be 30 60 dB lower than specifications or if you have one of these devices contact TDT for assistance System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 13 ED1 Electrostatic Speaker Driver ELECTROSTATIC SPEAKER Onrver Overview The ED1 is a broadband electrostatic driver that produces incredibly flat frequency responses reaching far into the ultrasonic range The ED1 is designed especially for TDT s ES series electrostatic speakers The ED1 Electrostatic speaker driver can drive two ES series speakers and is powered off the zBUS The ED1 is a TDT System 3 device and receives power from the zBUS It s two input BNCs accept input signals up to 10 Vpeak The front panel gain control can be used to the control overall signal level of both channels from 0 to 27 dB in 3 dB steps ED1 output is via two 4 pin mini DIN connectors which carry both bias and signal voltages The ED1 is designed to work exclusively with TDT ES series electrostatic speakers While the ED1 will accept a 10V input it is possible to overdrive and ES1 when the ED1 is on the maximum gain setting Always check that the output signal is not distorted If the signal is distorted turn down the gain on the ED1 until the distortion disappears The SigCalRP software that is distributed with SigGenRP is useful for measuring the frequency response of the ES1 and to measure the Total Harmonic Distortion
279. offset the reading of the sensor to reflect the actual temperature of the liquid contained in the MEA The user defined offset is added to the measured thermistor temperature Un Lock This option locks or unlocks manual temperature adjustments To lock unlock the HC10 press the select knob inward then turn the knob to display the Un Lock menu Press the select knob inward to lock unlock manual temperature adjustments System 3 Manual 7 12 MicroElectrode Array Interface Clear This option once selected returns the HC10 to the default temperature offset and unit settings 37C and no offset Done This option when selected exits the options menu Temperature Controller Technical Specifications Technical specifications for the Temperature Controller Power Output 10W Power Requirements External 12 VDC 1 25A power supply Maximum Temperature 40C Maximum Precision degree temperature setting with 1 10 degree offset Celsius or Fahrenheit Display Units Celsius default or Fahrenheit Note Maximum temperature test conducted using a saline solution at a room temperature of 23C in standard 8 x 8 MEA array System 3 Manual Part 8 High Impedance Headstages 8 2 High Impedance Headstages System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 3 ZIF Clip Headstage Overview The ZIF Clip headstage Patent No 7540752 features an innovative hinged headstage design that ensures quick easy headstage connection
280. og Ground 2 JA2 Analog Input 26 AGND 3 D3 Differential Input 27 D12 Differential Input 4 D5 28 Al4 Analog Input 5 JAS Analog Input 29 JA15 6 JA7 30 D16 Differential Input 7 A8 31 D1 8 A9 32 A3 Analog Input 9 D9 Differential Input 33 D4 Differential Input 10 JA10 Analog Input 34 AGND Analog Ground 11 All 35 D6 Differential Input 12 A12 36 D7 13 D13 Differential Input 37 D8 amp 14 AGND Analog Ground 38 AGND Analog Ground 15 JA16 Analog Input 39 INC 16 JAl 40 D10 Differential Input 17 D2 Differential Input 41 D11 18 A4 Analog Input 42 Al3 Analog Input 19 AGND Analog Ground 43 D14 Differential Input 20 A6 Analog Input 44 D15 21 NA Not Used 22 NA 23 INA 24 NA Part 10 Adapters and Connectors 10 2 Adapters and Connectors System 3 Manual Probe Adapters and Connectors 10 3 Probe Adapters Each TDT headstage is designed for use with a particular style of probe Probe adapters allow each headstage to be used with a wider variety of probes When using adapters keep in mind that standard operation differential vs single ended varies for acute and chronic preparations and headstages are designed accordingly When adapting across preparations carefully note and understand the use of the ground G and reference R connections provided on each adapter AC CH Acute Headstage to Chronic Probe 16 Channels This adapter allows the user to connect a 16 channel chronic probe such as a TDT
281. ogic level lights for any of the other four bytes of digital I O Using the Bits Lights to Display Amplifier Status Note Because clip warning and amplifier status are always displayed using the Amp lights located directly to the right of each fiber optic port TDT recommends using the Bits lights for other applications See Amp Status and Clip Warning Lights for more information Power Status Clip Warning Amp B Amp A When the Bits lights are configured to display the amplifier status the left column of lights indicates the power status and the right column indicates a clip warning for the corresponding amplifier System 3 Manual 2 30 RX Processors The table on page 2 29 shows the light pattern and corresponding amplifier status for the power status lights 0 3 Clip lights flash very rapidly when any channel on the connected amplifier produces a voltage approaching the maximum input of the amplifier Analog Output The RX7 is equipped with four channels of 16 bit PCM D A The sampling rate is user selectable up to a maximum of 100 kHz The D A is DC coupled and has a built in upsampler for improved audio playback The upsampler is controlled through one of the RX7 s programmable bits and can be turned off to allow the D A to drive external devices such as a stimulator Channel one analog output can be accessed via a front Panel BNC DAC 1 All four analog channels can be accessed via the DB25 Multi I O
282. om 1 kHz to 40 kHz lt 1 from 1kHz to 40 kHz Transducers and Amplifiers 14 7 Closed field Frequency Response dB SPL CF1 Frequency Response 1000 10000 Hz 40000 CF1 measurements typical closed field approx 0 1cc pve tube coupler using 1 V input Closed field Harmonic Distortion THD 100 0 1 0 01 0 001 1000 CF1 Harmonic Distortion 10000 Hz 44300 Harmonic Distortion at 1V Peak System 3 Manual 14 8 Transducers and Amplifiers EC1 ES1 Electrostatic Speaker Overview TDT Electrostatic Speakers Patent No US 6 842 964 B1 are designed specifically for ultrasonic signal production The electrostatic design offers a thin flexible membrane with an extremely low moving mass Unlike conventional speakers these speakers distribute the driving signal homogeneously over the surface of the membrane These factors produce a small lightweight speaker with an excellent ultrasonic response and very low distortion Available with or without a coupler both models are easy to position and are particularly well suited for studies with small animals that have hearing in the ultrasonic range Part Numbers Patent No US 6 842 964 B1 ES1 Free Field Electrostatic Speaker EC1 Electrostatic Speaker Coupler Model Cable Connection The ES1 and EC electrostatic speakers work exclusivel
283. onal 20x gain on the headstage improves signal to noise of low voltage signals Impedance Checking with the Low Impedance Headstage The Impedance checker on the RA4LI provides a simple check of the channel impedance relative to ground To check the impedance level press the button next to the channel indicator The highest level light indicates the maximum impedance between the channel and the ground If all impedance lights are illuminated it is likely that one of the channels is not properly connected The impedance button checks the impedance between the reference and the ground Impedance Checker 25 pin connector to preamplifier p P Ground Reference Headstage Voltage Range When using a TDT preamplifier the voltage input range of the preamplifer is typically lower than the headstage and must be considered the effective range of the system Check the specifications of your amplifier for voltage range Also keep in mind that the range of the headstage varies depending on the power supply provided by the preamplifier TDT preamplifiers supply 1 5 VDC but third party preamplifiers may vary TDT recommends using preamplifiers which deliver 2 5 VDC or less Check the preamplifier voltage input and power supply specifications and headstage gain to determine the voltage range of the system The table below lists the input voltage ranges for the RA4LI headstage for either a 1 5 VDC or 2 5 VDC power source Headsta
284. ond to the expected bandwidth of your recordings Noisy Single Electrode Channels Large noise signals may be a sign of a bad electrode contact or pin To test the electrode contact rotate the MEA and begin recording signals again If the previously affected channels noise is significantly lower then the MEA has a bad electrode contact If the same channels are still affected the MZ60 pin contact is bad Contact TDT support if you encounter a bad pin contact If the electrode contact is affected you may remedy the problem by cleaning the MEA contact sites with a cotton swab and some pure alcohol 100 If the problem persists after cleaning the MEA electrode contacts the contacts are damaged beyond repair and the MEA plate must then be replaced Microelectrode Array Interface Technical Specifications Technical specifications for the Microelectrode Array Interface Stimulus Input Channels Up to 60 0 75 mm female input pin Analog Input Channels Up to 60 Input Impedance 10 Ohms Compatible MEAs Standard MEA Arrays 49x49 mm System 3 Manual MicroElectrode Array Interface 7 9 Microelectrode Array Connector Pinouts Stimulate Record Switching Banks A DIP switch bank is located on each of the four sides of the MZ60 and toggles between stimulate or record modes for 15 electrode sites Stimulating inputs accept 0 75 mm male pins Pinouts are shown looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels assuming the MZ60
285. ot used Create a bit code that determines how the front panel Bits lights are used see table below 15 Not used Bit Codes for Controlling the Bit Lights Boxes 12 14 By default check boxes 12 14 in the Edit I O Setup Control dialog box previous diagram are cleared to create the bit code 000 This configures the eight front panel Bits lights to act as activity lights glow when high for the eight bit addressable digital I O lines The Bits lights can also be configured to provide information about amplifier status or act as activity lights for any of the other four bytes of digital I O Bit Flags Bit Lights Used For None Logical level lights for bit addressable T O lines E E Ee n Logical level lights for byte A 12 14 Logical level lights for byte B The XLink is not supported at this time XLink System 3 Manual 2 42 RX Processors Realizable Sampling Rates for the RX8 PCM converters support a broad range of sampling rates up to the maximum of 100 kHz Relizable sampling rates can easily be determined in the device set up dialog in RPvdsEx Sigma Delta converters support a more limited set of sampling rates as shown in the table below When using Sigma Delta converters the user must ensure a valid sampling rate is set for the device Note The Check Realizable button in the device set up dialog in RPvdsEx is used to calculate the true sampling rate of the system when an arbitrary sampling rate is
286. p headstage Ground and reference pins are located on the DIP connector and may be tied together for single ended operation Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels Front Back 13 9 14 10 0 5mm Female 18 pin DIP Socket Header bbbbddddad TEPTETTTTT ZCA OMN16 ZIF Clip Headstage to Chronic Probe 16 Channels This adapter connects a 16 channel chronic Omnetics based probe to a 16 channel ZIF Clip headstage Ground and reference pins may be tied together for single ended operation Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels Guide Pin Guide Pin Back f e DODODOOO Looking into connector 18 pin Female Omnetics Nano Dual Row Header 3 E e a 7290970907 o rerreriret System 3 Manual Probe Adapters and Connectors 10 7 ZCA NN32 ZIF Clip Headstage to 32 Channel Acute Probe This adapter connects a 32 channel acute NeuroNexus probe to a 32 channel ZIF Clip headstage Note X Ref is a reference pin that is connected from the adapter to the probe only See the jumper configuration below for more information Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels Front Back Ge 10121416 1115 28 32 2731 Ge 91326 30 2529 RX 7 3 24202319 86 4 2 51 22182117 40 pin Samtec FOLC High Density Socket Strip bbbbd
287. preamplifiers including the RAI6PA RA4PA or RA8GA The channel numbers for each port begin at a fixed offset regardless of the number of channels available on the connected device Channels are numbered as follows Amp A 17 32 Amp B 33 48 Note When using the RZ5_AmpIn MC and RZ5 AmpIn macros the necessary scale factors and channel offsets for configuring the fiber optic ports are automatically applied Fiber Oversampling acquisition only The fiber optic cable that carries the signals to the fiber optic input ports on the RZ5 has a transfer rate limitation of 6 25 Mbits s With 16 channels of data and 16 bits per sample this limitation translates to a maximum sampling rate of 25 kHz However the need may arise to run a circuit at a higher sampling rate while still acquiring data via a fiber optic port The two fiber optic ports on the RZ5 can oversample the digitized signals that have already been sampled up to 2X or 50 kHz This will allow the RZ5 to run a DSP chain at 50 kHz and still sample data acquired through an optically connected preamplifier that digitized the incoming data stream at its maximum rate of 25 kHz Oversampling is performed on the base station The signals being acquired will still be sampled at 25 kHz on the preamplifier This means that even with oversampling signals acquired by an optically connected preamplifier are still governed by the bandwidth and frequency response of the preamplifier Fiber
288. provided on the MZ60 interface cable Plug in the AC power cable provided with the HC10 then connect it to the power port located on the back of the HC10 housing Using the power switch on the back panel power on the HC10 and allow it to heat to the desired temperature 6 Power on the RZ2 processor and PZ amplifier If using the system with other devices such as a third party stimulus device or preamplifiers see the documentation for those devices for hardware connection information HC10 SIDE VIEW Ho10 H 0 9 PiN gt y TEMPERATURE ADJUST KNOB r PZ2 BACK PANEL a A 49 64 D Sus CONNECTOR N ri 68 PIN av ns On F vi 33 48 Za a an RZ2 BACK PANEL MZ60 MEAJINTERFACE i y Tea 7 _ o 1 16 mid Geeeenelsssneees srm on z ip A CORD E y EE o wf N VA f lt a J CHARGER IN PREAMP Zeus a Gur IN ZBUS INTERFACE Setup of the Microelectrode Array System System 3 Manual 7 6 MicroElectrode Array Interface Microelectrode Array Interface Features Analog Input and Output The MZ60 supports Microelectrode Arrays MEAs which contain electrode sites for up to 60 analog input output channels Any of these analog channels may be configured for recording or stimulus presentation using top panel stimulus switches Stimulus Switches A DIP style switch is provided for each of the 60 analog input channels and controls the nature of each channel whether a channel is used for sti
289. ptic cable that carries the signals to the fiber optic input ports on the RX7 has a transfer rate limitation of 6 25 Mbits s With 16 channels of data and 16 bits per sample this limitation translates to a maximum sampling rate of 25 kHz However the need may arise to run a circuit at a higher sampling rate while still acquiring data via a fiber optic port The first two fiber optic ports on an RX device can oversample the digitized signals that have already been sampled up to 4X or 100 kHz This will allow an RX7 to run a DSP chain at 50 kHz or 100 kHz and still sample data acquired through an optically connected preamplifier that digitized the incoming data stream at its maximum rate of 25 kHz Oversampling is performed on the base station The signals being acquired will still be sampled at 25 kHz on the preamplifier This means that even with oversampling signals acquired by an optically connected preamplifier are still governed by the bandwidth and frequency response of the preamplifier When acquiring up to 16 channels of data on the first fiber optic input port of the RX7 the signals will be oversampled 4X to 100 kHz If the RX7 is equipped with a second fiber optic input port System 3 Manual RX Processors 2 29 and data is being acquired on both ports the signals on second port will be oversampled 2X to 50 kHz Amp Status and Clip Warning Lights Amp lights are located to the right of each fiber optic port These ligh
290. ptions tab set the value of Differential Mode to Shared Individual Differential When the PZ3 is operating in individual differential mode each of the 8 channels of an individual bank has a paired differential reference Note While operating in this mode no connections should be made to the Shared Reference pin 5 Enabling Individual Differential Mode gt To enable individual differential mode use the PZ3 control macro and under the Options tab set the value of Differential Mode to Individual Clip Warnings Analog clipping occurs when the input signal is too large If analog clipping occurs TDT recommends switching the PZ3 into high input range mode For more information see Modifying the Input Voltage Range on the PZ3 page 5 15 While the amplifier is recording the front panel LEDs can act as clip warning indicators according to configuration settings set using the PZ3_Control macro If an analog signal approaches the PZ3s clipping range the PZ3 LEDs for the corresponding channel are lit red Note The LED Indicators are also mirrored on the RZ2 LCD display System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 15 When recording the status LED located below the Display Mode button indicates the status of the Clip Indicators Solid green indicates that clip warning is disabled and orange indicates the clip warning is enabled gt To enable clip warning press the Display Mode button on the PZ3 front panel Alternativel
291. r MSZ MONTOR Greacece tepurt A WO Overview The MS2 Monitor Speaker is used as an audio monitor for signals up to 10 V The MS2 output level is controlled manually using a 1 turn potentiometer on the front panel interface Maximum output is greater than 90 dB SPL at 10 cm The frequency response ranges from 300Hz to 20 kHz A typical use of the MS2 is for audio monitoring of electrophysiological potentials Power The MS2 Monitor Speaker is powered via the System 3 zBus ZB1PS No PC interface is required Features Manual control is via a single LEVEL knob which provides control over the signal output level The MS2 has one input channel for signals up to 10 V accessed through a front panel BNC connector The MS2 is useful for monitoring the output signal that may be going to headphones in a soundproof room and for monitoring physiological signals that are being acquired such as neurophysiology recordings MS2 Technical Specifications Input Signal Range 10V peak Max Output gt 90 dB SPL at 10 cm Input Impedance 10 kOhms System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 25 SA1 Stereo Amplifier Overview The SA1 is a power amplifier for the zBus that delivers up to 3 watts of power to speakers It has excellent channel separation combined with low noise and distortion The frequency response is flat from 50 hertz to 200 kilohertz Gain can be varied over a 27 dB range in 3 dB increments Po
292. r FD1 provides power for the flashlamp and can control flashlamps that use their own power supply The FD1 Flashlamp Driver is powered via the System 3 zBus ZB1PS No PC interface is required for FD1 operation System Set Up The LS1130 output intensity and rate of stimulation are controlled via the FD1 which receives a variable voltage reference and trigger input from one of the System 3 processors The diagram below shows how the system would be connected when using an RP2 1 module for control PP16 Paich Panel DOIOODDDDODDOOKOODDHDODODDODODDDDOO OQOOUOQOOOOODOOO OOO OOO OOOOOO gt gt r i RP21 REAL TIME PROCESSOR n FO Flash Lamp Driver Tucker DAvIS TECHNOLOGIES Flashiamp System 3 Manual 14 16 Transducers and Amplifiers System Features Vref Input Signal The variable reference voltage controls flashlamp output intensity and can be supplied by any System 3 device with a DC level positive such as the RP2 1 or RX processors the RAI6BA cannot be used and must be set high for 10 mSec before the stimulus trigger Trig Input Signal A TTL trigger controls stimulation rate and is typically supplied by a digital output line from one of the System 3 processors such as the RP2 1 or RX6 Alternatively the trigger line can be provided by an external source TTL source with a maxium voltage of 5 V and 1 mSec duration Flash Switch This manual switch can b
293. r Attenuation Mode Reference level set R 3 3 0 dq B R User Attenuation Mode Base attenuation value and reference level set System 3 Manual 12 12 Attenuator PA5 Technical Specifications Input Signal Range 10V peak Frequency Range DC 200 kHz Attenuation Range 0 0 to 120 0 dB Attenuation Resolution 0 1 dB Attenuation Accuracy 0 05 dB Spectral Variation lt 0 04 dB 20Hz to 80 kHz DC Offset lt 10mV Signal Noise 113 dB 20 Hz to 80 kHz at 9 9 V Noise Floor 16 uV rms 20 Hz to 80 kHz THD lt 0 003 1kHz tone 7V peak 0 dB attenuation Attenuation Settling Time 5 ms Switching Transient lt 8 mV 0 Hz to 80 kHz Input Impedance 10 kOhm Output Impedance 10 Ohm PAS Frequency Response 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency Hz System 3 Manual Attenuator 12 13 PAS5 Frequency Response With 50 dB Attenuation 49 49 2 49 4 49 6 49 8 50 50 2 50 4 50 6 50 8 51 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency Hz PA5 Total Harmonic Distortion System 3 Manual 12 14 Attenuator System 3 Manual Part 13 Commutators System 3 Manual 13 2 Commutator System 3 Manual Commutator 13 3 ACx Motorized Commutators Overview As part of a complete solution for research with awake behaving subjects TDT has developed a series of 16 32 and 64 channel ultra quiet motorized commutators Lightweight cables and connectors min
294. r a description and examples on how to re map channel numbers System 3 Manual Probe Adapters and Connectors 10 5 CHx2 NN 16 Channel Chronic Headstage to 32 Channel Acute Probe This adaptor connects a 32 channel acute NeuroNexus probe to two 16 channel chronic TDT headstages RA16CH Connect the first RA16CH headstage channels 1 16 to the front of the adapter Connect the second RA16CH channels 17 32 to the back of the adapter This adapter also features a holding rod for connection to a micromanipulator As with the CH AC adaptor reference and ground are tied together by default on the chronic headstage so in general only one pin connection is necessary If you wish to use the Reference pad on the probe do not tie G and R together and cut the jumper on each headstage to make the inputs differential See RAJ6CH page 8 18 for more information Front 32 31 30 29 28 26 24 23 22 21 G 27 25 20 19 18 17 R Ref 6 8 131415 16 123 45 7 9101112 18 pin Male 40 pin Samtec Omnetics Nano FOLC High Density Dual Row Header Socket Strip Female connectors compatible with 0 5mm diameter male pins Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels TDT probe adapters are designed for specific TDT headstage to probe connections If you are using a third party headstage please contact TDT support for assistance Important When using these adapters with NeuroNexus probes keep in mind that there are
295. r bits of the digital inputs and digital outputs as well as the Trigger Enable input are mapped to LED indicators on the front panel of the RP2 There is an additional TRIG input BNC on the front panel D A and A D The RP2 1 is equipped with two channels of 24 bit 200 kHz sigma delta D A and two channels of 24 bit 200 kHz sigma delta A D System 3 Manual 3 8 RP Processors Sigma Delta converters provide superior conversion quality and extended useful bandwidths at the cost of an inherent fixed group delay See the technical specifications for the group dealy of each device The original RP2 A D s run at 100 kHz An Optional RP2 5 identifiable by its version number only is equipped with 24 bit 50 kHz A D and 50 kHz D A The RP2 5 device does not have SDRAM Hardware Up to 32MB of SDRAM can be installed for storage of long waveforms and acquired data An RP2 comes standard with 16MB of SDRAM while an RP2 5 has no SDRAM All of the RPvdsEx buffer components used to build circuits for the RP2 utilize the SDRAM memory and therefore will not work when used on an RP2 5 device The RP2 communicates with and is programmed through the zBus link The RP2 hardware also contains a powerful digital I O sub system offering eight bits of digital input and eight bits of digital output as well as a dedicated trigger input connected to a BNC on the front panel The first four bits of both input and output port and the trigger input have L
296. r is 939 Hz System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 25 Creating the Serial Control Bit Pattern Channel setup and control are programmed by serially transmitting a 24 bit pattern to the headstage on the serial data line DO1 The first bits in the pattern control the connection of a given channel to the Stimulus Isolator Bit 16 controls the ground and bit 17 controls the record reference line Bits 18 23 are not used and are always sent as zeros By default all channels are set in the record mode disconnected from the stimulator To connect a given electrode to the output of the stimulus isolator send a binary 1 on the appropriate bit of the pattern Sending a binary 0 on the appropriate bit will disconnect that electrode from the stimulus isolator and connect it to the recording preamp To disconnect the stimulator ground from the record ground during stimulation a 1 is sent in the mask at bit location 16 To disconnect the record reference line from the headstage and leave it floating during stimulation a 1 is sent at bit location 17 Reference Zeros ii Headstage Channels OL OPLOLOLOLOPRIGHopi spat spi2ji polo si7fo s 4 3 42 1 Bit 23 Biti Bitis Bit 0 Sent First Ground Sent Last SH16 Serial Control Bit Pattern For example to stimulate on channels 1 1 3 4 and 4 8 the following serial bit pattern with an integer value of 13 1 4 8 should be sent to the headstage Notice that bit
297. r provided on the MZ60 interface cable is not properly connected to the HC10 when the power switch is on a warning message Chck Htr will be displayed See the MZ60 section on page 7 1 for more information Environmental Control The HC10 provides a current which is used to regulate the temperature inside the MZ60 Buffered Memory The HC10 automatically stores all user settings when the HC10 is turned off When powered on the HC10 resumes programmed temperature control based on the previous user settings Memory can be restored to default settings using the options menu LED Display The HC10 displays the desired temperature as well as the thermistor temperature sensor status r gt lt gt 3 JC User Set desired temperature Thermistor status indicator System 3 Manual MicroElectrode Array Interface 7 11 Thermistor Status Indicator The thermistor status indicator is located on the left side of the LED display and tracks the current state of the temperature sensor The status symbol changes as the thermistor temperature approaches the user set temperature The table below describes each status symbol Status Symbol Description lt lt lt or lt lt lt Thermistor temperature is less than user set temperature As the temperature difference becomes greater additional less than symbols are displayed up to three gt gt gt or gt gt gt Thermistor temperature is greater than user set tempera
298. rate reliable performance All inputs are debounced in the button box and a built in rechargeable lithium ion battery provides power for up to 24 hours of continuous use per charge The standard button box configuration includes six buttons and six high intensity LEDs However the button and LED organization can be configured to user specification The button box can have up to eight buttons and 32 LEDs The button box design allows experimenters a great deal of flexibility to control feedback based on subject response reinforcing behavior for correct and incorrect choices The button box can be controlled from an RP2 1 or RV8 processor with button response acquisition and LED control through the digital input output port of these modules Data can be latched and then read from specialized RPvdsEx circuits using ActiveX and Matlab or other programming languages RPvdsEx circuits designed for button box control can be used with all TDT software Connecting the Button Box to the RP2 1 or RV8 The button box is controlled using the RP2 1 or RV8 processor The button box connects from the DB25 connector Control directly to the digital input output port on the RP2 1 or RV8 with the supplied ribbon cable The button box is configured at the factory for the RP2 1 It can be configured for the RV8 by installing a jumper pin Jumper for RV8 on the back of the button box System 3 Manual 15 4 Subject Interfaces RP2 1 ENHANCED REAL TIME PR
299. rcycle battery input range of 6 9 Volts Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the processor through TDT run time applications or custom applications This manual includes device specific information needed during circuit design For circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circuit components see the RPvdsEx Manual Mobile Processor Hardware The RM1 Real time Mini Processor and RM2 Mobile Processor combine a signal processor a power supply and a computer interface in one small form factor The RM consists of an Analog Devices Sharc floating point DSP with surrounding analog and digital interface circuits and 32 MB of memory for data storage and retrieval The RM2 also includes a fiber optic connection for the RA4 RA16PA Medusa amplifier D A and A D The RM is equipped with stereo 24 bit sigma delta A D and D A that can sample at rates up to 97 656 kHz Sigma delta converters provide superior conversion quality and extended useful System 3 Manual 4 4 RM Mobile Processors bandwidths at the cost of an inherent fixed group delay For the RM1 and RM2 the DAC Delay is 17 samples and the ADC Delay is 16 samples Digital Input Output Bits The TTL I O circuits include four bits of digital input and four bits of digital output that are accessed via the 9 pin connector on the back of the RM Bit
300. re they connected to the REF line on the MZ60 A common ground pin is available on the Microelectrode Array Interface Channels are designated for stimulation when the corresponding DIP switch is in the ON position The MZ60 channels are organized in four individual 16 channel banks that correspond to banks of channels on the PZ2 amplifier Each bank transmits 15 analog signals recorded from the MEA to the PZ2 amplifier the sixteenth channel of each bank is connected to ground and is not used If any channel is designated for stimulation it is grounded internally on the PZ2 In addition to the MEA plate located inside of the MZ60 a heating coil is provided for temperature regulation and is controlled by the HC10 Temperature Controller The HC10 Temperature Controller The HC10 temperature controller provides controlled heating for the MEA Interface This device allows temperature adjustment settings in either Celsius or Fahrenheit with up to a degree resolution Built in offsets and buffered memory allow user specified settings to be stored The heating coil located underneath the MEA plate is used to monitor the current temperature as well as regulate the temperature See the HC10 section on page 7 10 for more information Hardware Set up To insert the MEA into the interface 1 Twist the knob on the front edge of the MZ60 counterclockwise to release the hinged top 2 Lift the top and position the MEA on the aluminum plates 3 Lower the
301. reen reports detailed information about the status of the system The display includes two lines The top line reports the system mode Run or Idle and displays heading labels for the second line The second line reports the user s choice of status indicators for each DSP followed by an aggregate value The user can cycle through the various status indicators using the Mode button to the left of the display Push and release the button to change the display or push and hold the button for one second then release to automatically cycle through each of the display options The VFD screen may also report system status such as booting status Booting DSP or alert the user when the device s microcode needs to be reprogrammed Firmware Blank System 3 Manual 2 6 RX Processors Status Indicators Cye cycle usage Ovr processor cycle overages Bus percentage of internal device s bus capacity used VO percentage of data transfer capacity used Important Note The status lights will flash 3 times a second to alert the user when a device goes over the cycle usage limit even if only for a particular cycle This helps to identify periodic overages caused by components in time slices Fiber Optic Ports The RX5 base station acquires digitized signals from a Medusa preamplifier over a fiber optic cable This provides loss less signal acquisition between the amplifier and the base station Two or four fiber optic ports are provided to
302. rence 6 NA Not Used 7 A5 8 A7 9 A9 Analog Channels h5 7 9 11 13 10 All land 15 11 A13 12 A15 13 NA INot Used Note Channels 5 16 not available on the MS4 Control Output Connector This connector provides access to control or relay output channels fas Digital Output Cuo T oo o OTKA TE a a 23 29 20 AD e ee PinName Description 1 NA Not Used 2 3 4 5 DGND Digital Ground 6 Dl 7 D3 8 D5 Digital Output 9 D7 Bits 1 3 5 7 9 i0 D 11 13 and 15 11 Dll 12 D13 13 D15 Pin Name Description 14 NA Not Used 15 16 17 18 DO 19 D2 20 D4 Digital Outputs 21 D6 Bits 0 2 4 6 b gt D8 8 10 12 and 14 b3 D10 24 D12 25 D14 System 3 Manual 6 20 Stimulus Isolator Battery Reference The stimulus isolator uses an onboard Lithium Ion battery for general device operation These batteries charge in four hours A 6 9 Volt battery charger with 500 mA of current capacity is included with the stimulator and can be connected via the Charger connector on the stimulator s back panel The charger tip is center negative If it is necessary to replace the charger ensure that the power supply has the correct polarity Issue Onboard Li Ion Battery life 130 mAh 12 15 hours battery up to 27 hours up to 240 hours of life between charges stimulation
303. ring handling or shipping and avoid dropping the device gt Although there is a protective screen over the ventilation fan do not attempt to stick any objects into the fan This may result in injury or damage the device gt Do not attempt to store this device where it may be exposed to prolonged periods of excessive sunlight high temperatures high humidity or condensation If exposed to such conditions the device may no longer work properly and its specifications may no longer be satisfied gt The device is designed for indoor use only and is not waterproof do not get the device wet gt Do not attempt to use this device in a manner unspecified by TDT Changing the Power Supply Fuses A CAUTION Only fuses with the required rated current voltage and specified type should be used with this device Use only 500 mA 250 V rated Time Lag fuses To change the power supply fuses 1 Turn off the power switch 2 Disconnect the power cord from the power supply 3 Using a flathead screwdriver gently push the fuse plate inward 4 Once the fuse plate is pressed inward gently turn the screwdriver counterclockwise until the fuse plate tab is visible 5 Depress the fuse plate and it will pop up Grab both ends of the fuse plate and slide the fuse housing out of the power supply 7 Replace the defective broken fuse with a new 500 mA 250 V rating Time Lag fuse by gently pushing the end of the fuse into the fuse housing
304. rodes and electrode caps with input impedances less than 20 kOhm Signals are input via multiple DB26 connectors on the PZ3 back panel A break out box or connector s are required for electrode connection TDT provides a version of our LI CONN connector for the PZ3 the LI CONN Z for Shared Differential mode It features standard 1 5 mm safety connectors and provides easy connections between electrodes and the amplifier Hardware Set up The diagram below illustrates the connections necessary for PZ3 amplifier operation PZ3 BACK PANEL LI CONN Z D CONNECT TO ELEGTRODES lt p S RZ2 BACK PANEL 8 OR 16 CHANNELS Ss j g WITH PE N GROUND AND REFERENCE DS S IN N PREAMP ZBus Our OUT IN UT IN CHARGER CONNECT ZBUS INTERFACE One or more male connectors such as the LI CONN Z can be connected to the input connectors on the PZ3 back panel Alternately custom connectors and a breakout box can be used If using custom connectors see pinouts for the PZ3 connectors on page 5 18 Note In Shared Differential mode no connection should be made to the indifferrent channels A 5 meter paired fiber optic cable is included to connect the preamp to the base station The connectors are color coded and keyed to ensure proper connections The PZ3 battery charger connects to the round female connector located on the back panel of the PZ3 amplifier Important To avoid introducing EMF noise DO NOT connect the charger to the PZ3
305. ronic Probe This adapter connects a 60 channel chronic Gray Matter microdrive SC60 1 to a 64 channel ZIF Clip headstage Ground and reference pins are located on the adapter for access to single ended and differential modes of operation Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels Back Front 30 pin Female Omnetics Nano Dual Row Header x 2 dbbdbdddddddd TEPETETETTttt Note Channels 1 3 33 and 35 are not connected ZCA CK96A ZIF Clip Headstage to 96 Channel Chronic Probe This adapter connects a 96 channel chronic CyberKinetics CerePort connector to a 96 channel ZIF Clip headstage For single ended operation tie the ground and reference pins shown in diagram together Side o SEE TRAA L R o _ on a SUCCTCCEC TEESE SESE SESE EE EE EE EEE REESE Ahdtddeaaaaaaaanadeaadadecaaaaaaeacnes 1 27mm 36 pin Female Micro Socket Header x 3 System 3 Manual Probe Adapters and Connectors 10 9 Side 14_22 30 38 46 29 37 45 G J SETH TET Cy ity ity ty ays to 10 18 26 34 42 25 33 41 R2 MAA 12 20 28 36 44 27 35 43 G HHHH 16 24 32 40 48 31 39 47 NA N N N E N A N N N A A A ft 9 96 79 87 95 7 15 23 M E N A a A M A E 92 75 83 91 3 11 19 4 G NA No Connect R1 Reference 1 53 61 69 54 62 70 78 86 G m m es M M es as Be l l a M a R2 Reference 2 49 57 65 50 58 66 74 82 R1 G Groun
306. rounds pins 13 15 16 are tied together System 3 Manual 5 24 Preamplifiers 4 channel pin outs models shipped before January 2002 REF Analog Input Channels Pin Name Description Analog Input Channel Number V Positive Voltage Headstage Power Source on oom ooo V Negative Voltage Headstage Power Source Grounds pins 7 amp 8 are tied together System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 25 Adjustable Gain Preamp Overview The RA8GA was designed to acquire and digitize multi channel data from a variety of analog voltage sources such as eye trackers amplifiers including grass axon and WPI amplifiers PH meters and temperature sensors The RA8GA digitizes up to eight channels at acquisition rates of 6 12 or 25 kHz All channels have a variable group gain setting of 10 Volts 1 Volt or 100 millivolts The system has a bandwidth to DC which allows users to acquire low frequency DC signals In addition a two pole low pass filter 12 dB per Octave is set at 7 5 kHz Power and Interface The device is powered via the System 3 zBus ZBIPS and requires an interface to the PC If the RA8GA is housed in one of several ZB1PS chassis in your system ensure that it is connected in the interface loop according to the installation instructions Gigabit Optibit or USB Interface Features Max Input Lights The Active light flashes once a second when the preamplifier is not connect
307. ry are not included in this circuit segment The reference channels can be configured in the same way using the integer values in the Channel Mask Table above The iXor component can also be used to set all channels NOT set as stimulation to reference In the figure below an iXor is used to perform an exclusive bitwise OR function The channel mask for stimulation is XORed with the integer mask value for all channels resulting in a channel mask that sets all non stimulus channels to reference channels 1 4 0 MS16_Control pa lies ae Constl a K 0 chanMask 9 9K 0 1 8 0 iXor i O N 65535 N Differential Stim Mode RZ5 Important Writing a 0 to the RefChan_Mask macro input while the Channel Select Method is set to With Chan Mask will disable all local reference channels and enable the global reference Delivering the Stimulation The stimulus delivery segment of the circuit can be handled within the MS16 Control macro or external to the macro using the Poke component TDT recommends using the MS16_Control macro whenever possible The Poke component should be used with caution however it is necessary for some tasks including simultaneous stimulation on multiple channels Important The memory addresses used with the Poke component are different for the RZ5 and RX7 See the memory address table page 6 14 for more information Single Channel Stimulation with Global Reference When the global reference is use
308. s Technical specifications for the AD converters are found under the preamplifier s technical specifications DSP 50 MHz Share 21065 150 MFLOPS Memory 16 MB SDRAM or 32 MB SDRAM D A 8 channels 18 bit sigma delta Sample Rate 48 828 kHz maximum Frequency Response 3 dB at 3 Hz Nyquist 1 2 sample rate Voltage Out 10 0 V AC coupled S N typical 90 dB 20 Hz to 25 KHz Distortion typical 70 dB for 1 KHz output at 0 7 Vrms Sample Delay 18 samples Fiber Optic Ports 1 16 channel Input and 1 Link Port 24 kHz maximum sample rate Digital Inputs 1 bit Digital Outputs 16 bits Input Impedance NA Output Impedance 20 Ohm System 3 Manual 3 6 RP Processors DB25 Analog Digital I O Connector Pin Out GND Dout p pDDOO O Me hs 4 3 2 1 17 16 15 14 Aout Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 JAl Analog Output 14 A2 Analog Output 2 A3 Channels 15 A4 Channels 3 JAS 16 A6 4 A7 17 A8 5 GND Ground 18 DO Digital Output Bits 6 Dl Digital Output Bits 19 D2 7 D3 20 D4 8 D5 21 D6 9 D7 22 D8 10 D9 23 D10 11 D11 24 D12 12 D13 25 D14 13 D15 Note TDT recomends the PP16 patch panel for accessing the Digital I O System 3 Manual RP Processors 3 7 RP2 1 Real Time Processor RP2Z 1 ENHANCES REAL TIME PROCESSOR Overview The RP2 and RP2 1 real time processors are
309. s 0 7 Channels 8 15 Channels 0 7 The diagram below maps the RX8 Analog I O connection to the PP24 All digital bits are programmable as input or output RX8 MULTI I O PROCESSOR Satis OOC OC BITS a Idle uM ut u2 u3 u4 All MRS 00 O4 Mope Cyc 0 00 0 0 0 1005 Zeus FOR 2006 SYSTEM 3 lie Mu it DSP Oo XLINK Processor 3007 Disita VO RX CONN 24 NEL A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 AS A6 A7 A8 B5 B6 B7 B8 c5 C6 C7 C8 Analog I O Block A Analog I O Block B Analog Output Block C Channels 1 8 Channels 9 16 Channels 17 24 System 3 Manual 16 22 Signal Handling Mapping RZ5 I O Note The PP24 is mounted below the RZ5 The diagram below maps the RZ5 Digital I O connection to the PP24 All digital bits are programmable as input or output 1 2 a 4 a Fas o SPEAKER a VOLUME a Q oO Q lt 4 Idle ul u2 Al uO da Cyc 0 Ole gt i Te 0 a oe MIN Max Be ei 2 Processors Move Eg 2 RZ5 2g S BIOAMP PROCESSOR DIGITAL O ADC DAC i At oO 59 YO stim hel red kad DIGITAL O ANALOG I O Gt Ss Se 1 GF tee Ss 1 f a8 67 Ga 12 AmP A AmMP B Ai A2 A3 A4 Bi B2 B3 B4 Ci C2 C3 C4 Sa ia do 38 Be 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 A5 A6 A7 A8 B5 B6 B7 B8 C5 C6 C7 C8 24 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
310. s 16 and 17 are not set 1 allowing non stimulating channels to record using a preamplifier 0000 1101 0000 0000 0000 0000 RPvdsEx Circuit The following circuit illustrates the headstage channel setup and serial data load for the SH16 using an MS4 MS16 and RZ5 or RX7 processor The first figure shows the headstage channel setup The ChSelectBM parameter tag sets the value of the ConstI with an integer representing the serial control bit pattern discussed above Headstage channel setup 1 1 0 Consti ChSelectBM ___ K 7 d Bit value 0000 0000 0000 0111 The next segment of the circuit detects a change to the headstage setup and generates a pulse that will reset the serial data transmission to send the new channel selection and control logic System 3 Manual 8 26 High Impedance Headstages _ 1 50 A 1 6 0 1 70 gt iScaleAdd iCompare 6 EdgeDetect gt __HS_Enable gt SF 1 K 0 Edge Rising Shft 0 Test NE e N 1 2 0 g ShortDelay 2 7 Nms 1 gt Data l The third segment of the chain uses a pulse train to send the 24 bit pattern serially MSB first to the headstage After all 24 bits have been sent the data is latched to the relays 1 13 0 gt Latch 1 9 0 iCompare gt lt 4 PulseTrain2 K 24 nPulse 24 Enab Wes Bit Pattern _ 7 18 0 PLate 0 PCount 0 gt Eo IE 1 15 0 Each time a new mask is written into the me iScale
311. s between 25 dB and 50 dB down from max input voltage Digital I O LED Indicators The digital I O LED indicators are located directly below the VFD and DSP status LEDs and display information relative to the digital I O contained on the RZ6 There are 8 LEDs one for each bit addressable digital I O channel Each LED may display one of four states The following tables illustrate the possible display options and their associated descriptions Light Pattern Description Dim Green Bit is configured for output and is currently a logical low 0 Solid Green Bit is configured for output and is currently a logical high 1 Dim Red Bit is configured for input and is currently a logical low 0 Solid Red Bit is configured for input and is currently a logical high 1 Analog Input Fiber Optic Port LED Indicator A single green LED indicator is provided for the fiber optic input port on the RZ6 A P1 When lit the LED signifies a Medusa preamplifier is correctly synced with the RZ6 System 3 Manual 1 32 RZ Z Series Processors RZ6 Multi I O Technical Specifications The RZ6 can be equipped with a fiber optic input port which may be used with a four channel Medusa preamplifier Specifications for the A D converters of those devices are found under the preamplifier s technical specifications DSP 400 MHz DSPs 2 4 GFLOPS Peak Up to four Memory 64 MB SDRAM per DSP D A 2 channels 24 bit sigma delta Sample Rate Up to 195312 50 kHz Frequency
312. s for input from electrodes Front panel numbering of these inputs corresponds to TDT amplifier channels DB37 connector Pe DB26 connectors Pe System 3 Manual Probe Adapters and Connectors 10 17 DB37 Pinout GND CRETOGODSOSDDOKOGOGOOCD 37 36 SSMA SBS 2S VRS ORSINI o E AE c SIR 42 S222 V2 0 Analog Input REF PinINameDescription Pin NameDescription 1 Al 20 A2 2 A3 21 A4 3 A5 22 A6 4 A7 23 A8 5 JA9 Analog input channels 24 JA10 prasama Beha pretigis TEMATS eee 26 A14 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 8 JA15 27 A16 9 JA17 28 A18 10 A19 29 A20 11 A21 30 A22 12 A23 31 A24 13 A25 32 A26 14 A27 33 A28 15 A29 34 A30 16 A31 35 A32 17 NA 36 INA Not Used 18 INA pees 37 REF Reference 19 GND Ground Note No connections should be made to pins 17 18 and 36 System 3 Manual 10 18 Adapters and Connectors System 3 Manual Part 11 Microwire Arrays System 3 Manual 11 2 Microwire Arrays System 3 Manual Microwire Arrays 11 3 ZIF Clip Based Microwire Arrays Part Number ZIF2010 ZIF2011 ZIF2030 ZIF3030 Standard 50 um polyimide insulated tungsten microwire gives the arrays excellent recording characteristics and the rigidity of tungsten facilitates insertion The standard ZIF2010 array consists of sixteen channels conf
313. s measured under specific controlled conditions are provided for comparison purposes Maximizing the Life of the Speakers The TDT electrostatic speakers are designed to operate with input signals between 4 and 110 kHz Playing signals below 4 kHz causes a large amount of harmonic distortion that degrades the operation of the speakers over time causing a decreased power output across all frequencies Broadband Signals When using broadband signals limit the amount of energy in the low frequency ranges whenever possible For example band limiting noise stimuli with a high pass filter at 4 kHz or above the higher the better for the life of the speakers and limiting complex harmonic signals such as frequency sweeps to frequencies above 4 kHz can increase the effective life of the speakers Click Stimuli ABR experiments in both human and mouse studies typically use a 100 microsecond click stimuli which has most of its energy in the 2 kHz to 8 kHz range Because click stimuli are short impulses that generate signals across a broad frequency range band limiting the frequencies is not feasible TDT recommends that users attenuate the click stimuli so as to minimize the potential effects on the speaker Also note that the shorter the stimuli the flatter the frequency response and the greater the energy in the higher frequencies Moreover the shorter the duration of the click the less total energy it has for a given voltage Routine Care and
314. several versions of each of the probes TDTs CHx2 NN is designed for use with Rev 2 of the 32 channel NeuroNexus acute probe Check the NeuroNexus website for pin diagrams Also see MCMap in the RPvdsEx User Guide for information on how to re map channel numbers System 3 Manual 10 6 Adapters and Connectors ZIF Clip Headstage Adapters ZIF Clip headstage adapters are available for use with a variety of electrode styles When using adapters keep in mind that standard operation differential vs single ended may vary for acute and chronic preparations Carefully note and understand the use of the ground G and reference R connections provided on each adapter Standard operation for ZIF Clip headstages is differential Headstage adapters can be configured for single ended operation by tying ground G and reference R connections together on the adapter if available Refer to the electrode manufacturer s documentation for information on single ended or differential configurations Note When using these adapters with NeuroNexus Gray Matter or CyberKinetics probes keep in mind that there may be updates to pin configurations Check the suppliers website for pin diagrams Also see MCMap for a description and examples on how to re map channel numbers ZCA DIP16 ZIF Clip Headstage to Acute Probe 16 Channels This adapter allows the user to connect a 16 channel acute probe such as NeuroNexus to a 16 channel ZIF Cli
315. sfer the signal best when it is kept straight Note that the speaker performance is dependent on the coupling system used and the ear of the subject Users should test the device under experimental conditions to System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 5 ensure it meets their requirements Technical Specifications measured under specific controlled conditions are provided for comparison purposes Technical Specifications FF1 Technical Specifications Frequency Response 8dB from 1 kHz to 50 kHz Crossover Frequency 500 Hz High Pass Weight 550 Grams Dimensions 7 62 cm outside diameter x 3 81 cm deep Typical Output 1 V 108 dB SPL at 10 cm from 1 kHz to 50 kHz peak input THD lt 1 from 1kHz to 50 kHz Impedance 4 Ohms Free field Frequency Response at 10 cm FF1 Frequency Response dB SPL es 2 1000 10000 50000 Hz FF1 measurements typical at 10 cm using 4V input System 3 Manual 14 6 Transducers and Amplifiers Harmonic Distortion at 4V Peak 100 FF1 Harmonic Distortion THD 0 1 0 01 0 001 1000 10000 50000 CF1 Technical Specifications Frequency Response Crossover Frequency Weight Dimensions Typical Output 1 V peak input THD System 3 Manual 24dB from 1 kHz to 40 kHz 500 Hz High Pass 590 Grams 7 62 cm outside diameter x 8 89 cm deep 120 dB SPL fr
316. sociated requirements Jumper Connections Operation Shorts headstage Ground and Reference inputs together yielding single ended amplification of signals relative to ground Shorts headstage Reference input to the pin labeled Ref a low impedance site on the probe yielding differential amplification of signals relative to the voltage of the Ref site Headstage Ground and Reference separated and Ref pin is not used yielding differential amplification of signals relative to the voltage of the Reference Requirements Connect common Ground Reference wire to the headstage or electrode Connect Ground wire to the headstage or electrode Connect both a Ground wire and a Reference wire to the headstage or electrode System 3 Manual 8 18 High Impedance Headstages RA16CH LP16CH 16 Channel Chronic Headstage Overview The 16 Channel Chronic headstages are recommended for extracellular neurophysiology using silicon electrodes metal microelectrodes or microwire arrays with input impedances from 20 kOhm to 5 Mohm LP16CH RA16CH The 16 channel chronic headstages come in two configurations RA16CH standard profile and LP16CH low profile The headstages provide the same performance with the smaller footprint of the LP16CH yielding better clearance in tight applications The headstages use a low profile female Omnetics connector that is compatible with the NeuroNexus chronic electrodes Users can also r
317. st confirm the reset by pressing and releasing the Select knob While the module is resetting Reseting appears on the display To exit without resetting turn the Select knob until Cancel appears on the display and then press and release the Select knob or press the Esc button Cancels the reset System 3 Manual 12 8 Attenuator Setting Base Attenuation When operating the PAS manually in User Attenuation UserAtt mode the Base Attenuation BaseAtt parameter can be used to apply a fixed attenuation level to the signal Any additional attenuation to the signal is displayed relative to this base level within a range of 0 to 120 dB For example if the BaseAtt is set to 6 dB when the user sets the attenuation to 3 dB the actual attenuation applied is 9 dB This feature can be used to calibrate a number of different experimental setups attenuating each by a different base attenuation so as to provide identical signal levels when each is set to 0 0 dB UserAtt When this feature is in use a symbol is displayed on the left side of the display Note that the Base Attenuation and Reference parameters can be used simultaneously When both of these features are in use the letter R and a symbol are displayed on the left side of the display See Display Icons for more information To set the base attenuation 1 Access the UserAtt mode by turning the Select knob until UserAtt appears on the display then pressing and releasing
318. status of the individual processors Status Lights STATUS OOOO0O0O M1234 Up to five LEDs report the status of the multiprocessor s individual DSPs When the device is turned on they will glow steadily If the demands on a DSP exceed 99 of its capacity on any given cycle the corresponding LED will flash very rapidly 3 times per second Front Panel VFD Screen Idle ul ul u2 u3 u4 All MODE Cyc 8 a a a ax m The front panel VFD screen reports detailed information about the status of the system The display includes two lines The top line reports the system mode Run or Idle and displays heading labels for the second line The second line reports the user s choice of status indicators for each DSP followed by an aggregate value The user can cycle through the various status indicators using the Mode button to the left of the display Push and release the button to change the display or push and hold the button for one second then release to automatically cycle through each of the display options The VFD screen may also report system status such as booting status Booting DSP or alert the user when the device s microcode needs to be reprogrammed Firmware Blank System 3 Manual 2 28 RX Processors Status Indicators Cye cycle usage Ovr processor cycle overages Bus percentage of internal device s bus capacity used VO percentage of data transfer capacity used Important Note The status lights
319. supports ActiveX Before designing or debugging circuits for the button box ensure that the button box is connected to the RP2 1 or RV8 that will be used for control and that the button box power is turned on The buttons will only operate when the button box is powered System 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 5 The remaining button box help topics provide the necessary information for basic button box control including circuits that acquire button responses and test for correct or incorrect responses to button presses The information provided assumes some knowledge of RPvdsEx and possibly ActiveX Users with custom built button boxes should modify circuits based on the configuration of the buttons Acquiring BBox Button Presses The most efficient way to acquire button presses is with the WordIn component in RPvdsEx The WordIn checks all the digital input lines and returns a 16 bit value from the digital line addressed Input values are generated as a bit mask that determines which buttons were pressed Users can also record the inputs from the individual digital I O lines The RPvdsEx examples in this topic use the WordIn method seseeee Button Numbering 0 1 Bit mask Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 When Pressed BBox Organization of Buttons Note In order for the buttons to operate the button box power supply must be turned on Many of the circuits shown below as well as some MATLAB examples for use with ActiveX controls are include
320. t and MCzHopPick Up to 126 pairs can be used in a single RPvdsEx circuit Bus Related Delays The zHop Bus introduces a single sample delay However this delay is taken care of for the user in OpenEx when Timing and Data Saving macros are used RZ5 Features DSP Status Displays The RZ5 include status lights and a VFD Vacuum Fluorescent Display screen to report the status of the individual processors Status Lights PROCESSORS Two LEDs report the status of the multiprocessor s individual DSPs and will be lit solid green when the corresponding DSP is installed and running The corresponding LED will be lit dim green if the cycle usage on a DSP is 0 If the demands on a DSP exceed 99 of its capacity on any given cycle the corresponding LED will flash red 1 time per second Front Panel VFD Screen Idle ul u2 All Cyc 8 0x MODE The front panel VFD screen reports detailed information about the status of the system The display includes two lines The top line reports the system mode Run Idle or Reset and displays heading labels for the second line The second line reports the user s choice of status indicators for each DSP followed by an aggregate value System 3 Manual 1 16 RZ Z Series Processors The user can cycle through the various status indicators using the Mode button to the bottom right of the display Push and release the button to change the display or push and hold the button for one se
321. t be implemented in RPvdsEx to perform the necessary scaling and to reduce redundancy in the data See HTI3 Circuit Design for more information about this processing and techniques for using the data with HRTF filter components Power and Interface The device is powered via the System 3 zBus ZB1 and requires an interface to the PC If the HTI3 is housed in one of several ZB1 caddies in your system ensure that it is connected in the interface loop according to the installation instructions Gigabit Optibit or USB Interface To Base The HTI3 sends information to the base station over a fiber optic cable When connecting the HTI3 to a base station make sure that the fiber optic cable is connected as shown below To Base Optical Amp aa KZA Features Reset Boresight Pressing the Reset Boresight button momentarily will issue a boresight command to the tracker unit This signal will zero the AER values respective to the boresight position Holding the button down for one second will issue a reset command to the tracker unit and undo the boresight command The AER values will now be returned with respect to the default initial positioning To Tracker The To Tracker DB9 input connects the motion tracker to the HTI3 Note When using the FOB or miniBIRD motion tracker data will be properly transferred to the interface if only pins 2 3 and 5 are connected A special connector is shipped with the HTI3 to make this transition from the RS
322. tage sscsscsssssssessssssssssessscsssssssssssnsssssessssesees 8 18 RA4AC Four Channel Headstage csscsscssscsssssssssscssssssessssssensssnsssssesscscsssesssscsssnsssnsesssessesesesesees 8 20 SH16 16 Channel Switchable Acute Headstage scssscssscsssssssssscsssessscssssssssessssssesssesssesssesseseees 8 22 PART9 LOW IMPEDANCE HEADSTAGEG ccecceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 RAALI Four Channel Headstage ssccsssssssssssssscssscssssssssssssecssesssessssesssesenessseesssesecssoesscessessenseees 9 3 RALI6LI 16 Channel Headstage ssscsscsssssscssssssssssscssscssssssssssssssnsesssssssssssnessssssesesseneesssesesssenseens 9 5 RAI6LI D 16 Channel Headstage with Differential cscssssssssssssssessssssssesssessseseesssesseesssseese 9 7 PART10 ADAPTERS AND CONNECTORS cccccscccceessseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 1 Probe AGAPters sesseciescessicasessodsevsosecesnosstsvegevdgceapeuctsuctcovecendessescasesdesesses suseese ceapesseswessuseecssentedeeecodesvcnessoscases 10 3 ZIF Clip Headstage Adapters scaicecasssssosspscusanysusconsssuiasscssoancossy iesa cj esas anslay sn povdbes iasicddosnoonsiviasscaveuasess 10 6 Preamplifier Adapters cscsscsssssscsssccssccssessscssssesessssssesssssssesessssssssscesssnsessssssssesssessnsesssssessenseees 10 12 COMMCCLONS A T TE E E dveseapeds coucsecbeseepaasseedsnsbasedeseessentseodssocsessadeesbaseaneioeseaete 10 15 Splitter S
323. tal Out Lights There is one digital out LED for each digital output bit Each LED will light when a logical high 1 is sent out on the corresponding digital output bit The digital out lights can be used to indicate clipping or spike detection on a channel Trigger Allows input of an external digital trigger Link and Amplifier Ports The Base Station has two sets of fiber optic ports The Link port outputs the signals that are input to the amplifier port This allows multiple base stations to be linked for complex or high channel count processing The Amplifier port is used to connect the base station to a Medusa preamplifier for the acquisition of analog signals Stereo Output The stereo output samples from the first two channels of the digital to analog converters DACs so that users can monitor signal properties with headphones or speakers The left speaker monitors channel one of the DAC and the right speaker monitors channel two Use the Ch channel parameter on the channel inputs to change which analog channels are being monitored Analog and Digital Outputs Each base station comes with 16 digital output bits and eight analog output channels See the technical specifications for DB25 pinout Each DAC uses 18 bit sigma delta parts for high quality signal conversion Sigma delta converters provide superior conversion quality and extended useful bandwidths at the cost of an inherent fixed group delay For the RA16BA the DAC Dela
324. tave at 7 5 kHz However the sigma delta ADC s have a fixed group delay of 20 samples compared to four samples for the RA16PA When using the RA16SD this group delay must be taken into account when the data is displayed or acquired for example adding a SampDelay to the RPvdsEx circuit Clip Warning Lights When the input to a channel is greater than 3db from the preamplifier s maximum voltage input a light on the top of the amplifier is illuminated The first column of lights corresponds to channels 1 8 and the second column corresponds to channels 9 16 The clip warning light indicator can be turned off by flipping a switch on the end of the amplifier System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 21 Power Light The power light is in the top corner of the amplifier It is illuminated when the device is on It flashes quickly if the battery is low It flashes slowly while the battery is charging Headstage Connector The headstage connector is a 25 pin 16 channel connector Information on the pin inputs is provided with the technical specifications Base Station Connector To Base One end of the fiber optic cable connects to the amplifier and the other end connects to the amplifier input on the base station MEDUSA Preamp RAIEPA 16 Chaw On POWER Leos x TT Power A switch on the back powers up the amplifier The fiber connector at the right will be illuminated when the amplifier is on LEDs This switch turns th
325. tbenteadcnasmriveiecad 16 1 PIMIZREIAY AE E E EAE sesoseasdececeovessouevecece ctancesntesctecccavcce secesseeactecteuasaccsactsenscesecosssece sca deseseoseeeve 16 3 SMS Signal Mixer csscsssssscssscssscssssssssssessessssssesssenesssesecsssessssssesssesssnsesssessssesenesenesssesseessessscesseseens 16 9 PP16 Patch Pamel scsscccscsssssssccsssssscsssssssessnssssssssssecsssesssssssssnsesesessssssssessnesssessssesesssessnsscssonseoes 16 12 PP24 Patch Patel s ccscecssossssesssesssesssesssesacsscovssesecssossuceostsecesetessecctsessesecessncaessecsvectecctaasssossessessesecesssecse 16 17 ETM 1 Experiment Test Module cscsscssssssscsssssssssscssscsssessssssssssessssssssessnesssesssssseessssssnssssseseees 16 23 PART 17 PC INTERFACES wiisusaicicentsavesavdearsiesiaavsnendetuctarieavenandeiccauussivanens 17 1 Interface Transfer Rates sccccsssssssssssssssesscssscsscsssssssssesssssesnsesesesssssssnessnesssesseessessesssessonsesnsesssees 17 3 Optibit Interface ccsccsscssessssssecssscssssssssssesscsssssssssssnssssesesessssesesesenesssesssesseessessesseessscsesnsessseonsees 17 5 System 3 Manual Gigabit Interface cssccssssscssscsssssssssscsscsssesssessssssesssessssesssessssessesseesssessesssnsscnsessssssssssesecssosseesseseees 17 7 UZ2 USB 2 0 Unter iace vissssssscccscssciscseose sedeecshansssesesvusssecsessessessdesoeecvbecd sutssseasssuos sssustenecssecdsevesssoasivesesseesevee 17 9 PART18 T
326. te Male DB25 Z 2 D Stim Output Female DB25 ss zZ on MS16 Stimulus Isolator Sa a g SN Jumper Default Position G Ref Shorts ground and reference to yield single ended operation Note this is the only supported mode of operation 5 Connect the Stimulus Isolator s STIM OUTPUT or the ACC16 s STIM ELE connector to the stimulating electrodes using your preferred method such as direct wiring the SH16 switching headstage or a custom pass through connector available from TDT See the Stimulus Isolator Technical Specifications section page 6 18 for pinouts 6 Power on the base station then power on the stimulus isolator using the power switch on the isolator s back panel Note Ensure that the rechargeable batteries onboard Li Ion and NC48 are fully charged before starting your protocol 7 The hardware is ready for use If using the system with other devices such as a switching headstage or preamplifiers see the documentation for those devices for hardware connection information System 3 Manual Stimulus Isolator 6 7 Stimulus Isolator Features Analog Outputs Stim Outputs The Stimulus Isolator is equipped with four or 16 analog current output channels arranged in four channel banks that can be powered down when not in use Channels can operate in three modes Stimulate Reference or Open Simultaneously setting any channel in a bank to both Stimulate and Referenc
327. tem sampling rate is set to a value greater than 24 414 kHz High Voltage Input Back Panel The stimulator uses either the NC48 or the HV250 High voltage Battery Pack for stimulation The battery pack should be connected via the Battery connection on the back panel Warning The HV250 battery packs are capable of delivering up to 250 Volts DC at high currents Shorting the device can cause damage to the device and injury to the user Always use caution when handling or connecting the devices Power Switch Back Panel The Power switch turns the stimulus isolator power off or on The fiber connector on the front panel will be illuminated when the stimulator is on Software Control Operation of the MicroStimulator system is controlled via an RPvdsEx circuit loaded and run on the connected base station processor RZ5 or RX7 TDT recommends using the MS16_Control Macro pictured below in your control circuits This macro simplifies setup of stimulus and reference channels stimulus signal output and power conservation The macro is also used to configure the correct scale factors and poke addresses for the RZ5 or RX7 processor Select the correct device in the macro settings dialog MS16_Control Single Ended Stim Mode RZ5 When the MS16_ Control macro is not sufficient for your task a circuit can be designed using the Poke component to control the system This component writes to special memory locations on System 3 devices
328. ters and Connectors Preamplifier Adapters Each TDT headstage is designed for use with either a Legacy or Z Series preamplifier Preamplifier adapters allow TDT headstages to be used with a variety of preamplifiers by converting the type of preamplifier connector DBF MiniDBM Low Impedance Headstage to PZ Preamplifier 16 channels This adapter connects a low impedance headstage RA4LI or RA16LI to a PZ preamplifier Male Mini26 connects to PZ preamplifier Female DB25 connects to low impedance headstage MiniDBF DBM Z Series Headstage Female Mini DB26 to Male DB25 Cable Adapter This adapter converts a Z Series headstage Mini D connector to a DB25 connector for use with a Medusa RA16PA preamplifier Male DB25 Connector connects to RA16PA Female Mini DB26 Connector connects to Z Series headstage System 3 Manual Probe Adapters and Connectors 10 13 PLX ZCA Z Series Headstage to Plexon Preamplifier This adapter connects a Z Series headstage to a Plexon preamplifier Each PLX ZCA adapter board connects 16 channels Multiple adapter boards can be stacked for a higher channel count and are fastened together using two screws on either side of the adapter board An external power source is provided to power the headstage Female Mini DB26 Connector Connects to Z Series Headstage External Power Connector Connect to 10 Pin Header I e ette EZES IIL Square denotes channel 1
329. th 0 5mm diameter male pins with 0 5mm diameter male pins Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels TDT probe adapters are designed for specific TDT headstage to probe connections If you are using a third party headstage please contact TDT support for assistance ACx2 NN 16 Channel Acute Headstage to 32 Channel Acute Probe This adapter connects a 32 channel acute NeuroNexus probe to two 16 channel acute TDT headstages RA16AC RA16AC4 Standard operation with the NeuroNexus probe is differential If you wish to use the Reference pad on the probe do not tie G and R together Front Back 32 31 30 29 28 26 24 23 22 21 G 27 25 20 19 18 17 Ch 17 32 R Ref 6 8 131415 16 123 465 7 9 101112 0 5mm Male 0 5mm Male 3 DIP Socket Header 40 pin Samtec DIP Socket Header Female connectors compatible FOLC High Density with 0 5mm diameter male pins Socket Strip Pinouts are looking into the connector and reflect the preamplifier channels TDT probe adapters are designed for specific TDT headstage to probe connections If you are using a third party headstage please contact TDT support for assistance Important When using these adapters with NeuroNexus probes keep in mind that there are several versions of each of the probes TDTs ACx2 NN is designed for use with Rev 2 of the 32 channel NeuroNexus acute probe Check the NeuroNexus website for pin diagrams Also see MCMap in the RPvdsEx User Guide fo
330. the WindowsXP and 2000 Standby and Hibernate features We recommend configuring PC Power Options to never use these modes for any PC used to run TDT applications Problems loading drivers may occur when the C WINNT inf folder is not visible In Windows Explorer choose Tools Folder Options then choose View Hidden Files and Folders and select Make Visible System 3 Manual 17 8 PC Interfaces When data is being transferred from the TDT hardware to the computer CPU usage on the computer goes up to 100 The computer is still usable can ran other programs etc despite the high CPU usage however other programs that are running on the computer may slow down After installing the Gigabit PCI card in your computer there may be a conflict with how the PC communicates with the card and other devices in the system This could lead to the following error message when performing a transfer test in zBUSmon System Test Error Cycle power on system and test again If you experience system problems and find the IRQ number to be the same on another device then you should move the PIS card to another PCI slot in your machine System 3 Manual PC Interfaces 17 9 UZ2 USB 2 0 Interface UZ2 US82 0 28us8 INTERFACE RooT Porr Overview The USB 2 0 zBus Interface mounts in the rear bay of a zBus device chassis and handles communication and data transfer between your computer and zBus mounted programmable devices such real time proc
331. the dB rolloff for the RX6 with varying sampling frequencies for both D A and A D The sample delay remains relatively stable for varying frequencies Average dB Rolloff T T T 0 200 0 300 0 400 Hyquist Ratio H2 Hz System 3 Manual 2 24 RX Processors DB25 Connector Pinout TDT recommends the PP24 patch panel for accessing the RX6 I O Digital I O GND Byte B 63 4 6 Byte A 0 0 0 010101019010 eI CIKI KAG GO 15 GA Bit Addr PinName Description 1 BAO Bit Addressable gt BA2 digital I O 3 Baa Bits 0 2 4 and 6 4 IBA6 5 GND Digital I O Ground 6 Al Byte A 7 A3 Word addressable digital I O 8 A5 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 9 JA7 10 Bl yte B 11 B3 Word addressable 12 BS digital I O 13 B7 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 System 3 Manual Pin Name Description 14 BAI Bit Addressable 15 BA3 digital I O 16 BA5 Bits 1 3 5 and 7 17 BA7 18 AO IByte A 19 A2 ord addressable digital I O peas Bits 0 2 4 and 6 21 A6 22 BO Byte B 23 B2 ord addressable digital I O eae B3 Bits 0 2 4 and 6 25 B6 RX Processors 2 25 RX7 Stimulator Base Station S RRF Grennaree nass Stanon Overview The RX7 base station is a high performance processor available with either two or five 100 MHz 1600 MFLOPS Sharc DSPs You can use the base station s
332. the scale factor of the channel input to be modified at run time p 1 2 0 Ch 1 ScaleAdd a Be Shft 0 1 1 0 d System 3 Manual 5 28 Preamplifiers RA8GA Technical Specifications Technical specifications for the RA8GA Adjustable Gain Preamplifier A D 8 channels 16 bit PCM Maximum Voltage In Variable gain settings allow 10V 1 V or 100 mV Frequency Response DC 7 5 kHz 2 order 12 dB per octave S N typical 70 dB 1 V 1000 kHz at 1 V Gain Setting THD typical 0 01 A D Sample Rate 6 12 or 25 kHz Cross Talk lt 70 dB DC Nyquist Input Impedance 10 kOhm DC Offset lt 5 mV at 10 V lt 3 mV at 1 V and 100 mV Analog Input Pinout Diagram soro B D BO JO 20 49 48 47 46 45 44 DAZ Analog Input Pin Name Description Pin Name Description 1 Al 14 A2 2 JA3 15 A4 Analog Input Channels nalog Input Channels 3 A5 16 A6 4 JA7 17 A8 5 AGND Ground 18 INA 6 NA 19 7 20 8 21 9 z2 Not Used 10 Not Used 53 11 24 12 25 13 System 3 Manual Preamplifiers 5 29 TB32 32 Channel Digitizer Overview The TB32 32 channel digitizer interfaces directly with Triangle BioSystems Inc TBSI wireless headstage and receiver allowing up to 31 channels of recording from a free moving subject TBSI s wireless headstage captures the analog signals
333. these in our lab to date Attach the array to the skull using a thin layer of dental acrylic and the methods described by Cooley and Vanderwolf Do not build up a large base of acrylic until the ground wire s of the array have been attached by wrapping them around the stainless skull screws Make very sure that the ground wire s make good electrical contact to the screws Pot the entire array screw complex with dental acrylic using the methods described by Cooley and Vanderwolf In our hands explanted arrays come out of the brain with roughly the same impedances they went in with Here recording duration seems to be more limited by surgical technique capsule formation than by the arrays themselves We recommend ethylene oxide gas sterilization of the arrays and good sterile surgical technique We have obtained good recordings in rat and mouse cortex for several weeks using only alcohol sterilization of the arrays we have no access to ethylene oxide An example from rat with lots of active channels 150 uV spikes on 20 uV background noise is below We have seen up to 300 uV spikes on the same noise floor Our customers have reported recordings durations of several months in rat and monkey System 3 Manual 11 10 Microwire Arrays TIME gt 100 and TIMECI05 CHAN System 3 Manual Part 12 Attenuator 12 2 Attenuator System 3 Manual Attenuator 12 3 PA5 Programmable Attenuator PAS PROGRAMMABLE ATTENUATOR fec
334. tioned either directly above or directly below the PP24 or an RZ processor positioned above the PP24 Four thumbscrews located on each corner of the PP24 front panel allow the user to slide the BNC array into the correct position to align the connector with the target device Caution The thumbscrews should never be completely removed Avoid loosening the thumbscrews too far Mapping the Inputs and Outputs for Each Device The PP24 consists of 3 banks of BNC connectors Bank A B and C Each of the banks is labeled 1 8 within the set and each BNC is also numbered as part of the entire group from 1 24 System 3 Manual 16 18 Signal Handling DOO COSTS OTO PS KOKA 66S The following table shows the configuration of the BNC connectors for each I O connector of the RX and RZ devices RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8 Digital I O Connector RX5 RX7 Multi I O Connector Analog I O Block B Analog Output Block C Channels 9 16 Digital I O Connector Analog I O Connector Analog Outputs Channels 9 12 For more information see the diagrams for the desired device below Note that the RX5 and RX7 use the same Digital and Multi I O mappings System 3 Manual Signal Handling 16 19 Mapping RX5 or RX7 I O Note The PP24 can be mounted above or below the RX5 The diagram below maps the RX5 or RX7 Digital I O connections to the PP24 All digital bits are programmable as input or output
335. top and twist the knob clockwise to secure the MEA inside the interface housing System 3 Manual MicroElectrode Array Interface 7 5 Important The securing knob on the MEA turns on a screw that allows for pressure adjustment between the MEA plate and the MZ60 interface contact pins The pressure should be set to achieve only light contact between the spring loaded contact pins and the MEA electrode plate enough pressure to visually depress the spring contacts Excessive pressure may cause damage to the device or MEA plate Refer to the vendor s specifications of the chosen Microelectrode Array MEA plate regarding the MEA pinouts and technical specifications of the electrodes To connect the system hardware 1 Ensure that the TDT drivers PC interface and device caddies are installed setup and configured according to the System 3 Install Guide provided with your system 2 Connect the MZ60 Interface to the PZ2 Amplifier via the MZ60 interface cable provided Attach the 68 pin D Sub connector on the interface cable to the corresponding connector on the MZ60 3 Attach each of the labeled Mini DB26 connectors to the corresponding channel bank connector on the PZ amplifier 4 Connect the PZ2 amplifier to the RZ2 processor using the provided fiber optic cable The fiber optic wires are keyed and color coded to reduce connection errors 5 Ifheating is desired connect the HC10 temperature controller to the 9 pin connector
336. tor on the front of the RZ2 and ports A and C are available through BNC connectors on the front panel S s See RZ2 Technical Specifications page 1 10 for the DB25 pinout and BNC channel Digital VO mapping See the Digital I O Circuit Design section of the RPvdsEx Manual for more information on programming the digital I O Digital Description DB25 BNCs Notes Configuration T O Port A bits0 7 Yes Yes byte nee control addressable Port B bits 0 7 Yes No byte addressable Port C bits 0 7 Yes Yes bit addressable Note For more information on addressing and Digital I O see the RPvdsEx Manual The data direction for the Digital I O is configured using the RZ2_Control macro in RPvdsEx Double click the macro to access the settings on the Digital I O tab The RZ2_ Control macro also offers a Direction Control Mode parameter that enables the macro inputs and allows the user to control data direction dynamically For more information on using the RZ2_ Control macro see the help provided in the macro s properties dialog box System 3 Manual 1 10 RZ Z Series Processors Technical Specifications Specifications for the RZ2 Z Series Base Station Note Technical Specifications for amplifier A D converters are found under the preamplifier s technical specifications DSP 400 MHz DSPs 2 4 GFLOPS peak per DSP Two Four or Eight Memory 64 MB SDRAM per DSP D A 8 channels 16 bit PCM Sample Rate Up to 48828 125 Hz
337. trigger type 128 mTrig enabled The multiple trigger does not require the addition of the trigger component The circuit runs when the trigger pulses high The RPvdsEx circuit will trigger for a near infinite number of times before stopping Arbitrary Sample Rates The Barracuda is the only System 3 module that has arbitrary sample rates To set the arbitrary sample click Device Setup on the Implement menu and then set the sample rate in the Arbitrary Sample Rate box To check the true sample rate click Check Realizable This will display the true sample rate Sample periods are in increments of 40 nanoseconds To calculate the true sample rate determine the sample period in seconds that you require and then divide by 1 sample period These circuits work only with the Barracuda If the circuit is run on a different RP module it will give the following error xi Loading Circuit 21 Failed to load the circuit into device 2Bus Error Call RPXsetSFREQ zError Unknown command code received Output Task List RP Control Object files RCO will produce similar problems If you attempt to run an RCO file compiled RPvdsEx files for use with ActiveX controls and turn key software programs that has an arbitrary sample rate on another RP device the same error will occur Using the TimeStamp Component The TimeStamp component is an event timer with submicrosecond accuracy With other RP systems the resolution of
338. ts and Outputs for Each Device Each device has a unique input and output configuration The table below shows the configuration of the BNC connectors Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Cl Trigger Channels 1 8 Channels 1 8 C2 Volt out 3 3v Analog Outputs Digital Outputs Digital Outputs Analog Digital I O Channels 1 8 Channels 0 7 Connector Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Digital I O Connector Channels 8 15 Analog Outputs Not Used Channels 1 8 Analog Input Not Used Channels 1 8 Analog Output Channels 0 7 Analog Output Channels 1 8 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8 Digital I O Connector RX5 RX7 Analog Outputs Digital I O Byte C Digital I O Byte D Multi I O Connector A2 A4 A6 A8 Channels 16 23 Channels 24 31 Channels 1 4 RX8 Analog I O BlockB Analog Output Block Cc Analog I O Connector Channels 1 8 Channels 9 16 Channels 17 24 To use the RV8D Optional I O analog output connector move all the DIP switch postions to the OFF setting on the PP16 Once the switches are in this position digital inputs 8 15 are not accessible Do NOT attempt to output analog signals when the switches are in the ON position System 3 Manual 16 14 Signal Handling Mapping RA16BA I O The diagram below maps the RA16BA Digital I O connection to the PP16 RA16 MEDUSA BASE STATION TRIG C 5000 Digital VO Connector labeled RA16 PP16 Al A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 Bi B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 Ci C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
339. ts are used to indicate the power status or provide a clip warning for the connected amplifiers When an amplifier is not connected the Amp light will flash in a slow steady pattern The light is lit when the amplifier is connected and begins to flash quickly when the voltage on the battery for the corresponding amplifier is low When any channel on the connected amplifier produces a voltage approaching the maximum input of the amplifier the corresponding light will flash rapidly to warn that clipping may occur if the signal exceeds the maximum input voltage See the corresponding preamplifier section for more information on input range and clip warnings Important Note The Li ion batteries voltage decreases rapidly once the battery low light is on Data acquisition will suffer if the battery is not charged soon after the light goes on Amplifier Status Patterns Light Pattern Amplifier Status Very slow flash 1 every two seconds Slow flash 1 per second Connected and charging Very rapid flash Clip Warning Note If the amplifier appears to be connected and the amplifier status light is flashing slowly check to ensure that the device is connected properly Bits Lights The RX7 s eight Bits lights are user configurable By default the Bits lights indicate the logic level light when high for the eight bit addressable digital I O lines The Bits lights can also be configured to provide information about amplifier status or act as l
340. ts complex research multimodal and experimental paradigms on a single high bandwidth device The RX6 equipped with either two or five 100 MHz 1600 MFLOPS Share DSPs combines a powerful multiprocessor architecture and high speed data transfer with two channels of 24 bit sigma delta D A converters and two channels of 24 bit sigma delta A D converters to provide superior high frequency signal generation and acquisition Optionally the RX6 can be equipped with a fiber optic input allowing it to serve as a base station for a Medusa preamplifier Power and Communication The RX6 mounts in a System 3 zBus Powered Device Chassis ZB1PS and communicates with the PC using the Gigabit PI5 FIS or Optibit POS FOS PC interfaces The ZB1PS is UL compliant see the ZB PS Operations Manual for power and safety information Software Control Software control is implemented with circuit files developed using TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx Circuits are loaded to the processor through TDT run time applications or custom applications This manual includes device specific information needed during circuit design For circuit design techniques and a complete reference of the RPvdsEx circuit components see the RPvdsEx Manual RX Architecture Each RX multiprocessor device is equipped with either two or five digital signal processors DSPs The multi DSP architecture allows processing tasks to be distributed across multiple processors and enables
341. ts device 3 0 selects channel 1 48 selects device 4 ______pgm i6 NUl 15 selects channel 16 D 1 14 0 Asoftware 1 16 0 1 21 0 M Kipi trigger sets the ET a channel and ay JUL device ID 1 15 0 OPhse 0 Sre Softt fL Gen 1 22 0 i Cos2Gate 49 Q Ch 1 1 18 0 1 19 0 Tri 10 l gt b TTLDelay 6 Schmitt trl Closed J 1 23 0 Tdel 1 oThi 100 Tlo 10 If signal play out occurs during the selection an audible click will be heard a TTLDelay component is used to delay the start of the signal play out Controlling the PM2R with WordOut In this example a WordOut is used to control the PM2R via an RP2 1 from within RPvdsEx This simplified format decreases cycle usage An additional iScaleAdd is required because the BitOut and WordOut components function differently and should not be used in the same circuit As before a software trigger initiates the start of the stimulus presentation The triggered signal adds 64 to the output to change the channel System 3 Manual 16 8 Signal Handling 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 17 0 a Consti amp iScaleAdd iScaleAdd M K 0 d SF 1 SF 1 Shft 0 Shft 0 e N y hannel Sele Device Selec 1 2 0 6 TTL2int HiVal 64 f 1 1 0 1 12 0 Tone bAmp 1 OShft 0 OFreq 1000 gt Phse 0 eR Runy 1 13 0 Cos2Gate Ch 1 1 9 0 1 10 0 Prio o TTLDelay
342. ts lights indicate the logic level light when high for the eight bit addressable digital I O lines The Bits lights can also be configured to provide information about amplifier status or act as logic level lights for any of the other two bytes of digital I O Using the Bits Lights to Display Amplifier Status Note Because clip warning and amplifier status are always displayed using the Amp lights located directly to the right of each fiber optic port TDT recommends using the Bits lights for other applications See Amp Status and Clip Warning Lights for more information Power Status Clip Warning When the Bits lights are configured to display the amplifier status the left column of lights indicates the power status and the right column indicates a clip warning for the amplifier The table above shows the light pattern and corresponding amplifier status for the power status lights 0 3 Clip lights flash very rapidly when any channel on the connected amplifier produces a voltage approaching the maximum input of the amplifier Analog Input Output The RX6 has two channels of 24 bit sigma delta D A and two channels of 24 bit sigma delta A D each accessible through BNC connectors Sigma delta converters provide superior conversion quality and extended useful bandwidths at the cost of an inherent fixed group delay The RX6 DAC Delay is 43 samples and the RX6 ADC Delay is 70 samples System 3 Manual 2 18 RX Processors This
343. ts via the DB9 connector directly to the digital input output port on the back panel of the RM1 or RM2 with the supplied cable See Configuring an RM Processor for the RBOX4 page 15 13 for set up information Connecting the RBOX_MISC to an RxX series processor An RBOX can be requested for use with RX devices and will connect via the DB25 connector directly to the digital input output port on an RX series processor with the supplied cable See Configuring an RX Processor for the RBOX below for set up information Buttons and LEDs The buttons and LEDs are numbered as follows Contact TDT for assistance with custom button or LED configurations i li eae 1 0 2 3 Note that the logic on the inputs to the RP RM RX processors is reversed logic Therefore when polling the lines to determine if a button has been pressed a logic high or 1 means that no button is pressed and a logic low or 0 indicates a button press System 3 Manual Subject Interfaces 15 13 Software Support The response box can be used directly with PsychRP SykoFizX or custom designed software More information on RBOX operation can be found in PsychRP Help Configuring an RM Processor for the RBOX4 The RBOX4 uses the ground connection pin 1 and the 8 bits of digital I O on an RM series processor Digital I O port Bits 0 through 3 are used as button inputs and Bits 4 through 7 are used as LED outputs To use the response box with an RM processor
344. ttom of the headstage and gently slide the holder off of the headstage Rod Length stabilizing rod is 3 with a 3 32 diameter Height Outer Width Inner Width System 3 Manual High Impedance Headstages 8 11 ZIF Clip LED Headstages Part Number ZC16 LED ZC32 LED ZC64 LED ZIF Clip LED headstages are powered by TDTs Z Series preamplifiers and includes a built in red and green LED on each side The LEDs provide an ample amount of light for tracking test subjects and are available for 16 32 and 64 channel ZIF Clip headstages Note ZIF Clip headstage LEDs cannot be added to existing non LED headstages System 3 Manual 8 12 High Impedance Headstages RA16AC 16 Channel Acute Headstage Overview The 16 Channel acute headstages is recommended for extracellular neurophysiology using silicon electrodes metal microelectrodes or microwire arrays with recommended input impedances from 20 kOhm to 5 Mohm unless otherwise noted The 16 channel acute headstage has an 18 pin DIP connector that can be used with standard high impedance metal electrodes The pinout of the RAI16AC matches the wiring of NeuroNexus electrodes to allow for direct connection to the headstage TDT recommends connecting electrodes to an 18 pin socket and then connecting the socket to the headstage to protect the headstage from unnecessary wear and tear The RA16AC4 provides 4x gain and is used with electrodes with a recommended imped
345. tton Example 1 Displaying Signal Level in SPL A user wishes to use the PAS to display the signal level in dB Sound Pressure Level SPL for the frequency of interest Measurements with a sound level meter show a sound level of 96 4 dB SPL with 0 0 dB of attenuation in the PAS The user sets the Refrnce parameter to 96 4 The actual attenuation versus the displayed value is as follows Display Value in dB SPL Attenuation 0 96 4 50 46 4 96 4 0 System 3 Manual 12 10 Attenuator Example 2 Combining Reference and Base Attenuation When the Reference parameter is set to 110 dB and the Base Attenuation parameter is set to 6 0 dB the actual attenuation versus displayed value is as follows Display Value in dB SPL Attenuation 0 116 50 66 110 6 Using Preset Configurations The PAS Programmable Attenuator allows users to save four unique User Operation configurations that may be used in UserAttn mode These configurations may include any of the UserOps parameters such as step size base attenuation and minimum attenuation Before a configuration can be loaded it must be set up via the UserOps menu and saved via the SavePS menu Saving Preset Configurations Warning This procedure overwrites the contents of the selected preset location Be certain that the existing configuration is not needed before continuing Before a configuration can be saved it must be set up vi
346. ture As the temperature difference becomes greater additional greater than symbols are displayed up to three lt gt Thermistor temperature is stabilizing This symbol appears when the thermistor temperature is approaching the user set temperature and is within a degree Celsius of the desired temperature lt gt Thermistor temperature is stable This symbol appears when the thermistor temperature stabilized to within a half of a degree of the desired temperature lt gt Thermistor temperature is stable and equal to the user set temperature error SELECT Enter Knob The HC10 select knob allows the user to manually adjust the user defined temperature offsets and other features It is also used to allow access to the options menu Turn the Select knob to adjust temperature values or cycle through the options menu Options Menu Press the Select knob inward once to enter the options menu Turn the select knob to cycle through the options menu Press the select knob inward to choose the specified option Units By default the HC10 displays the user defined temperature in Celsius Temperature units of Fahrenheit are configured by pressing the select knob and turning it to F Press the select knob once more to set the unit display to Fahrenheit Offset The temperature offset is used to offset up to a tenth of a degree the temperature recorded by the thermistor sensor in the MZ60 This is useful if you wish to
347. uit components see MultiProcessor Circuit Design and Multi Channel Circuit Design in the RPvdsEx Manual System 3 Manual 1 4 RZ Z Series Processors RZ2 Architecture The RZ2 processor utilizes a highly optimized multi bus architecture and offers four dedicated data buses for fast efficient data handling While the operation of the system architecture is largely transparent to the user a general understanding is important when developing circuits in RPvdsEx zHop Bus Data Pipe Bus rot be qa DSP 2 Processor A DSPS Processor i ii l a pq Processor p Interface Block gt lt gt gt gt a gt DSP Block zBus Interface Block zBus Host PC Interface a al Host PC PZ Amplifier 1 0 o n F Y 5 g Optical LE g VO Port DSPS 5 Processor n 4 Q Legacy OsPs Processor 1 ir Preamp Legacy lt gt Optical VO Port C Digital VO Front Panel Ports Connectors F i Analog VO Front Panel Ports Connectors OSP 7 Processor DSPS i Processor r As shown in the diagram above the RZ2 architecture consists of three functional blocks The DSPs System 3 Manual Each DSP in the DSP Block is connected to 64 MB SDRAM and a local interface to the four data buses two buses that connect each DSP to the other functional blocks and two that handle data transfer between the DSPs as described further in Distributing Data A
348. urces when using multiple RM devices Mobile Processors Digital Input Output The Mobile Processors are equipped with 8 bits of programmable digital input output accessed via the Digital I O 9 pin connector on the back panel See the Mobile Processor Technical Specifications for a pinout diagram Note The digital lines drive about 25 milliamps Configuring the Programmable I O Lines All 8 digital lines are independently configurable as inputs or outputs By default bits 0 3 are configured as inputs and bits 4 7 are configured as outputs In RPvdsEx bits 0 7 in the bit configuration register control the configuration of the eight addressable bits as inputs or outputs Setting a bit to one will configure that bit as an output To access the bit configuration register 1 Click the Device Setup command on the Implement menu 2 Inthe Set Hardware Parameters dialog box click the Type drop down box and select RM1 or RM2 from the list 3 The dialog expands to display the Edit Bit Dir Control dialog box Set Hardware Parameters x m Device Select Type G Pate Ee Index fi Cancel m Bandwidth and Timing Standard Sample Rate 25K SR 24414 0625 Number Time Slices fio Device Configuration Registers Modify Clear Bit Dir Control System 3 Manual RM Mobile Processors 4 7 4 Click Modify to display the Edit Bit Dir Control dialog box im Ed
349. veX controls System 3 Manual RP Processors 3 17 TimeStamp The TimeStamp component is unique to the Barracuda The event timer with its submicrosecond accuracy is independent of the sample period This allows users to have separate control of both slow processes such as button presses and fast events such as neural activity all on one circuit with little or no loss of processing power PCM DAC Outs The PCM DACs have a sample delay of only 2 samples This makes them ideal for use with time critical presentation of signals These DACs are excellent for neurophysiological stimulation for examining motor behavior Multiple Triggering Multiple triggers allow users to repeatedly trigger the Barracuda without resetting Halting and then Running the chain To use multiple triggering with RPvdsEx add the bit masked value of 128 to the Special Mode value For example to configure the Barracuda for multiple triggering from the zBUSTrigA you would set the value to 1 Trigger Enabled 16 ZbusTRIGA 128 multiple triggers RPvdsEx has no way to control the number of presentations To generate an RPvdsEx circuit for multiple triggering use the Setup Device command on the Implement menu to open the Set Hardware Parameters dialog box then modify the Special Mode register Use the bit masked values for the Special Mode to make a circuit trigger off either the ZBUS or external trigger In general this will be 1 trigger mode enabled
350. vity Whenever a unit spike occurs the sensitivity threshold can be configured with the PZ2_ Control macro the LED for the corresponding channel is lit green Note The LED Indicators are also mirrored on the RZ2 LCD display Display Button The Display button located on the front panel of the PZ2 toggles the clip warning and activity display LEDs between software control and standard operation To toggle between display modes gt Press the Display button Status LED When recording the status LED located below the Display button indicates the current display mode of the LED Indicators Green Software Control of LEDs Use the PZ2 Control macro to configure LED Indicators LEDs are turned off until enabled through software control Orange LEDs enabled for standard operation In this mode LEDs are automatically enabled for default activity and clip warning display as described above External Ground A banana jack located on the back of the PZ2 directly to the right of the charger input provides connections to common ground for the first bank of channels 1 16 Battery Overview The PZ2 preamplifier features two Lithium ion batteries to allow for longer record times A three position switch selects the active battery between Bank A Bank B or both banks off Maximizing Battery Life To increase battery life individual banks of channels will only power up when a headstage is connected to the corresponding input The PZ2
351. wer The SA1 Stereo Amplifier is powered via the System 3 zBus ZBIPS No PC interface is required Features Inputs There are two inputs 10 V maximum that connect through BNC s labeled IN 1 and IN 2 Outputs The outputs are two OUT 1 and OUT 2 BNC connectors Gain A single GAIN knob provides control over the signal output level in 3 dB steps from 0 to 27 dB Ganged Output Mode A ganged output mode gives 6 dB of additional gain when connected to a speaker Split the signal to the input send one to the IN 1 and the other to IN 2 Take the outputs from OUT 1 and OUT 2 and combine them to boost the gain System 3 Manual 14 26 Transducers and Amplifiers me gal STERKO ponen s gam iow a N 32 T connector Output Input SA1 Technical Specifications Input Signal Range 10V peak Power Output 1 5 W channel into 8 ohms 6 0 W with Ganged output Spectral Variation lt 0 1 dB from 50 Hz to 200 kHz Signal Noise 116 dB 20 Hz to 80 kHz THD lt 0 02 at 1 Watt from 50 Hz to 100kHz Noise Floor 10 5 uV rms Input Impedance 10 kOhm Output Impedance 2 ohms ohm Ganged System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 27 SA8 Eight Channel Power Amplifier GAG CiIOHT CHANNEL POWER AMPUPIER j gt gt TES 4 Powee OureuTs gt o g Coe D jw PE 120 Overview The SA8 is an eight channel power amplifier that delivers up to 1 5 watts of power per speaker to up to eight
352. while collecting data PZ3 Software Control The amplifier s mode of operation shared or individual differential other options and channel mapping tasks are handled using PZ3 specific macros within the RPvdsEx control circuits running on the RZ2 Signal Processor System 3 Manual 5 12 Preamplifiers RPvdsEx includes two PZ3 specific macros e PZ3 Control macro e PZ3 ChanMap macro PZ3_ Control Macro The PZ3 Control macro should be added to your RPvdsEx circuit to configure all hardware features of the PZ3 amplifier PZ3_ Control Inputs are available on the macro for enabling disabling the LED clip status lights enabling Impedance mode for electrode channels enabling Impedance mode for alternate indifferent channels and dynamic power control for channel banks Macro Options Double clicking the macro in RPvdsEx displays the macro properties dialog box and allows users to easily modify macro properties On the Options tab in the properties dialog box e Setting the Clip LEDs On to Yes or No enables or disables the LED clip warning indicators e Differential Mode allows the user to select from Shared Shared Differential or Individual True Differential modes e Input Range may be set to either 3mV or 20mV input ranges e The Target Impedance option allows the user to specify the impedance threshold for the status LEDs for each channel bank Three inputs are available on the macro for enabling
353. will flash 3 times a second to alert the user when a device goes over the cycle usage limit even if only for a particular cycle This helps to identify periodic overages caused by components in time slices Fiber Optic Output Port Stimulator The output port labeled Stimulator can be used to transfer microstimulation waveforms to the MS16 MS4 Stimulus Isolator and or to control its digital output See the Stimulua Isolator section page 6 3 for more information Important Note This fiber optic port is disabled if the sampling rate of the system is set to a value greater than 25 kHz Fiber Optic Input Ports Amp A and Amp B The RX7 base station can acquire digitized signals from a Medusa preamplifier over a fiber optic cable This provides loss less signal acquisition between the amplifier and the base station Up to two fiber optic ports are provided to support simultaneous acquisition from up to two preamplifiers Each port can input up to 16 channels at a maximum sampling rate of 25 kHz The fiber optic ports provide oversampling See Fiber Oversampling below for more information The fiber optic ports can be used with any of the Medusa preamplifiers including the RAI6PA RA4PA or RA8GA The channel numbers for each port begin at a fixed offset regardless of the number of channels available on the connected device Channels are numbered as follows Amp A 1 16 Amp B 17 32 Fiber Oversampling acquisition only The fiber o
354. wing diagram System 3 Manual RZ Z Series Processors 1 29 4 44 03 RZ6_AudioOut Oo ie D oe TRANSDUCER Ganged Output Connection Diagram Configure your RPvdsEx circuit to output the same signal to DAC channels A and B then connect the transducer as shown in the diagram above Stereo Headphone Output DAC channels A and B are also available as a stereo headphone output through two 1 8 audio jack connector ports channel A is the left stereo output and channel B is the right stereo output The port labeled A amp B top provides a stereo headphone output suitable for experimental paradigms while the port labeled Mon bottom can be controlled by the Mon Level knob located directly to the right making it more suitable for monitoring the experiment A amp B MON LEVEL OUT A OutT B Ee Note All outputs use stereo power l o oj amplifiers al MIN MAX MON The RZ6 is equipped with an onboard monitor speaker provided for audio monitoring of a single channel A switch located directly to the left of the monitor speaker is used to select between DAC channels A and B or to disable the monitor speaker The monitor speaker output level is controlled by the Mon Level knob located directly to the right of the monitor stereo output A or Monitor Speaker Electrostatic Speaker Output An onboard two channel broadband electrostatic speaker driver is provided allowing direct connection of TDT s
355. xceed 60 dB are handled using digital attenuation For example if you set an attenuation value of 66 dB in the RZ6_AudioOut macro the analog attenuator will be set to 60 dB and the remaining 6 dB of attenuation will be applied by scaling the digital signal through RPvdsEx Note For the best results you should utilize the maximum D A voltage range and use the RZ6_AudioOut macro to configure the desired attenuation setting for channels A and B Manual Attenuator The RZ6 includes another level of analog attenuation that can be controlled manually via the attenuator control knob from 0 to 27 dB in increments of 3 dB Manual attenuation is applied to both channels before the signals are output on any of the front panel connectors and is therefore applied in addition to any programmable attenuation set in RPvdsEx through the RZ6_AudioOut macro ATTEN DB o 3 27 24 9 21 12 18 15 Analog Output via BNCs DAC channels A and B are output to BNCs labeled Out A and Out B after attenuation has been applied These outputs use a stereo power amplifier to drive TDT s FF1 and CF1 Magnetic speakers OUT A Out B Note A single signal generated or input from any of the RZ6 analog inputs can be ganged to reduce the spectral variation in power of the transducer across all frequencies see the Power Output Diagram for specific detail on page 1 34 To do this configure your signal to output from both DAC channels as shown in the follo
356. y is 18 samples Sampling Rate Considerations There are no onboard analog to digital converters ADCs on the Medusa base station When acquiring data a preamplifier does this conversion Since the fiber optic connection from a preamplifier to the base station has a transfer rate limitation of 25 kHz circuits utilizing this data acquisition must use a sample rate of 25 kHz or less Otherwise i e circuits with digital to analog conversion only the maximum sample rate is 50 kHz Force Pushing a paper clip in to the pinhole next to the clip light deletes the microcode on the base station Once the microcode is deleted the RA16 base station will need to be reprogrammed USB Transfer Rates USB transfers are limited to 100 000 samples per second of 32 bit data 16 channels of 25 KHz data produces 400 000 samples of data per second Data reduction techniques such as Compress to 16 and Shuffle to 16 will reduce the data size without significant loss of information Selective channel analysis and filtering can further reduce the amount of data transferred System 3 Manual RP Processors 3 5 Memory The RAI6BA Medusa comes standard with 32MB of RAM At 16 channels in 16 bit mode 32MB would give around 40 seconds of continuous data acquisition Each additional base station could add an additional 2 5 minutes of continuous data acquisition Medusa Base Station Technical Specifications Note The RA16BA has no onboard AD converter
357. y one input for channel A at a o time Attempting to input signals from multiple sources will produce an erroneous signal RZ Z Series Processors 1 27 Analog input is accessed in RPvdsEx through the RZ6_AudioIn macro RZ6_Audioln ADC A B ADC B ADC and Microphone Amplifier An onboard two channel amplifier provides gain for the onboard analog input signals MIC A DIFF A In A and In B The switch located to the left of the gain control knob allows the current gain setting to be applied if set to Amp or bypassed completely if set to Byp Important When the gain is enabled analog input signals MIC A and DIFF A are differential Since the differential signals are summed a signal gain of 6 dB will be inherently applied If the amplifier is bypassed common mode rejection is disabled Note To prevent clipping caused by a DC offset the amplifier is AC coupled when the gain amplification is in use B GAIN DB 20 Aiie 65 25 D 60 30 55 35 BYP 40 45 Gain The front panel gain control knob can be used to the control overall signal level of both channels from 20 to 65 dB in 5 dB steps Fiber Optic Port Optional The RZ6 A P1 acquires digitized signals from a Medusa preamplifier over a fiber optic cable The port can be used with the RA4PA to input up to 4 channels Input from the preamplifier fiber optic port is accessed using the RZ6_AmpIn macro RZ6_Ampin Fiber Oversampling acquisition only
358. y the PZ3_ Control macro can be used to enable or disable the clip warning indicators For more information on the PZ3_Control macro see PZ3 Macros page 5 11 Modifying the Input Voltage Range on the PZ3 In the default mode the PZ3 has an effective differential input range of 3mV which TDT recommends for EEG LFP and ECOG If recordings demand a higher input range such as EMGs the alternate High Input Range mode allows the input range to increase to 20mV Important The PZ3 automatically detects the gain setting and voltage range and scales the signal output accordingly Note The signal to noise performance is better while operating in the 3mV input range Enabling the High Input Range Mode The high input range mode can be enabled through the PZ3_ Control macro gt To enable the high range input mode select 20 mV from the Input Range option on the Options tab Testing your Electrode Impedance Impedance measurement may be enabled programmatically or using the front panel Display Mode button Enabling Impedance Mode gt To enable impedance mode manually push and hold down the Display Mode button on the PZ3 front panel During impedance checking all channels are tested in parallel using a 375 Hz test signal and the impedance is measured relative to a target impedance 1kQ 15kQ specified by the user set using the PZ3_ Control macro The LEDs on the PZ3 and in the PZ3 display on the RZ2 LCD will light gr
359. y with the ED1 Electrostatic Speaker Driver Input is via a 4 pin mini DIN connector which carries both bias and signal voltages from the speaker driver Connection to the speaker driver is through a standard 20 long cable Other cable lengths can be special ordered but will affect the speaker s frequency response The speakers come fully enclosed to eliminate access to the high voltage bias and driving signals A 1 8 mounting hole at the base of the speaker accepts a standard 4 40 standoff See the ED Electrostatic Speaker Driver page 14 13 for information about gain settings The orientation of the cable connection is indicated with dots on the cable connector and on the speaker The cable should be connected so that the dot on the cable faces towards the speaker When connecting the cable ensure that the four pin connectors are fully seated on the speaker and the speaker driver When the cable is repeatedly moved during the experiment periodically check that the connectors are fully seated System 3 Manual Transducers and Amplifiers 14 9 EC1 Coupled Electrostatic Speaker The EC1 includes a small piece of Tygon tubing coupled to the output The tubing will transfer the signal best when it is kept straight Note that the speaker performance is dependent on the coupling system used and the ear of the animal Users should test the device under experimental conditions to ensure it meets their requirements Technical Specification
360. zA 8 To reverse the operation set the zBusA trigger low set the zBusB trigger high 2B then cycle through the DataTable values System 3 Manual 15 10 Subject Interfaces Combining the position and column setup The following example combines the two data tables and uses one ToBits component to control the button box s LEDs 1 3 0 Determine which LED is lit within the diamond Yy JUL pattern 1 5 0 Color of LED 0 lights the top p 1 lights the left pees TUL 2 lights the right 3 lights the bottom iLO Pee Constl 4 ToBits bo 1 7 0 2 d b b1 lt i Color_Pos 3 K 0 J bRst 0 b2 M 4 UL b3 b4 1 9 0 b5 p DataTable gt 4 M JUL Position of LED I 1 oe 0 The DataTable contains values that gt a ue JUL represent both the column and position 7 Turns on the specified LED Turns off the specified LED Turns off all LEDs 1 15 0 1 17 0 1 13 0 _ 1 14 0 p 1 16 0 p 1 12 0 si Src zBusA flA M 32 An Sre zBusB 1 6 eM 64 MN Sro Soft2 fl w i28 IN The single data table used in this example contains values that combine the column and position For example If 28 is used in the data table the circuit selects the top LED in the seventh column That s because the top position in the seventh column is represented by the digital number 11100 as shown below which equals 28 Column Select Lines LED Position Select Lines D D D D Do 1 1 1 0 0 To learn more about this

System 3 Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents